% \iffalse meta-comment
% !TEX TS-program = dtxmk
%
% Copyright (C) 2002-2020 by John Burt <burt@brandeis.edu>
% --------------------------------------------------
%
% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the
% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c
% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
% The latest version of this license is in:
%
% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
%
% The Current Maintainer of this work is John Burt.
%
% This work consists of the files poemscol.dtx and poemscol.ins
% and the derived file poemscol.sty.
%
% \fi
%
% \iffalse
%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1997/12/01]
%<package>\ProvidesPackage{poemscol}
%<package> [2020/06/12 v3.1415926 poemscol file]
%
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\usepackage{makeidx,multicol,keyval,ifthen}
\setlength\IndexMin{100pt}
\EnableCrossrefs
\CodelineIndex
\RecordChanges
\begin{document}
\DocInput{poemscol.dtx}
\end{document}
%</driver>
% \fi
%
% \CheckSum{10704}
%
% \CharacterTable
% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
%
%
% \changes{v1.0}{2002/06/05}{Initial version}
% \changes{v1.01}{2002/06/25}{Added commands for titles of poems without
% formal titles. Corrected typographical errors in manual.}
% \changes{v1.1}{2003/04/18}{Added commands to change mark in cases
% where page break fall (or does not fall) on stanza break. Added
% command to change the amount of indentation in runover lines in
% verse. Removed special geometry to make the program more generic.}
% \changes{v1.11}{2005/02/12}{Corrected bugs in headers for
% explanatory notes and emendations.}
% \changes{v1.2}{2005/2/19}{Accidentals and typescript variants test
% to see whether textual notes are being made. Corrected a bug when
% quoting verse in note sections. Added a command to change the page
% number of the table of contents. Added a command to input the table
% of contents file. Added commands to input the external files for
% emendations, explanatory notes, textual notes, and the index of
% titles and first lines. Added a command to test whether there is an
% .aux file from a previous run and to prevent typesetting of the
% external files for emendations, explanatory notes, textual notes if
% there is not. Added a command to restore the main page style after
% the table of contents.} \changes{v1.7}{2005/2/22}{Changed how labels
% are made for use in contents and notes sections. Control sequences
% in titles (such as for italics and so on) no longer require special
% commands, although those commands are retained for backward
% compatibility.} \changes{v2.01}{2005/2/22}{Rewrote all of the title
% commands in order to make them easier to maintain. Added environment
% for flushing runover lines in verse to the right margin. Added
% information on how to customize titles.}
% \changes{v2.02}{2005/2/28}{Corrected an error in setting poems
% without formal titles} \changes{v2.12}{2005/3/19}{Notes sections can
% take ranges of lines.} \changes{v2.13}{2005/3/20}{tsentry no longer
% needs an unskip if the entry starts with a comma.}
% \changes{v2.2}{2005/3/23}{The user can create new kinds of endnote.}
% \changes{v2.21}{2005/3/24}{Cross references can refer to line
% numbers} \changes{v2.22}{2005/3/25}{Removed dependence upon
% marn.sty. Enabled multiple levels of block-formatted footnotes}
% \changes{v2.24}{2005/4/02}{commands to aid typesetting parallel
% texts.} \changes{v2.25}{2005/5/06}{Bug fix in running headers to
% notes sections} \changes{v2.26}{2005/5/09}{Fix no unskip in vertical
% mode error} \changes{v2.27}{2005/5/09}{Changed name of linelabel
% command, to prepare for making poemscol and lineno compatible}
% \changes{v2.30}{2005/5/16}{Prose sections such as Authors'
% Introductions are line numbered by lineno.sty. Textnotes,
% emendations, and explanatory notes for prose sections may be either
% footnotes or endnotes, and the latter are sent to the same place as
% their verse equivalents. Good solution to ``missing number''
% problem on first runs.} \changes{v2.301}{2005/5/31}{Corrected small
% bug in table of contents commands, rewrote manual for clarity}
% \changes{v2.31}{2005/6/3}{Ranges of line for notes sections (in
% verse or prose sections) need no longer involve counting of lines.
% Lemmas may be nested, may overlap, and may cross stanza boundaries.}
% \changes{v2.32}{2005/6/29}{Simpler configuration of marginal line
% numbers, revision of manual} \changes{v2.33}{2005/7/03}{Fixed a bug
% in index generation, compensated for odd interaction between
% fancyhdr and reversemarginpar} \changes{v2.34}{2005/7/17}{Easier
% modification of format of tables of contents}
% \changes{v2.35}{2005/7/18}{poemscol can break the lines for long
% titles in the table of contents on its own without making a mess of
% it. poemscol can break the lines for long titles on its own without
% making a mess of it. Modified commands for volume titles to use the
% facilities for poem titles.} \changes{v2.36}{2005/8/16}{Versions of
% note commands for typescript variants and accidentals for annotated
% prose. Commands for marking up and annotating prose by paragraph and
% sentence number. Commands for cross references by sentence and
% paragraph number.} \changes{v2.37}{2005/8/30}{In cases of broken
% lines or runover lines you can choose whether to set the line number
% with the beginning of the line or with the end of the line. Also,
% you can choose to have it set the number always at the beginning if
% the line number is at the left, and always at the end if it is at
% the right.} \changes{v2.38}{2005/9/04}{Checked cases where commands
% might introduce extra white space. Made sure that line numbers for
% verse, prose, and paragraph-sentence prose line up. Fixed
% overlapping of paragraph and line numbers for paragraph-sentence
% mode. Up to four sentences can appear on a line in paragraph-line
% mode without having their marginal line numbers overlap. Fixed a
% bug that added an extra colon in footnotes in paragraph-sentence
% format. Changed ``gutter'' and ``outer'' line numbering in verse
% and paragraph-sentence prose to use Peter Wilson's sidepars rather
% than marginpars.} \changes{v2.39}{2005/9/07}{Left a DeclareOption
% hanging in version 2.38. Fixed that.}
% \changes{v2.391}{2005/10/06}{Corrections to user's guide.}
% \changes{v2.392}{2005/10/13}{More corrections to user's guide.}
% \changes{v2.394}{2005/12/10}{More corrections to user's guide.}
% \changes{v2.4}{2006/02/25}{Commands to make new kinds of endnotes
% also make notes for line numbered prose sections and for prose
% sections with paragraph and sentence numbering.}
% \changes{v2.41}{2006/03/02}{Fixed a bug in line numbers of new kinds
% of prose note.} \changes{v2.42}{2006/03/04}{Fixed error in handling
% conditionals when setting prose numbered by sentence and paragraph.}
% \changes{v2.43}{2006/03/06}{Notes in prose numbered by sentence and
% paragraph number can refer only to the sentence number even when
% paragraphs are also being counted.}
% \changes{v2.44}{2006/03/07}{Fixed a bug which caused new kinds of
% endnotes in prose sections to add unwanted white space to the
% output.} \changes{v2.45}{2006/04/08}{Use of sidepar in v2.38
% introduced a problem, causing line numbers sometimes to drift up a
% point. Changed commands for putting verse line numbers, but not
% paragraph and sentence numbers, to use marginpars again.}
% \changes{v2.46}{2006/04/10}{Changed definition of sidepar so that it
% uses struts to find the depth of the line, restored line number
% commands to use sidepar and its variants.}
% \changes{v2.47}{2006/04/12}{Changed name of sidepar to pcmclsidepar
% to avoid conflicts with the sidepar command from the memoir class,
% since they are no longer exactly the same. Added commands to put a
% marginal reference to the notes section in the margins of poem
% titles.} \changes{v2.48}{2006/04/13}{Added more general form of the
% commands to put a marginal reference to the notes section in the
% margins of poem titles.} \changes{v2.49}{2006/04/25}{Changed
% marginal reference command to use marginpar rather than pmclsidepar
% (alas, it still adds vertical white space after the title with
% pmclsidepar). Added marginal reference commands for sequences and
% sequence sections. Fixed errors in manual. }
% \changes{v2.50}{2006/05/13}{Added marginal reference commands for
% poem sections, poem subtitles, epigraphs, and dedications. These
% commands no longer require an additional label command to set the
% label to which they refer. Added commands to make marginal
% references to the pages in notes sections where comments on
% individual lines may be found, for textual notes, explanatory notes,
% emendations, and user-defined notes. Added commands for changing
% the names of the Table of Contents, the various endnotes sections,
% and the running headers for the contents and endnotes sections, in
% order to facilitate editions of works in languages other than
% English.} \changes{v2.51}{2006/05/22}{Changed prose section
% environment so that it does not always assume that the modulo for
% line numbers in prose is the same as the number in verse. Corrected
% a problem with alignment of line numbers in the prosesectionnoreset
% environment. Added commands to support generation of multiple
% indices using the splitindex package. Fixed a variety of small
% bugs, including a newly introduced one in the correction to textual
% notes for quoted verse.} \changes{v2.52}{2007/07/10}{Changed
% dedication to poemdedication to avoid a conflict with a command in
% koma-script. dedication command is provided using providecommand
% for compatibility} \changes{v2.53}{2007/07/14}{Changed the name of
% an internal token register to avoid a conflict with babel}
% \changes{v2.531}{2011/08/16}{Fixed a typo in example code.}
% \GetFileInfo{poemscol.sty} \changes{v2.6}{2012/08/31}{Added an
% optional argument to the poem environment to center the text block
% of the poem on the longest line. Added a switch to enable titles to
% be centered on the page.} \changes{v2.61}{2013/02/06}{Added a
% boolean to switch notes to one note per paragraph form. Boolean to
% switch off poem titles in notes. Two column formatting for notes sections.}
% \changes{v2.62}{2013/05/22}{You can adjust the margins of
% epigraphs, dedications, and similar things. Made the appearance of
% entries in the table of contents for endnotes sections
% customizable. Fixed a bug which caused user-defined
% endnotes to put extra white space in prose passages.}
% \changes{v2.63}{2013/06/01}{Revisions to manual.}
% \changes{v2.64}{2013/08/02}{Bug fix: remove extra white space in
% custom endnotes for prose sections when notes are in single paragraph mode. Fix
% appearance of page number in endnote sections.}
% \changes{v2.65}{2013/12/20}{Modifications to parallel text commands,
% corrections to manual.}
% \changes{v2.66}{2015/5/14}{Change to page styles}
% \changes{v2.7}{2015/6/18}{Improvements to parallel texts.}
% \changes{v2.72}{2015/6/25}{Improvements to parallel texts. Generic note types for parallel texts.
% corrections to manual.}
% \changes{v2.8}{2017/8/25}{Changes in default values about where line numbers
% are placed. verselinenumberstoleft and related commands no longer change
% marginparsep. Endnote sections may have normal or hanging paragraphs.
% Endnotes may have multiple paragraphs.}
% \changes{v2.81}{2017/8/30}{Versemarginadjust to
% adjust margins of the verse block. Line numbers automatically move closer to
% the text when the text block is centered on the longest line. New boolean to
% force line numbers to the margins when the text block is centered. New commands to
% control the distance of line numbers from margins of centered text block. New default
% values for marginparwidth and marginparsep.}
% \changes{v2.85}{2017/9/03}{Boolean to turn centering of verse block on and off.
% Subtitles center when centertitles is issued. New boolean to adjust placement of marginal
% reference markers in jhtextnote and related commands.}
% \changes{v2.87}{2017/10/23}{Notes to appear at the end of individual poems.}
% \changes{v2.88}{2017/10/29}{Revisions to manual.}
% \changes{v2.89}{2017/11/30}{Append the date to the end of the poem.}
% \changes{v2.9}{2017/12/02}{Date aligns with left margin of poem even when poem is centered.}
% \changes{v2.95}{2017/12/20}{Long poems can put firstline---lastline in running header.
% Revisions to manual. Textual notes, emendation notes, and explanatory notes can also be
% placed at the end of the poem rather than at the bottom of the page or in an endnote section.
% Commands to set the title only in the contents and only in the notes.}
% \changes{v2.96}{2018/01/02}{Epigraphs, headnotes, dedications, and attributions move
% towards the center when titles are centered. Easier customization of epigraphs and similar things.}
% \changes{v2.97}{2018/01/05}{Correction to JHepigraphs. Epigraphenvironment for
% headnotes with more than one stanza or paragraph. Corrections to manual.}
% \changes{v2.98}{2018/01/11}{Corrections to manual.}
% \changes{v2.99}{2019/08/02}{Hierarchy of indented stanzas}
% \changes{v3}{2019/08/03}{With centered verse you can align the title, epigraphs,
% attributions, and so on with the left margin of the verse block.}
% \changes{v3.01}{2019/08/04}{Corrections to manual}
% \changes{v3.04}{2019/08/18}{Appendix sections. New contents entries.}
% \changes{v3.08}{2019/09/03}{Indentations of species of titles in text can be independently changed without changing the
% definition of the title. Appendix and Foreword section titles can be indented differently from notes section titles. }
% \changes{v3.081}{2019/09/05}{Fixed centertitles bug for subsections}
% \changes{v3.09}{2019/09/06}{New schemes for titles. Titles can be placed
% according the indentation schemes introduced in version 3.08, at the left text margin, at
% the left verse margin, centered over the longest line of a verse block at the left verse margin,
% at the left margin of a verse block centered on the longest line, and centered over a verse
% block centered over the longest line.}
% \changes{v3.1}{2019/09/08}{New commands shortpoemepigraph, shortpoemdedication,
% shortpoemattribution, JHshortepigraph, JHshortdedication. These
% commands are controlled by the same booleans that control placement
% of titles.}
% \changes{v3.12}{2019/09/05}{Bug fix. Fix command clash with titlesec. Manual revision}
% \changes{v3.13}{2019/09/15}{Fixed subtitles in emendations and explanations, Fixed bug in sequencesectiontitlefirstline, changed sequence hierarchy of indentations, subsubsections of sequences no longer appear in contents}
% \changes{v3.14}{2019/09/27}{Bug fix: ifpagenumberinnotesfalse, Manual revision}
% \changes{v3.141}{2019/10/27}{Manual revisions. Fixed spacing of sentence and
% paragraph numbers in
% sections numbered by paragraph and sentence. You can suppress the appearance of the
% first sentence number, whether in the margin or in the running text. You can suppress
% the appearance of the first paragraph number, whether in the margin or in the running text.}
% \changes{v3.1415}{2020/05/25}{Changed controlling how to place
% marginal marks in JHpoemtitle and its siblings, and in JHtextnote
% and its siblings. Marginal marks are now set using their own inserts, rather than using marginpar.}
% \changes{v3.14159}{2020/06/02}{Marginal marks set by JHpoemtitle now work with the different
% title placement schemes.}
% \changes{v3.141592}{2020/06/12}{Special commands for titles with footnotes (where the footnotes
% are authorial and part of the title). Title footnotes can be set at the bottom of the page, like
% traditional footnotes, at the bottom of the page like ``Layered'' footnotes, or at the
% end of the poem. Marginal marks set by JHpoemtitle can be placed
% independently of the marginal marks produced by margreftextnote..}
% \changes{v3.1415926}{2020/08/08}{Bug fix. Extra white space problem. Thanks to David Carlisle.}
% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,\newenvironment,\def,\edef,\else,\renewcommand,\makeatletter,\makeatother}
% \DoNotIndex{\abovedisplayskip,\belowdisplayskip,\abovedisplayshortskip,\belowdisplayshortskip}
% \DoNotIndex{\newcommand, \section, \subsection, \subsubsection,
% \fileversion,} \DoNotIndex{\filedate, \docdate, \leavevmode,
% \vspace, \small, \normalsize, \fontsize,} \DoNotIndex{\newcommand,
% \section, \subsection, \subsubsection, \fileversion}
% \DoNotIndex{\filedate, \docdate, \leavevmode, \vspace, \small,
% \normalsize, \fontsize} \DoNotIndex{\selectfont, \abovedisplayskip,
% \belowdisplayskip, \setlength, \item} \DoNotIndex{\global, \input,
% \def, \edef, \texttt, \textsf, \setcounter}
% \DoNotIndex{\pagenumbering, \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin,
% \newdimen, \renewcommand} \DoNotIndex{\makeatletter, \let, \@listi,
% \@listl, \z@, \@xpt, \@xipt, \p@ , \@plus2} \DoNotIndex{\@minus5,
% \@minus3, \@plus3, \makeatother, \@minus4, \relax, \pagestyle}
% \DoNotIndex{\fancyhead, \fancyfoot, \thepage, \@ixp}
% \DoNotIndex{\begin \botmark, \botmark, \catcode, \croppadbot,
% \croppadtop} \DoNotIndex{\croppagewidth, \endverse, \equal,
% \fancyfoot, \fancyhead, \fancyhf} \DoNotIndex{\fancypagestyle,
% \firstmark, \footrulewidth, \hbox, \hbox, \headrulewidth}
% \DoNotIndex{\hfil, \hspace, \ifthenelse, \immediate, \itemindent,
% \listparindent} \DoNotIndex{\makeatletter, \nolinebreak, \openout,
% \raggedbottom, \setcounter, \textrm} \DoNotIndex{\value, \vspace,
% \write} \DoNotIndex{\afterpoemtitleskip, \addtocounter, \advance,
% \begin, \bf, \bigskip} \DoNotIndex{\bigskipamount, \fi, \@fulltitle,
% \label, \large, \leftheader} \DoNotIndex{\leftheadervalue,
% \leftmargin, \leftmargini} \DoNotIndex{\medskip, \newcounter,
% \nobreak, \par, \textbf}
% \DoNotIndex{\closeout,\em,\emph,\expandafter,\Huge,\it,\jobname,\kern,\newif,
% \newwrite,\p@,\pageref,\renewenvironment,\rm,\scriptsize,\string,
% \textsc, \unskip}
% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
% \MakeShortVerb{|}
% \def\fileversion{3.1415926}
% \def\filedate{8 August 2020}
% \def\docdate{8 August 2020}
% \title{Typesetting Poetry Collections with
% \textsf{poemscol}\thanks{This document corresponds to
% \textsf{poemscol}~\fileversion, dated \filedate.}}
% \author{John Burt
% \\ \texttt{burt@brandeis.edu}}
% \date{8 August 2020}
% \maketitle
% \begin{abstract} \textsf{poemscol} provides commands for \LaTeX\ for
% setting collections of poetry. It is especially suited for setting
% collections of poetry in which several volumes are combined, such as
% in a critical edition of a poet's Collected Poems. It provides the
% structures required to produce a critical edition of the kind
% specified by the Modern Language Association's Committee on
% Scholarly Editions, and it automatically marks every occasion where
% a stanza break falls on a page break. \end{abstract}
% \tableofcontents \hfuzz=50pt \section{Introduction}
%
% \textsf{poemscol} provides the structures necessary for editing a
% critical edition of a volume of poems (or of a collection of a poet's
% works) such as those required by the Modern Language Association's
% Committee on Scholarly Editions. \textsf{poemscol} numbers the lines, and produces separate,
% formatted endnote sections (or, optionally,
%multiple layers of footnotes) for emendations, textual collations, and
% explanatory notes, tying
% each note to the range of lines upon which it is a comment.
%
% Producing line numbers for verse is something for which \LaTeX\
% would seem to be especially suited. A line of verse, after all, is
% not a carriage return but a logical unit, an element of
% versification more than of typesetting, perhaps running over several
% physical lines, or perhaps split into half-lines as speakers or
% subjects change. With \textsf{poemscol} you mark lines, stanzas,
% and entire poems up as logical units, and \LaTeX\ does the
% formatting and counting. Once you have marked out the logical units
% of the poem, \textsf{poemscol} will automatically mark every textual
% note, emendation, or explanatory note with the range of line
% numbers to which it applies.
%
% Editions of Collected Poetry might also require special structures
% to reflect the fact that they are made up of the contents of several
% volumes of poetry. In particular, such editions require
% facilities for setting up specially formatted divider pages between
% volumes. They also require tables of contents and other front matter, as well
% as an index of titles and first lines (or, optionally, several separate indices)
% and other sorts of back matter.
% \textsf{poemscol} automatically generates a table of contents, an index of titles
% and first lines, and divider pages for the sections of the volumes.
% It produces running headers of the form ``Emendations to pp.~xx-yy''
% for the note sections.
%
% In poetry which does not have a regular stanzaic form, it is useful
% to be able to mark automatically occasions where there is a stanza
% break at the bottom of a page which the reader might not notice.
% Doing this by hand is not only tedious and easy to get wrong, but
% also a process you will have to start over again if anything about
% your volume changes --- if you add a poem, say, or even decide to break
% a title across two lines. \textsf{poemscol} takes care of this
% process, so that the editor need never worry about it, automatically
% marking cases where the page break coincides with a stanza break
% with a symbol.
%
% \textsf{poemscol} includes facilities for typesetting parallel text editions
% of poems, for instance to compare different versions or translations of the same poem
% on the recto and verso pages. \textsf{poemscol} will keep the line
% numbering of the two texts separate, will provide separate endnote sections
% for textual notes, emendations, and explanatory notes for the different texts,
% and will also make marginal markers to tie lines in the verso text to the
% equivalent line in the recto text.
%
% \textsf{poemscol} is also suited for verse drama, and the package
% \textsf{dramatist} has been modified to work with \textsf{poemscol}.
%
% \textsf{poemscol} can provide line numbers and notes for prose
% sections such as the author's introduction or prose poetry. (It
% can also handle inset prose passages in the midst of verse, pausing and
% restarting verse line numbering as the editor desires.)
% It also has some limited facilities for typesetting and annotating
% line-numbered parallel passages in prose.
% \textsf{poemscol} is not, however, designed for typesetting critical editions of large
% scale prose works, although very possibly it could be tweaked to
% work. For critical editions of prose works, several
% other packages are available, including the \texttt{EDMAC} format, a
% \TeX\ format analogous to but distinct from \LaTeX, by John
% Lavagnino and Dominik Wujastyk, or \textsf{ledmac}, a port of
% \texttt{EDMAC} into \LaTeX\ originally by Peter Wilson and
% now maintained as \textsf{reledmac} by Ma\"{\i}eul Rouquette, or \textsf{ednotes}, a
% completely independent set of commands for critical editions which
% builds on \textsf{manypar} and \textsf{lineno}, by Uwe L\"{u}ck.
%
% \textsf{poemscol} can number and annotate prose marked in
% ``paragraph number: sentence number''
% format (or bible chapter and verse). The advantage of this method of numbering lines
% of prose is that what is numbered is something the author chose to create
% (sentences and paragraphs)
% rather than an accidental feature of typesetting (line numbers). Paragraph and sentence
% numbering will also be stable across multiple editions, and, like line numbers in verse,
% provides a common system of reference.
%
% \textsf{poemscol} provides
% the ability to make cross references to verse line numbers, to line numbers in prose sections,
% or to paragraph and sentence numbers in sections with ``paragraph and sentence'' annotation.
%
% \textsf{poemscol} also provides a few bells and whistles, such as the ability
% to create new endnote or footnote sections on the fly, the ability
% to center a poem on the longest line (or to move the margin of the
% verse block wherever you wish), and the ability to place a mark in the margin
% indicating where in the apparatus commentary on that line can be found.
% For long poems, \textsf{poemscol} can provide a
% a special running header which indicates the range of lines to be
% found on the page.
% It has a special command to place
% the publication date under the poem just at the left margin of the verse block even
% when the verse block is centered.
% \textsf{poemscol} also provides notes
% to be placed just after a poem (rather than at the bottom of the page
% or in the endnote sections). It gives the user
% fine control over the placement of line numbers and the placement and format of titles
% including multi-line titles.
% The user can choose whether to concatenate the notes for a poem into a single paragraph,
% or to give each note a separate paragraph. The user can print the notes
% in single or multicolumn format. The names of things like the Contents can
% be changed to facilitate editions in languages other than English.
% Just about every feature of \textsf{poemscol} can be
% easily customized.
%
% The best features of \textsf{poemscol} are of course simply that it
% is \TeX: it uses \TeX's automatic kerning and setting of ligatures,
% its algorithm for justifying lines (in prose sections), and \LaTeX's
% way of setting verse.
%
% Using \LaTeX\ to typeset critical editions offers more advantages
% than simply the ability to automate tedious and easy to fumble
% tasks. \TeX\ compilers have the ability to produce
% output in Adobe pdf format. Adobe pdf output can be used as camera
% ready copy, saving your publisher time and expense, and perhaps
% making a marginally economic critical edition a bit easier to bring
% to press. Furthermore, since typesetting the edition yourself in
% \LaTeX\ obviates the publisher's own typesetting of your text, it
% removes another possible source of new errors. (You should expect
% to work with your publisher on the final design of the book, but
% \LaTeX\ is a flexible language which will enable you to reproduce
% most book designs.)
%
% Editions made in the formats of proprietary software such as
% QuarkXPress\copyright\ or InDesign\copyright\ will become not only obsolete
% but unreadable if those programs pass from use. Since your \LaTeX\
% sources for your edition are in ASCII, or perhaps Unicode, they provide a permanent
% record of your local intentions at every point in your edition,
% whether or not those who wish to consult your files have access to a
% \LaTeX\ compiler, or indeed (since most of the commands have self-explanatory names)
% whether or not they can read \LaTeX\
% code.
%
% Although \LaTeX\ is a typesetting language, not a content
% markup language, the ability to create new commands which the
% language offers comes very close to enabling one to realize the
% ideal of completely separating content markup from formatting. One
% advantage of this kind of markup is that even if the appearance of
% the poem on the page may be ambiguous, the editor's intentions about
% the logical structure of the poem will be preserved in the \LaTeX\
% source. Should you wish later to produce an electronic edition of
% your work, perhaps using the XML markup approved by the Text
% Encoding Initiative, transforming your texts from \LaTeX\ to XML
% would largely (although not entirely) be a matter of performing a
% series of global search-and-replaces, and could conceivably be done
% with XSLT or with perl.
%
% This is a long manual, but there is no need to study it all before beginning.
% In the first place, it includes all the commented-on source code for the
% package, which will only matter to you if you are planning to customize
% it in some way I didn't anticipate, or if you need to know how the commands
% work internally. (The code section begins on page \pageref{implementation}.)
% The most important commands are explained in the first 30 pages, and even there
% many sections discuss things you may not need to know immediately. Also,
% many sections conclude with a subsection which suggests ways of customizing
% the output, usually giving suggestions in increasing order of difficulty. You'll
% have to be the judge of what to skip the first time through.
%
% \section{Dependencies and compatibility with other packages}
%
%\subsection{~General}
% \textsf{poemscol} depends upon several other packages, which you
% should be sure you have in your preamble and search path:
% \textsf{fancyhdr} for managing the running headers, \textsf{makeidx}
% and \textsf{multicol} for managing the index, \textsf{geometry}, and
% \textsf{ifthen} and \textsf{keyval} to simplify page geometry.
%
% If you are planning to generate multiple indices, substitute
% \textsf{splitindex} for \textsf{makeidx} in your list of packages.
%
%
% \subsection{~Prose sections}
% If you plan to number lines in prose contexts, and to make textual
% notes, emendations, or explanatory notes in prose contexts, you will
% need to add the \textsf{lineno} package to your preamble. I use the
% ``right'' and ``modulo'' options with this package, but you can set
% the options however you wish to make how you number the lines of
% prose sections consistent with how you number the lines of verse
% sections.
%
% \subsection{~Multi-layer footnotes} If you plan to use
% paragraph-formatted footnotes rather than endnotes, you should load
% \textsf{manyfoot}. You should load it with the ``ruled,'' and
% ``para'' options. (\textsf{poemscol's} footnote commands are just a
% wrapper around \textsf{manyfoot}.) \textsf{manyfoot} inherited some
% of the limitations of \LaTeX\ in dealing with long inserts at the
% end of the page, so you may have to do some fiddling. As fixes to
% these problems emerge, I will incorporate them into
% \textsf{poemscol}. \textsf{manyfoot} does not allow multiple
% paragraph footnotes when typesetting in ``para'' mode. This is
% probably a feature, not a bug, since one would want such notes to be
% set in several paragraphs, rather than running them together into
% one, as \textsf{manyfoot} would naturally want to do in para mode.
% For that reason, I have defined the two traditional classes of note
% in which multiple paragraph notes are likely to appear, ``sources,''
% and ``explanatory notes,'' to be typeset in ``plain'' mode, which
% opens a new paragraph with each note. If your textual notes or
% emendations sections also have multiple paragraph notes, you should
% re-define them in order to produce footnotes in plain rather than in
% para mode, if you wish to produce footnotes rather than endnotes.
%
% \textsf{manyfoot} sometimes gets into conflicts with other packages
% over the number of |\counts| it uses, causing \LaTeX\ to complain
% that there is no room for a |\newcount|. If this happens,
% issue |\usepackage{etex}| and |\reserveinserts| in your preamble.
%
% \subsection{~Special running header for long poems}
% For long poems, it is a convenience to have a running header
% that includes information about what lines of the poem appear
% on that page in the form firstline--lastline. The fancypagestyle |longpoem|
% will set that information in the running header. That page style
% uses the |\marks| mechanism, and requires more |\marks| than
% are available by default. To use it, you will need to add the \textsf{etex} and
% \textsf{emarks} packages to your preamble.
%
% \subsection{~Verse drama and \textsf{dramatist}}
% Massimiliano Dominici has made his \textsf{dramatist} package
% compatible with \textsf{poemscol}, for which I am very grateful.
% Versions 1.2a or later of \textsf{dramatist} are compatible with
% versions 2.3 or later of \textsf{poemscol}.
%
%
% \subsection{~Parallel text editions}
% \begin{sloppypar}
% If you are using the six pre-defined endnote sections
% for parallel text editions (|\rectotexnote|, |\versotextnote|, |\rectoemendation|, |\versoemendation|,
% |\rectoexplanatory|, |\versoexplanatory| and their prose equivalents |\rectoprosetextnote|
% and so on) you won't need to add any new packages. If
% you are defining your own endnote sections using |\definenewnotetype| you may need
% the |\keeptitlestraight| hack described below at section \ref{parallelhack},
% page \pageref{parallelhack}. If you use |\keeptitlesstraight| you should add \textsf{etoolbox}
% to your package list.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \subsection{~Crop marks}
% \textsf{poemscol} no longer provides cropmarks, but is compatible with
% the style packages that do. I use \textsf{crop}, with the
% letter,pdftex,cam, and center options.
%
%
%
%
% \subsection{~Incompatibility with \textsf{memoir} and \textsf{verse}}
% Unfortunately, \textsf{poemscol} is not compatible with the
% \textsf{memoir} class and the \textsf{verse} package, because they
% share some command names. I will eventually prepare a workaround for this
% problem.
%
% \subsection{~Conflict with \textsf{BibLaTeX} }
% \BibTeX\ works with \textsf{poemscol} with no problem. But a bug I haven't
% yet tracked down (probably involving |\makeatletter|)
% complicates the use of \textsf{BibLaTeX}. To use \textsf{BibLaTeX}
% you will need to open up the .bbl file. You will find near the top
% the following lines:\\
% |\makeatletter|\\
% |\@ifundefined{ver@biblatex.sty}|\\
% | {\@latex@error|\\
% |{Missing 'biblatex' package}|\\
% | {The bibliography requires the 'biblatex' package.}|\\
% | \aftergroup\endinput}|\\
% |{}|\\
% Just comment out these lines and you will be able to use the .bbl file as usual.
%
%
% \subsection{~Compatibility with earlier versions of
% \textsf{poemscol}} Making \textsf{poemscol} compatible with
% \textsf{lineno} required me also to change the commands for turning
% verse line numbering on and off, which means that version 2.3 of
% \textsf{poemscol} is incompatible with prior versions. The old
% command |\makelinenumbers| has been replaced with
% |\makeverselinenumbers| to distinguish it from a command from the
% \textsf{lineno} world. (|\makelinenumbers| will still work, but I
% have deprecated it.) To turn on verse line numbering, issue
% |\makeverselinenumbers|. Because the counter ``linenumber'' has
% been changed to ``verselinenumber,'' you must use
% |\global\verselinenumbersfalse| to turn off line numbering, rather
% than |\global\linenumbersfalse| as before.
%
% Up to version 2.44 \textsf{poemscol} borrowed the code for
% |\sidepar| non-floating marginal paragraphs from the memoir class,
% and also made |\leftsidepar| and |\rightsidepar| commands on their
% model. Version 2.46 modified Peter Wilson's original code for
% |\sidepar|, so therefore I have changed the names of |\sidepar|,
% |\leftsidepar|, and |\rightsidepar| to |\pmclsidepar|,
% |\pmclleftsidepar| and |\pmclrightsidepar| respectively. If you
% used any of these commands in your files, you will need to change
% their names.
%
% Up to version 2.5 the |\definenewnotetype| command took four
% arguments, using the third argument for both the running header for
% the notes section and for the entry in the table of contents. In
% order to make it easier to handle titles in languages other than
% English I have found it necessary to separate these two uses, so
% |\definenewnotetype| now takes five arguments. You will need to
% retrofit files that use the old version of this command. You can
% see the details at section \ref{definingnewnotes}, page
% \pageref{definingnewnotes}.
%
%\begin{sloppypar}
% Version 3 introduced the boolean |\ifleftaligntitles|, for aligning the title with
% the left edge of a verse block centered on the longest line. Version 3.1 introduces
% new title placement schemes, including one which
% centers the title on the longest line of a verse block at the left margin. This made
% the meaning of |\ifleftaligntitles| ambiguous. So I have changed that boolean to
% |\iftitlesatleftmarginofcenteredblock.|\end{sloppypar}
%
% Up to version 3.141 the marginal marks associated with poem titles
% set by |\JHpoemtitle| and |\margreftextnote| moved in towards the
% verse block when the verse block is centered on the longest line.
% These marks could be returned to their normal position in the
% margin by setting the boolean |\margrefstomargin| to true. As of
% version 3.141 these marks are set in the margin by default even
% when verse block centering is in effect. The boolean |\margrefstomargin| controls
% nothing, but has been left in case I decide to restore the possibility
% of moving the marginal marks in when the lines are centered. You can control
% the horizontal placement of these marginal marks by changing the value
% of the length |\JHmarginparsep|.
%
% \section{Marking up individual poems}
% First, a word about the command names. The command names may seem
% ugly and long. And there are separate commands for many tasks that
% seem closely related, such as a command to mark the title of a
% section of a poetic sequence, and a separate command to mark a
% subsection. But the names do describe pretty much what
% each command does, and they do specify exactly what the object they
% mark is supposed to be. The markup is designed to look like content
% markup, marking objects as a poem title, as a stanza, as a line, and so on.
% \textsf{poemscol} gives all of these content terms typographical
% meaning.
%
% There are also many commands for special purposes whose necessity
% may not seem clear until the editor finds him or herself in the jam
% the command was designed for. For instance, \textsf{poemscol}
% normally encourages a page break before the title of a poem, or
% before the title of a section of a poetic sequence, to discourage
% page breaks between the title and the poem. But for the first
% section of a poetic sequence, or the first section of a poem in
% sections, one does not want to encourage \LaTeX\ to break the page
% before the section title, since that would leave the title of the sequence
% or the title of the larger poem as an orphan on the previous page.
% |\sequencefirstsectiontitle| and its siblings are designed for this
% situation. Although all commands like |\sequencefirstsectiontitle|
% discourage page breaks before the title (and all of the commands
% discourage page breaks after the title), widowed or orphaned titles,
% and orphaned first lines will still sometimes
% happen, particularly if you have a multi-line sequence title
% followed by a multi-line section title. For these cases, a page
% break at some other suitable point will have to be explicitly issued to
% move widowed or orphaned lines to better places.
%
% \subsection{~The title of the poem}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitle}|\poemtitle|, as its name implies, sets
% its argument as the title of the poem.
%The command takes one
% argument --- the title, of course. The command typesets the title in
% the body of the volume (testing first to see whether there is enough
% space at the bottom of the page to get the title and a couple of
% lines of the poem in), typesets the title in the table of contents
% (with the page number), typesets the title in the textual notes
% (adding the page number, and checking to see whether there is room
% enough on the page), and prepares similar entries in the lists of
% emendations and in the explanatory notes (if you need them)
% as well as in the endnote sections for any species of endnote you have defined for yourself.
% \textsf{poemscol} gives default values for
% such things as the font size, the separation between the top of the
% title and the bottom of the previous poem, the separation between
% the bottom of the title and the first line, and so on. It also sets
% penalties in order to encourage page breaks just before a title, and
% to discourage page breaks between a title and a poem.
%
% You can
% change all these values in your preamble by changing the value of
% the parameters for the relevant commands, listed below in the implementation section, using
% either |\setlength| or |\renewcommand| (depending upon what you are
% changing). Some common values you might change are described in section
% \ref{titlecustomization}.
%
% \subsubsection{Title placement schemes}
% \begin{sloppypar}
% There are a number of places where a title might be set. I have
% defined for this purpose five ``title placement schemes.'' For each
% one there is a boolean which turns on the choice, and a ``scheme''
% command which switches that boolean on and switches off the
% booleans for the other schemes. They are
%
% \begin{itemize}
%\item Aligned with the left print margin, or
% indented from it according to the scheme of title indentations (whether it is
% the title to a poem, to a section, to a subsection, or so on). The
% hierarchy of indentations for various kinds of title is described
% below at section \ref{customtitleindentations},
% page \pageref{customtitleindentations}.
% I will call the boolean that describes this
% situation |\ifnormaltitleindentation| because it was the default for
% \textsf{poemscol}. You invoke this title scheme with the command
% |\normaltitleindentationscheme|
%
% \item Aligned with the left margin of a left-aligned verse block.
% The verse block is normally inset from the left print margin by the length
% |\leftmargini | (the default distance between the left margin of
% a list environment --- I defined titles as lists --- and the surrounding text).
% I will call the boolean that describes
% title placement at the left verse margin |\iftitlesatleftversemargin|. You invoke this title
% scheme with the command |\titlesatleftversemarginscheme|.
%
% \item Centered over the longest line of a left-aligned verse block.
% I will call the boolean that describes this title placement
% |\iftitlescenteredonleftverseblock|. The corresponding command is
% |\titlescenteredonleftverseblockscheme|.
%
% \item Aligned with the left margin of a verse block centered on the
% page on the longest line. This will be associated with the boolean
% |\iftitlesatleftmarginofcenteredblock|. (In version 3.0 this boolean
% was called |\ifleftaligntitles|. I have removed that boolean
% because its meaning is ambiguous now.) The command to invoke this
% title scheme is |\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblockscheme|.
%
%
% \item Titles centered over a centered verse block. I call this
% |\ifcentertitleson|. The corresponding command is
% |\centertitlesscheme|. I have retained the command |\centertitles|
% from earlier versions of \textsf{poemscol} for compatibility. This
% scheme can also be used to center the titles (and epigraphs, headnotes
% and other top matter) over a non-centered verseblock too, if you
% don't use the optional argument to |\begin{poem}| describe in the next
% section, or if you turn off centering of the verse block by issuing the
% boolean |\textcenteringturnedonfalse|.
%\end{itemize}\end{sloppypar}
%
% \subsubsection{Using title placement schemes: verse width and title width}
% \begin{sloppypar}
% |\centertitlesscheme|, |\titlescenteredonleftverseblockscheme|, and \\
% |\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblockscheme| require additional information
% about each poem. Here are some details about the uses of these schemes.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\centertitlesscheme} For each poem you wish to center you will have
% to set the length of the length variable |\versewidth| to the
% width of the longest line. To do this, use |\settowidth| as
% follows:\\ |\settowidth{\versewidth}{text of longest line}|.\\
% |\centertitlesscheme| will center the
% titles even if you do not center the verse block on the longest
% line.
% To center the verseblock use the optional argument to |\begin{poem}| as follows:\\
% |\begin{poem}[\versewidth].| \\ (For further instructions about
% how to center the verse block on the longest line, see section \ref{centeringtextblock}
% on page \pageref{centeringtextblock}.)
%
% |\centertitlesscheme| also moves in epigraphs, headnotes,
% attributions, and dedications towards the center. Since an epigraph or a headnote may be
% a prose paragraph, or a passage of verse, it would be unwise to set them in a centering
% environment, so |\centertitles| just moves the margins of epigraphs and headnotes in
% towards the center. To adjust the placement
% of epigraphs and similar things, see section \ref{centerepigraphs}, page \pageref{centerepigraphs}.
% Single line epigraphs, attributions, and dedications, however,
% will be centered if |\centertitlesscheme|
% is in effect. There are special commands for single line epigraphs, attributions, or dedications.
% To set these, issue
% |\shortpoemepigraph|, |\shortpoemdedication|, or |\shortpoemattribution|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\titlescenteredonleftverseblockscheme}
%
% Using |\titlescenteredonleftverseblockscheme|
% scheme will require you to make known the width of the longest line
% of the poem being set \emph{and} the width of the title. You will need to
% use the |\settowidth| command to set the length of |\versewidth| and
% |\poemtitlewidth|. For example: \begin{quotation}
% \noindent |\settowidth{\poemtitlewidth}{poem title}| \\
% |\settowidth{\versewidth}{text of longest line}|. \end{quotation}
% Normally
% you should not use the optional argument to |\begin{poem}| with this
% title scheme. But you may have already marked up all your poems
% such a way as to leave open the choice of centering them. You can
% turn off centering of the verse block, without erasing all of the optional arguments, by
% issuing |\textcenteringturnedonfalse|. You can turn on centering the
% text block again by issuing |\textcenteringturnedontrue|.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% In this scheme, |\shortpoemepigraph|, |\shortdedication|, and |\shortattribution| will
% not center their arguments on the line, but set them flush with the beginning of the title.
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% If you don't set the length of |\poemtitlewidth| this scheme will simply set the
% left margin of the title over the center of the poem. (This may be an effect you want.)
%
% Note: this scheme will only yield proper results if the title is shorter than
% the longest line is.
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblockscheme}
%\begin{sloppypar}
%Rather than centering the title over
% a centered block of verse, one might prefer to align the title with
% the left margin of the centered verse block. The length |\versewidth|
% is used both to center the verse block and to place the title at the verse block's left margin.
% You will need to use |\settowidth| to set the length of |\versewidth| before
% issuing |\poemtitle| or the other title-making commands (such as |\sequencesectiontitle|).
% Issue |\settowidth{\versewidth}{Text to be used for centering}| just
% before you issue the |\poemtitle| or |\epigraph| command.
% In addition, you must center to verse block by using the optional argument |\versewidth|
% to |\begin{poem}|, for example: |\begin{poem}[\versewidth]|
%
% For more about how to use |\settowidth| to center the
% verse block or to align titles, epigraphs, and so forth with the left margin of the
% verse block, see section \ref{centeringtextblock}, page \pageref{centeringtextblock}.
%
% Consult the table to see when you should issue |\settowidth| and when you should
% use the optional argument to |\begin{poem}|.
%\begin{table}[h]
%\caption{Placement in Title Schemes}
%\bigskip
%{\scriptsize
%\begin{tabular}{l l l}
%\hline
%Scheme & Lengths to Set & Argument to |\begin{poem}|\\
%\hline
%|\normalindentationtitlescheme| & None & None\\
%|\titlesatversemarginscheme| & None & None\\
%|\titlescenteredonleftverseblockscheme| & |\poemtitlewidth| |\versewidth| & None\\
%|\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblockscheme| & |\versewidth| & |\begin{poem}[\versewidth]| \\
%|\centertitlesscheme| & |\versewidth| & |\begin{poem}[\versewidth]| \\
%\end{tabular}
%}
%\end{table}
% \end{sloppypar}
%
%\subsubsection{Customization of titles}\label{titlecustomization}
%
%\begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\leftalignepigraphs} You
% may also wish to align epigraphs, dedications, attributions, or
% headnotes with the left margin of the verse block (even if you
% center the titles). To do this, issue |\leftalignepigraphstrue| to
% set the boolean |\ifleftalignepigraphs|.
% |\leftalignepigraphstrue| will also align attributions,
% dedications, and other pre-texts of poems. (It will not affect the
% dedications and attributions on volume title pages, which are set
% using the |\volumededication|, |\volumeepigraph|, and
% |\volumeattribution| commands.) A new group of commands,
% |\shortpoemepigraph|, |\shortpoemdedication|, |\shortpoemattribution|,
% |\JHshortepigraph| and |\JHshortdedication| will appear at the places
% controlled by the new ``title schemes'' listed above. These commands will not
% obey |\leftalignepigraphs|.
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlefont}
% |\poemtitlefont| globally sets the font size (and
% leading) for all poem titles in the main text.
% For instance, you can change the font parameters for the font for
% setting poem titles from 14 points type on 18 points leading to 12 on 14 by issuing
% |\renewcommand{\poemtitlefont}{\fontsize{12}{14}\selectfont}| in
% your preamble. There are similar commands to set the font size and leading for
% the titles of poetic sequences,
% sequence sections, titles of volumes, and so on.
% You can find a complete list of those font parameters at section \ref{internal font size commands},
% page \pageref{internal font size commands}.
%
% |\poemtitlefont| and its siblings do not change the
% default typeface. To change the default typeface to, say, Times Roman, or
% Tex Gyre Pagella, use the commands \LaTeX\
% or Xe\LaTeX\ provide for that purpose (e.g.\ |\usepackage{tgpagella}|). Changing the default
% typeface is probably something you would want
% to do globally, not at the level of classes of title, anyway.
%\end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\contentspoemtitlefont}
% |\contentspoemtitlefont| globally sets the font size (and leading)
% for poem titles in the table of contents. There are similar commands for each of the
% other kinds of titles in the table of contents. They can be changed just as the font
% parameters for titles in the main text are changed, using |\renewcommand|.
% You can find a complete list of those font parameters at section \ref{internal font size commands},
% page \pageref{internal font size commands}.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\afterpoemtitleskip}
% |\afterpoemtitleskip|
% sets the vertical separation between a poem and its title. To change
% its value, for instance, to |\medskip| (the default is |\smallskip|),
% issue |\renewcommand{\afterpoemtitleskip}{\medskip}| in your preamble.
% |\afterpoemskip| sets the vertical separation between the end of a
% poem and the title of the next poem. ``Skips'' for other kinds of title can be
% changed the same way. You can find a complete list of these skips at
% section \ref{skiplist}, page \pageref{skiplist}.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlepenalty}
% |\poemtitlepenalty| encourages
% but does not require a page break just before a poem title. To change
% the penalty, for instance, from -1000 to -3000,
% issue |\renewcommand{\poemtitlepenalty}{\penalty-3000}|
% in your preamble. Penalties for other kinds of title can be changed the same way.
% A
% complete list of all of the special commands for setting font sizes,
% skips, and penalties, is in section \ref{changingfontsandleading}, page
% \pageref{changingfontsandleading}, below.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\putpagenumberinnotesfalse}
% If you don't want the entry in the notes section for this poem to include
% the page number of the poem, issue |\putpagenumberinnotesfalse|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\titleindent} |\titleindent| is an internal command for indented parts of titles.
% You should change it with caution. In the
% commands for setting the sections and subsections of poetic sequences,
% \textsf{poemscol} uses |\titleindent| internally to set up a
% hierarchy of indentations. (A section of a sequence is indented one
% |\titleindent|. A subsection is indented two. And so on.)
% |\titleindent| is also used internally in the commands for multiple
% line titles. Instructions about changing the value of |\titleindent|
% can be found in section \ref{changingfontsandleading}. Each kind of title,
% for poems, sections of poems, sequences, and so forth, has its own default
% indentation both in the text and in the table of contents. You can see a list of these
% default values, and instructions about how to change them, at \ref{customtitleindentations},
% page \pageref{customtitleindentations}.
%
% \subsubsection{Subtitles and special titles}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemsubtitle} Subtitles of poems should be issued as
% the arguments to the |\poemsubtitle| command.
%
% Multiple line titles (if it matters how they are broken up on page),
% titles of subsections of poems, titles of
% sequences of poems, titles of the elements of a sequence of
% poems, and ``empty'' titles (for untitled poems)
% are all special cases, with special commands, which will be
% dealt with below at sections \ref{multilinetitles} and \ref{poeticsequences}.
%You can also create new varieties of title. For instructions
% on how to do this, see section \ref{customizing titles} below, page \pageref{customizing titles}.
%
% \subsection{~The body of the poem}
%
% \subsubsection{The poem environment}
% \DescribeEnv{poem} The body of every poem should be placed in a
% |poem| environment. Putting the body of the poem between
% |\begin{poem}| and |\end{poem}| resets the line counter to 1,
% puts the poem in a modified |verse| environment (to handle run over lines
% automatically), and turns off automatic hyphenation with the |poem| environment.
%
% \DescribeEnv{pmclverse} \textsf{poemscol} slightly modifies the |verse|
% environment from the standard \LaTeX\ definition, increasing the
% indentation used for run over lines, in order to make the difference
% between the indented run over portion of a long line, on one hand,
% and an explicitly indented second line, on the other, more obvious in the output.
% \textsf{poemscol} also adds a little bit
% more white space between stanzas than the standard \LaTeX\ |verse|
% environment does. (I found that the standard stanza breaks did not
% leap out on the page as stanza breaks.)
% The verse environment for \textsf{poemscol} is |pmclverse|, defined
% below on page \pageref{versedefine}. You don't have to place poems explicitly in
% the |pmclverse| environment. The |poem| environment automatically opens (and closes)
% |pmclverse|.
%
% \subsubsection{Customizing the poem environment}
% \DescribeMacro{\versewidth}
% The |poem| environment uses an optional argument to center the verse block on a
% line of a given width. If your poem has
% short lines, and you wish to center it on the page, rather than set
% it against the left margin of the normal |poem| environment, you can
% give the width of the line you want to use to center the poem as the optional
% argument. To center a verse block 30 ems wide, for instance, issue
% |\begin{poem}[30em]|.
%
% \label{centeringtextblock}
% Rather than specifying the length explicitly, you can use the length
% |\versewidth| as the optional
% argument to |\begin{poem}|. You can set the length of |\versewidth| to the proper
% amount using |\settowidth| as follows:
% \begin{center} |\settowidth{\versewidth}{Text of line to use for centering}|. \end{center}
% Once you have set |\versewidth|
% to center the poem on a sample line, you use it to center the |poem| environment this way:
% \begin{center} |\begin{poem}[\versewidth]|.\end{center}
% Notice that the optional argument is in square braces,
% not in curly braces.
%
% If you are planning to align the poem title with the
% left margin of the centered verse block you should use the |\versewidth| method
% to center the verse block, since |\versewidth| is used to place the title in that case.
% (You can just enter a length into the optional argument of |\begin{poem}|, but in that case,
% if you are left-aligning the poem title, you should set |\versewidth| to that value
% by issuing e.g. |\setlength{\versewidth}{30em}|.)
%
% \DescribeMacro{\linenumberscenteredwithverse}
% If you want to center the verse on the page using the optional argument to |\begin{poem}|,
% you probably also want
% to move the line numbers in, so as to be closer to the line.
% \textsf{poemscol} will do this by default. If you wish to leave the line
% numbers at the margin, set the boolean |\linenumberscenteredwithverse| to
% false. For centered verse, the distance between the line numbers and the
% verse can be set by setting the length of |\marginparsepmin| (not
% |\marginparsep|). The default
% value of |\marginparsepmin| is 2 em.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\centertitles}
% \DescribeMacro{\ifcenterepigraphson}
% If you center the poem on a sample
% line, you probably also want to center the title of the poem too,
% which you can do by issuing |\centertitles|.
% (|\centertitles| invokes the title centeringscheme.) If you decide against centering the title,
% you can either just remove or comment out the |\centertitles| command, or
% switch a boolean by issuing |\centertitlesonfalse|. By default, |\centertitles|
% also moves epigraphs, dedications, headnotes, and attributions toward the center.
% To prevent this, issue |\centerepigraphsonfalse|. This boolean applies to the
% regular |\epigraph|, |\headnote| and |\dedication| commands, not to the
%single-line |\shortpoemepigraph|, |\shortpoemdedication| and |\shortpoemattribution| commands,
%whose places are defined by the title scheme that is in force when they are issued.
%\end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\iftextcenteringturnedon} Suppose you have marked up many poems with
% the optional second argument to |\begin{poem}|, which would cause the text
% block to be centered on the longest line, but change your mind about
% centering all the poems. You can turn off centering, without
% erasing all of the second arguments, by issuing |\textcenteringturnedonfalse|.
% You can turn on centering the text block again by issuing
% |\textcenteringturnedontrue|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\versemarginadjust}
% If you don't want to center the verse block on the longest line, but do want
% to adjust its horizontal placement, you can adjust the
% placement of the verse block by changing the value of the
% length |\versemarginadjust|. For most commonly used type sizes, setting
% |\versemarginadjust| to 28pts will put the verse block at the left margin, aligned
% with the page number.
%
% \subsubsection{Hyphenation is off in the poem environment}
% \textsf{poemscol} turns off automatic hyphenation in poetry
% environments. The idea here is that every hyphen in the printed
% poem is authorial, obviating the need for you to compile a
% hyphenated-lines list to distinguish between authorial hyphens and
% hyphens you added for lineation purposes. Line-ending hyphens
% should not be a feature of verse anyway, I think.
%
% You may wish to restore automatic hyphenation in poetry environments
% for your own edition.
% If you do so you must keep track of added hyphens yourself. This
% list will be easy to compile, however, because only authorial
% hyphens will appear in your source code. Automatically added
% hyphens will appear only in the output. (You might even modify the
% output routine so that automatically added hyphens have a different
% look. That would be non-trivial, but Donald Knuth has an exercise
% about doing just that in \emph{The \TeX book}.) To
% restore automatic hyphenation, copy the definition of the |poem|
% environment (below at page \pageref{poemdef}) and redefine the
% environment using |\renewenvironment|, commenting out the line that reads
% |\language=255|. Place the renewed definition of the environment in your preamble,
% with |\makeatletter| before the renewed definition and |\makeatother| after it.
% If you are restoring automatic hyphenation for a parallel-text
% edition, be aware that |\startparalleltexts| also (defined below at
% page \pageref{startparalleltexts}) redefines the |poem|
% environment, so you will have to change |\startparalleltexts| using
% |\renewcommand| as well.
%
% \textsf{poemscol}
% turns automatic hyphenation back on in prose contexts, so if you
% wish to keep a hyphenation list for such things as authorial
% prefaces and so on, you must do so yourself manually.
% (Alternatively, you can turn automatic hyphenation off in those
% contexts as well, by setting the |\language| to 255. For an example
% of how to do this, look at the definition of the |poem| environment
% in the implementation section below. If you do turn automatic
% hyphenation off, it would be wise to restrict the change to some
% particular environment, rather than changing the |\language|
% globally. You might wish, for instance, to turn automatic
% hyphenation off in the |prosesection| environment.)
%
% \subsubsection{The stanza environment}
% \DescribeEnv{stanza} Every stanza should be placed in its own stanza
% environment. Every poem should have at least one stanza. Marking
% the beginning and end of every stanza (with |\begin{stanza}| and
% |\end{stanza}|) provides \textsf{poemscol} with a way of detecting
% cases in which a page boundary falls on a stanza break, since in
% those cases a page turn happens when one is \emph{inside} a poem
% environment but \emph{not} inside a stanza environment. Further,
% marking the beginning and end of every stanza makes the logical
% structure of the poem (and the editor's intentions about it) clear
% to readers of your source code. If you want to change the |stanza| environment
% consult its definition below at page \pageref{stanzadefine}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{indentedverse} To indent stanzas (or stretches of verse) relative to the margin
% you can use the |indentedverse| environment.
% You can also
% set different stanzas or passages at a hierarchy of levels of indentation.
% (For how to do this, see section \ref{indentedverse} below, page \pageref{indentedverse}.)
%
% \DescribeMacro{\stanzaatbottom}
% \DescribeMacro{\nostanzaatbottom}
% If you wish to change the symbol used to mark cases in which a
% break falls on a page turn, issue the command |\stanzaatbottom|,
% using as the argument whatever you wish to use to mark such cases.
% The default is |\stanzaatbottom{*}|, which is suitable for a published volume. If you
% are preparing a typescript for submission, you may wish to set
% |\stanzaatbottom| to ``stanza break.''
%
% If you wish also to mark all cases where there is \emph{not} a stanza break
% at the bottom of the page, issue the command |\nostanzaatbottom|,
% using as the argument whatever you wish to mark such cases. The
% default is |\relax| (which is to say, ``don't do anything'').
%
% \subsubsection{Verse lines and line numbering}
% \DescribeMacro{\verseline} |\verseline| should mark the end of every
% line, except the last line of every stanza (which should be marked
% with |\end{stanza}|). |\verseline| marks the end of every line as a
% prosodic unit (since a line of verse is not simply a carriage
% return), and advances the line counter. There are commands below
% for changing the line counter's horizontal placement (how close it
% is to the left or right margin of the line) and appearance. (See
% section \ref{marginalgeometry} for these.)
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\setverselinemodulo} |\setverselinemodulo| sets how
% often a marginal line number appears. To print a line number every
% five lines, issue |\setverselinemodulo{5}|. The default value is
% 10.
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\makeverselinenumbers}
% Marginal verse line numbering is on by default. To turn line
% numbering off, issue |\global\verselinenumbersfalse|. To turn it
% back on, issue |\makeverselinenumbers|.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\verselinenumberstoright}
% \DescribeMacro{\verselinenumberstoleft}
% To put all of the line numbers to the left, issue |\verselinenumberstoleft| in
% your preamble. |\verselinenumberstoright| puts the line numbers in the right
% margin. (These two commands use non-floating marginal note commands derived
% from the \textsf{memoir} class, |\pmclleftsidepar| and |\pmclrightsidepar|,
% respectively.)
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\verselinenumbersouter}
% \DescribeMacro{\verselinenumbersgutter}
% If you wish the line numbers to appear in the outer margins of each two-page spread, issue
% |\verselinenumbersouter| in your preamble. If you want the line numbers to
% appear in the inner margins, issue |\verselinenumbersgutter| in your preamble.
% (These two commands use |\pmclsidepar|, derived from |\sidepar| from the
% \textsf{memoir} class, but modified by Dan Leucking.)
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\marginparsep}
% You can adjust the
% distance between the marginal line number and the text with
% |\setlength{\marginparsep}{your length}|. The default value for |\marginparsep| is 18pt,
% and the default value for the width of the box in which the line numbers are
% set, |\marginparwidth|, is 18 pt. If you are setting with the line numbers to
% the right, |\marginparwidth| can be as small as you wish, although your log
% file will be full of complaints if you make it too small. But if you are
% setting with the line numbers to the left, if |\marginparwidth| is narrower
% than the width of the line number, the line number will be moved down a line.
% Setting |\marginparsep| to zero lines the verse line numbers up with the page
% numbers, and puts both at the margin. If you move the verse line numbers by
% changing |\marginparsep|, you can move the page numbers to keep them aligned
% by changing |\headoffsetlength| to the same value.
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\marginparsepmin}
% If the verse block is centered on the longest line, the distance between the line numbers and the
% verse can be set by setting the length of |\marginparsepmin| (not
% |\marginparsep|). The default
% value of |\marginparsepmin| is 2em.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pmclsideparvshift}
% The line numbers should print on the baseline. You can adjust them
% to move them up or down by changing the value of a length called
% |\pmclsideparvshift|. The default value is
% |\setlength{\pmclsideparvshift}{0ex}|.
%
% \subsection{~Special line markup}
% \subsubsection{Indentation, line breaks, runover, and broken lines}
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\verseindent} The |\verseindent| command is to be
% used for formally indented lines. It should not be used to indent
% the run over portion of long lines (which \textsf{poemscol} handles
% automatically anyway). |\verseindent| indents the line a bit less
% than the run over portion of long ``bent'' lines are indented, so
% that the two cases can be visually distinguished. By default, the
% length of |\verseindent| is 2 em. To change it, say to 3 em, you should change
% the length |\verseindentamount| by
% issuing |\setlength{\verseindentamount}{3em}|.\end{sloppypar}\goodbreak
%
% You can create a hierarchy of indentations by issuing |\verseindent|
% multiple times. But you can also use an optional argument to |\verseindent|, with
% the number indicating how many levels of indentation to add to this line, like so
% |\verseindent[3]| for the third level of indentation, (with each level being one |\verseindent|
% deep). If you use this option, don't put any white space between the end of the
% |\verseindent| command and the beginning of the poetic text, otherwise
% poemscol will add about 10pt of unwanted extra white space. (The only real
% consequence of forgetting about this will be that |\verseindent[1]| will be about
% 10pts deeper than plain |\verseindent|, which may not really be an issue for you.)
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{indentedverse} \label{indentedverse} You might want to indent whole stanzas,
% or perhaps extended passages of verse, relative to the rest of the poem (you might,
% for instance, want to indent refrains systematically). This would be tedious to
% do using |\verseindent|. Put stretches of
% verse you wish to indent in the |indentedverse| environment. Whatever is
% in this environment will be indented. The indentation will be of the length
% |\indentedstanzaamount|, which is by default set to |\verseindentamount|,
% which by default is 2 em. You can change |\indentedstanzaamount| to 3em, by issuing
% |\setlength{\indentedstanzaamount}{3em}|.
%
% You can also set a hierarchy of intended stanzas
% or passages by issuing an optional argument to |\begin{indentedverse}|. So, for instance,
% |\begin{indentedverse}[2]| will indent that environment by two |\indentedstanzaamount|s
% (4 em), and |\begin{indentedverse}[3]| will indent that environment by three
% |\indentedstanzaamount|s, or 6 em. Note that if you use the optional argument, you
% must enclose it in square brackets, not curly ones. Note also that (for reasons
% I have not been able to track down) |\indentedverse[1]| indents the stanza
% slightly more deeply than plain |\indentedverse|. To preserve a
% consistent look for a hierarchy of indented stanzas, use |\indentedverse[1]| for the
% lowest level of indentation, not plain |\indentedverse|. \end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\linebend} \textsf{poemscol} automatically runs over
% long lines, indenting the run over portion on the next physical
% line. If you are unhappy with where \textsf{poemscol} has run over
% a particular line, you can ``bend'' that line by issuing |\linebend|
% at the point where you wish it to run over. The run over portion of
% the line will be indented just as if \textsf{poemscol} had ``bent''
% the line at your selected point. This command only works if you
% have chosen to bend the line at some point earlier than
% \textsf{poemscol} would have chosen on its own.
%
% You may also wish to use |\linebend| to reproduce how your author
% broke up long lines on the page (if you know that your author cared
% about such things and did not leave them up to the typesetter).
%
% |\linebend| should only be used for managing run over lines, not for
% cases in which a line is to be broken into separate half-lines. For
% cases in which a line is to be broken into half-lines, use the
% |\brokenline| command. The two commands do similar (but not identical)
% things. But a ``linebend'' is a feature of typesetting, and a
% ``broken line'' is a feature of versification, and it seems best to
% distinguish them logically. (|\linebend|, like |\brokenline|, issues
% a carriage return without incrementing the line number, but
% |\linebend| adds indentation to the next line.)
%
% If you
% want to extend a line further into the right margin, beyond the normal break point, you can
% probably do so by using a combination of |\nobreak| and |\hbox|,
% or by turning all of the spaces in that line into unbreakable
% spaces, marked with |~| in your source. But \textsf{poemscol} will
% complain if you do this, and rightly so, since the result is likely
% to be ugly. It would probably be wiser to adjust the lengths |\leftmargin|
% and |\rightmargin| in the definition of the |pmclverse| environment,
% allowing all of the lines to be a little bit longer. The |pmclverse| environment
% is defined below, at section \ref{versedefine}, page \pageref{versedefine}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\runoverindent} To change the indentation for the run
% over portion of verse lines globally, issue the amount of
% indentation you desire as the argument to |\runoverindent|.
% |\runoverindent| is currently set to 6 em, rather more than the
% standard amount in the definition of the \LaTeX\ |verse|
% environment. By default, the runover portion of long lines is
% indented. You may wish to flush the runover portion to the right
% margin instead. For instructions about how to do this, see section
% \ref{rightflushverse}, page \pageref{rightflushverse}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\brokenline}
% \DescribeMacro{\versephantom}|\brokenline| should be used where you
% wish to break the line without incrementing the line counter.
% Authors often break a line into two half-lines, setting the
% beginning of the second half-line flush with the end of the first
% half-line. (Sometimes these broken lines indicate a change of
% speaker. Sometimes they just indicate a change of subject, usually
% an abrupt one, a change which calls attention to itself by
% interrupting a line rather than waiting for a line break or stanza
% break). |\brokenline| is normally used with |\versephantom|,
% which adds white space exactly as long as its argument would have
% been had it been set in type. |\versephantom| thus provides an easy
% way of setting the beginning of the second half-line flush with the
% end of the first, whatever the font size or special formatting of the
% first line.
%
%
% The sestet of Yeats's sonnet ``Leda and the Swan,'' has such a broken
% line:
% \begin{verse}
% A shudder in the loins engenders there\\
% The broken wall, the burning roof and tower\\
% And Agamemnon dead.\\
% $\phantom{And Agamemnon dead.~}$ Being so caught up,\\
% So mastered by the brute blood of the air,\\
% Did she put on his knowledge with his power\\
% Before the indifferent beak could let her drop?\end{verse}
%
% To set the broken line properly, issue:
% \begin{verse}
% And Agamemnon dead.|\brokenline|\\
% |\versephantom{And Agamemnon dead.}| Being so caught up,|\verseline|
% \end{verse}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\stanzalinestraddle}
% Some poets (such as Robert Penn Warren) occasionally introduce a
% stanza break in the middle of a broken line, considering the line to
% be a single metrical unit despite the fact that it straddles a stanza
% break. To record these cases, mark the end of the first half-line
% with |\end{stanza}| as usual. But instead of opening the next stanza
% with |\begin{stanza}| issue |\stanzalinestraddle| instead. This will
% make sure that the line counter counts the straddling line as only one
% line, despite the stanza break. |\stanzalinestraddle| is usually used
% with |\versephantom|.
%
% \subsubsection{Customizing broken lines}
% \DescribeMacro{\tweakbrokenline}
% By default, \textsf{poemscol} sets the line numbers level with the
% ends of broken lines. If the line numbers are set to the right of
% the text, this seems the obvious choice. Conceivably you might want
% to set the line number level with the beginning of a broken line
% when the line numbers are set to the left. To ensure that the line
% numbers of broken lines are set level with the beginning of a
% broken line when the line number is on the left, issue
% |\tweakbrokenline| in your preamble.
%
% You should issue |\tweakbrokenline| with caution, because although
% it changes how |\brokenline| is handled, it does not change the
% handling of long lines with runover. Runover lines will still set
% the line number level with the end of the line. You can have
% runover lines set their line number level with the beginning of the
% line by issuing |\startverseline| at the beginning of the line.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\brokenlineatbeginning} Conceivably you might want
% |\brokenline| to set the line number level with the beginning of
% the line in every case. To do this, issue |\brokenlineatbeginning|
% in your preamble. If you do this, you should be prepared to mark
% the beginning of runover lines with |\startverseline|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\startverseline}
% If you begin a verse line with |\startverseline| the line number
% will be set level with the beginning of the line rather than with
% the end. This is useful, for instance, if you want to ensure that
% the line number of a line with runover is set level with the
% beginning of the line. You can, if you don't want to keep track of
% where runover lines are, start every line with |\startverseline|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\tweakstartverseline}
% Rather than setting the line number of every runover line level with
% the beginning of the line, it may make more sense for you to set the
% line number level with the beginning in cases where the line number
% is to the left, and level with the end in cases where the line
% number is to the right. You might want to do this, for instance, if
% you have decided to set all the verse lines at the outer margin (by
% issuing |\verselinenumbersouter| in your preamble), or have decided to
% set all the verse lines at the inner margin (by issuing
% |\verselinenumbersgutter| in your preamble). To ensure that
% |\startverseline| does this, issue |\tweakstartverseline| in your
% preamble.
%
% \subsubsection{Right-flushed runover lines}
% \DescribeEnv{rightflushverse}
% \DescribeMacro{\rightversebegin}\label{rightflushverse} By default,
% \textsf{poemscol} indents the runover portion of long lines by the
% amount |\runoverindent| (by default 6 em). It is possible to set
% verse so that the runover portion is flushed to the right margin.
% To do this, you should put the |\rightflushverse| environment inside
% the |\poem| environment. And you must mark the beginning of each
% verse line with |\rightversebegin|. Christian Ebert has reminded me
% that the |\rightflushverse| environment must be issued \emph{inside}
% the poem environment. Otherwise it simply flushes every line to the
% right.
%
% It is rather clumsy to need a special environment for verse with
% right flushed runover. I plan to provide a command for switching
% between a verse environment that indents runover lines and a verse
% environment that flushes runover lines to the right. I have seen
% examples of this kind of environment from Markus Kohm and Christian
% Ebert, but so far I haven't been able to persuade them to play well with \textsf{poemscol}
%
% \subsection{Cross references by line number}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemlinelabel} \label{poemlinelabel}
% |\poemlinelabel| enables crossreferences by line number. To make
% a line label, issue |\poemlinelabel{text of label}| right after the
% line to which you wish to refer, where ``text of label'' is some
% distinctive label you can use for a reference elsewhere. (You
% should issue the command \emph{after} the |\verseline| or
% |\end{stanza}| command, to make sure that the line number will be
% correct.) To produce the reference, just issue |\ref{text of label}| as usual.
% (|\poemlinelabel| is just a crudely hacked
% version of |\label| from \LaTeX.) |\pageref{text of label}| will set
% the page number of the page on which the label appears.
%
% \section{Making a table of contents}
% \subsection{~Setup}
% \DescribeMacro{\makepoemcontents}
% I found the normal \LaTeX\ commands for making tables of contents for scholarly works
% unsuited for making tables of contents of poetry, so I have provided my own. To make a table of
% contents for your poems, issue |\makepoemcontents|.
%
% |\makepoemcontents| takes an optional argument, which
% sets the page number for the table of contents. If your publisher
% wishes to add some front matter so that the contents will appear on
% page vii, you should issue |\makepoemcontents[7]|.
%
% It might seem
% as though you would want to issue this command in your preamble. In
% fact it is better to issue it in the body of the document,
% immediately \emph{after} issuing the |\putpoemcontents|, the command which
% inputs and typesets a table of contents from a prior run. If you issue |\makepoemcontents|
% before issuing |\putpoemcontents|, you will simply erase the table of contents
% from the prior run (the one which will have all the contents information you
% are intending to use) and enter an empty table of contents into your document.
%
% \subsection{~Printing the table of contents}
% \DescribeMacro{\putpoemcontents}\label{putpoemcontents}
% Information for your table of contents will be written to an
% external file with the extension .ctn. |\makepoemcontents| creates this file, and
% opens an output channel to send information to it. |\putpoemcontents| closes
% the file and reads it into your document.
%
% You will need to run your
% book through \LaTeX\ twice in order to generate a table of contents,
% the first time to generate the titles and the references for the page numbers, and the second
% time to use the labels to which the references point
% to enter the page numbers. (Under some circumstances --- if
% you have an index, for instance --- you may need three passes rather
% than two.)
%
% \DescribeMacro{\resetpagestyle}
% Because the
% table of contents uses a special page style and special fonts
% |\putpoemcontents| issues |\resetpagestyle|,
% which restores the default fancy page style to ``main'' once it has
% input the contents, and restores the font size to |\normalsize| as well.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pagenumbering}
% Be sure to
% reset the style of page numbering (from |\pagenumbering{roman}| to
% |\pagenumbering{arabic}|) after issuing |\putpoemcontents|, since
% when you read in the external file created by |\makepoemcontents|
% the page numbering will be set to roman numerals. The command
% |\resetpagestyle| (which is called by |\putpoemcontents|) will reset
% the fancy page style to that used in the main body of the volume,
% but it won't change the page numbering to arabic, in case there is
% some frontmatter between the contents and the main text, so you
% should be sure to do so yourself. (Front matter is normally given page numbers
% in roman numerals.) If you neglect to issue
% |\pagenumbering{arabic}| at the end of your front matter, the
% page numbering will remain in roman numerals. The notes sections
% use the page numbers from the poem to construct running headers of
% the form ``Notes to pp.~xx--yy.'' If those numbers are roman
% numerals rather than arabic ones, \textsf{poemscol} will not
% recognize them as numbers, and you will get the infamous ``Missing
% Number'' error that puzzles so many users of \LaTeX.
%
% \subsection{~Contents entries for notes sections and the index}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}\DescribeMacro{\puttextnotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\putemendations}
% \DescribeMacro{\putexplanatory}
% |\puttextnotes|, and its siblings |\putemendations| and
% |\putexplanatory|, input the formatted endnotes
% sections into your document, and put entries for them into your table of contents.
% You will have to run \LaTeX\ again to set the page numbers of those sections
% in the
% table of contents properly. The first run sets the title of the endnotes section and a label to find the
% page number to add to the table of contents, and the second run
% actually sets page number. (These commands are described
% below, in section \ref{putexternalfiles}.) All of these commands
% also restore normal hyphenation for the endnotes sections. \end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\putpoemindex}
% |\putpoemindex| inputs the formatted index (after your raw entries have been
% processed by MakeIndex), and adds an entry
% for it into the table of contents.
% Remember that if you are making an index of titles and first lines
% you may need to run your file through \LaTeX\ twice more after running
% MakeIndex, to put the entry for the index and its correct page number into your table of
% contents.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\putmultiplepoemindex}
% Use |\putmultiplepoemindex| instead if
% you are making several indices. For instructions about
% |\putmultiplepoemindex| see section \ref{multipleindex},
% p.~\pageref{multipleindex}.
%
% \subsection{~Customizing contents entries}
% Lines in the table of contents usually include an indent (how
% much of one depends upon what the entry is --- whether it is a
% volume title, a poem title, or something else), then the title
% itself. If the entry is for a poem, for a section of a poem, for a poetic sequence, or for
% a section or subsection of a poetic sequence, a slash follows the title, followed
% by the page number.
% All of the commands that generate lines in the table of contents are
% somewhat messy and somewhat rigid, but you can modify them if you
% wish. Here are some ways of customizing contents
% entries, in increasing order of difficulty.
%
%\DescribeMacro{\setcontentsleaders} By default the title and the page
% are separated by a slash (actually by |~/~|). If you wish to change
% this, say to put dot leaders in instead, issue what you wish to use
% as the argument to |\setcontentsleaders|. For instance
% |\setcontentsleaders{\poemdotfill}| will flush the number to
% the right margin, and insert leading dots up to the number.
% The argument to |\setcontentsleaders| can be whatever you wish
% to use to separate the title from the page number, such as a colon,
% a hard space (|~|), or even |\hfil| to flush the page number to the right margin.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\contentspoemtitlefont}
% You can change the font sizes that are used to set particular classes of title
% in the contents by redefining the commands that are used to set the font size
% for that kind of title. For instance, if you wanted to set the titles of all
% poems in 12 point type on 14.5 point leading, issue \begin{verbatim}
% \renewcommand{\contentspoemtitlefont}{\fontsize{12}{14.5}\selectfont}
% \end{verbatim}
% in your preamble. You can find a list of the various relevant font size commands
% below at section \ref{internal font size commands}, page \pageref{internal font size commands}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\contentsindentoneamount}
% You can also change the amount of the indentations used in the hierarchy of indentations
% in the table of contents by changing the value of the elements of
% that hierarchy. You can change ``contentsindentoneamount''
% (the amount a poem title is normally indented, by default 24pt) to,
% say, 36pt, by issuing |\contentsindentoneamount=36pt| in your preamble. You
% can find all of the values in the contents indentation hierarchy at section
% \ref{contents indentation hierarchy}, page \pageref{contents indentation hierarchy}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pmclcontentsentry} There is a simple way of adding a new contents
% entry using the command |\pmclcontentsentry|. The command creates an entry on the model
% of the entry for the textual notes section. It takes three arguments. The first is the title of
% the section. The second is the indentation of the entry (typically |\contentsindentone|
% |\contentsindenttwo|, or |\contentsindentthree|, but any indentation command will do).
% The third is the page number.
% Remember that |\contentsindentone| is a command, not a length. The length of
% the indentation is |\contentsindentoneamount|.
% The command is defined as |\hspace{contentsindentoneamount}|.
% You can suppress the page number by setting the boolean |\putpagenumbersincontentsfalse|.
%
% A more general way to add a entry in the table
% of contents is to use the command |\pmclecontentsentrydefaults|. This command takes
% four arguments: (1) The title (2) the indentation command (3) the font size (e.g. |\contentendnotesfont| for the
% same font size used in contents entries for the endnotes sections) and (4) the page number. Here
% also you can suppress the page number by setting the boolean |\putpagenumbersincontentsfalse|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\setlength} To change the amount various kinds of title are indented in the Table
% of Contents, see below at section \ref{contentsindentations}, page \pageref{contentsindentations}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\renewcommand}
% You can also make global changes to the appearance of a particular kind of contents entry. To
% change the appearance of a kind of entry (for all sections of
% sequences of poems, for instance), go to the definition of the title
% of that kind of entry (e.g.\ |\sequencesectiontitle|) below,
% and copy the definition into a |\renewcommand| for that kind of title;
% find where that command calls the
% |\c@ntentsinfo| command, and change the arguments
% to that command to suit you. (You should consult section \ref{customizing titles}, page
% \pageref{customizing titles}, to see what all of the arguments to |\c@ontentsinfo| do.)
% Put the whole renewed version of the title command into your preamble, being
% sure to issue |\makeatletter| before the |\renewcommand| and to issue
% |\makeatother| after it.
% (You have to put this whole |\renewcommand| between |\makeatletter| and |\makeatother| because
% |\c@ntentsinfo| and several other commands called to set titles include
%the |@| character, which you can't use in command names
% except in the .sty file. Internal commands like |\c@ntentsinfo|, which are used by
% other commands but are under most circumstances not meant to be invoked
% by users directly, have an |@| in their names so that the user won't accidentally
% redefine them.)
% You can find the commands for making titles below at
% section \ref{poemtitlecode}, page \pageref{poemtitlecode}.
%
% Here, for instance, is the code that defines titles for sections of poetic sequences:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\sequencesectiontitle}[1]{%
% \set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}
% {\titleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
% {\titleindentamount}
% \c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindenttwo}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
% {\contentsindentthreeamount}
% \t@xtnotesinfo{#1}}
% \end{verbatim}
% Notice in the above that entries for sequence sections in the table
% of contents are given the indentation
% |\contentsindenttwo|. To give them the indentation |\contentsindentthree|
% and to set the runover portion of long titles with the indentation |\contentsindentfour| put this in
% your preamble:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \makeatletter
% \renewcommand{\sequencesectiontitle}[1]{%
% \set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}
% {\titleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
% {\titleindentamount}
% \c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\poemsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
% {\contentsindentfouramount}
% \t@xtnotesinfo{#1}}
% \makeatother
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\c@ntentsinfo}
% You can make even more sweeping and fundmental changes in the look of your
% table of contents by redefining the |\c@ntentsinfo| command itself, which can be found
% below at section \ref{poemtitlecode}. Think very hard about this before doing it.
%
% \section{Making an index of titles and first lines}
% \subsection{~Setup}
% \DescribeMacro{\indexingontrue} First you must add the \textsf{makeidx} package
% to the list of packages you call in your preamble. (If you are planning to set several
% indices, call \textsf{splitindex} instead.) Then, to set up the Index section of your
% volume, issue |\indexingontrue| in your preamble. This will create
% the external file for your index information and send that file the
% typesetting information for its title. You must process this
% external file (the .idx file) with MakeIndex to create a properly organized and
% formatted index. MakeIndex sorts the various multi-level ``index
% cards'' generated by all of the |\index| commands in your source
% files.
%
% \subsection{~Printing the index}
% \DescribeMacro{\putpoemindex}
%Once you have processed your .idx file with MakeIndex, and
% generated the sorted and formatted .ind file for your book, the
% |\putpoemindex| command will insert the typeset index where you
% issue it, and put an entry for your index in your table of contents.
% You will have to run your file through \LaTeX\ twice again to make the
% page number for that entry correct.
%
% \textsf{poemscol} sets up a two-column index with a simple running
% header. (Setting up a two-column index, however, requires that you
% include the \textsf{multicol} package in your |\usepackage| list.)
% To turn indexing off, issue |\global\indexingonfalse|.
%
% Enter the individual index entries in the poems as you normally
% would for use by MakeIndex (say, after each title and first line). One of
% the nice features of MakeIndex is that every entry has two parts,
% one for specifying the sort key of the entry (or subentry), the other
% for specifying the font and typesetting information of the entry (or
% subentry). This enables you to drop all of the initial uses of
% ``the'' in titles for sorting purposes, while still including the
% ``the'' in the title. It also enables you to distinguish titles
% from first lines (by italicizing them), and to include typesetting
% information (such as italicization) in titles or first lines without
% messing up their sort order.
%
% \subsection{~Making multiple indices}\label{multipleindex}
% \textsf{poemscol} can work with \textsf{splitindex} to generate
% more than one index. You might, for instance, wish a separate index
% of titles and index of first lines, or an index of proper names. To
% do this, call \textsf{splitindex} in your list of packages. Then,
% in your preamble, declare the indices you are planning to use, e.g.:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newindex[Index of Titles]{idx}
% \newindex[Index of First Lines]{fir}
% \newindex[Onomastic Index]{ono}
% \end{verbatim}The second argument is the
% ``shortcut'' defined by \textsf{splitindex}, and will be used to
% mark index entries in your text (see below), and used also as the extension
% for the external index files used by MakeIndex.
%
% Then mark up individual entries. Some entries (in the example
% above, the ``Index of Titles'' examples) can be marked up with
% |\index| just as if you were using only one index. Entries for
% other indices should be marked using the |\sindex| command from
% \textsf{splitindex}, as follows
% \begin{verbatim}
% \sindex[fir]{Of Man's first disobedience and the fruit}
% \end{verbatim}
% where the
% first argument is the ``shortcut'' and the second is the index
% entry. If you are loading \textsf{splitindex} with the
% \textsf{split} option, the different types of index entry will be
% sent to separate output streams, which each must be processed separately
% with MakeIndex. \TeX\ has only a limited number of such output
% streams, however, so it is probably wiser not to choose that
% option, but to use splitindex.tex, splitindex.pl, or one of the
% other means provided with the \textsf{splitindex} package to break
% up the index into the separate parts, each of which must be
% processed with MakeIndex separately.
%
% To include the indices, and to add entries for them to the table of
% contents, issue |\putmultiplepoemindex| for each one.
% |\putmultiplepoemindex| takes four arguments, which are: 1.\ The
% three letter ``shortcut'' used by |\splitindex|, 2.\ The title of
% the Index on its first page, 3.\ The running header for that index
% section, and 4.\ The name of the section as you wish it to appear in
% the Table of Contents. So, for instance
% \begin{verbatim}
% \putmultiplepoemindex{fir}{INDEX OF FIRST LINES}{Index of First
% Lines}{First Line Index} \end{verbatim}
% includes an index with shortcut ``fir,'' title ``INDEX OF FIRST
% LINES,'' running header ``Index of First Lines,'' and contents
% entry ``First Line Index.''
% \section{Collections with multiple volumes}
% \DescribeEnv{volumetitlepage} \DescribeEnv{maintitlepage}
% The |volumetitlepage| environment is an
% environment for divider pages in collections made up of several
% volumes. Volume title pages will always appear on recto pages with blank verso pages.
% \textsf{poemscol} will also automatically create a blank verso page
% preceding the volume title page if it is necessary. The
% |maintitlepage| environment is for the title page of the whole
% book. The main title page will also automatically always be on a
% recto page. These divider pages have special
% page styles, with no page numbers and no running headers.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\wholebooktitle} \DescribeMacro{\volumetitle}
% |\wholebooktitle| is for the title of the entire collection.
% |\volumetitle| is for the title of an individual volume within a
% Collected Poems. |\wholebooktitle|
% merely sets its argument in a very large font. |\volumetitle| also sets an entry
% in the table of contents (with no page number, but followed by extra
% vertical space) and in the endnotes (with
% no page number).
%
% \DescribeMacro{\volumetitlefirstline}
% \DescribeMacro{\volumetitlemiddleline}
% \DescribeMacro{\volumetitlelastline}
% \DescribeMacro{\volumesubtitle}
% The |\volumetitlefirstline|,
% |\volumetitlemiddleline|, and |\volumetitlelastline| commands are
% for multi-line titles of volumes gathered into the collection. (Use
% these last commands if you want to specify how a long title is
% broken up both in the text and in the table of contents.
% \textsf{poemscol} will break up long titles on its own anyway
% if you don't specify how to break them up, but
% you might not be happy with how it breaks up the lines.)
% |\volumesubtitle| is for setting the subtitle to a volume.
% In addition to setting the text in the body of your
% edition, these commands send the title (and the formatting
% information about it) to the table of contents file and to the
% various endnotes files.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\volumesectiontitle}
% |\volumesectiontitle| is for setting the title of a section of a
% volume. |\volumesectiontitle| merely prints the title in a large font in boldface
% in the text. It always prints at the top of a page, but it does not ensure that that
% page is a recto page, does not reserve the whole
% page for the title, or put a blank verso page following the title. It prints the title
% in the contents without a page number, and prints the title in the textual notes
% (but not in the other endnote sections) in boldface on a separate line.
% Because it is so different from other titles, it does not use the three internal
% commands (|\set@p@emtitle|, |\c@ntentsinfo|, and |\t@xtnotesinfo|) that
% all of the other title commands use, so modifying those internal commands will not
% change |\volumesectiontitle|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\volumeepigraph} \DescribeMacro{\volumeattribution}
% |\volumeepigraph| and
% |\volumeattribution| are for epigraphs and attributions on the
% divider pages. \goodbreak
%
% \DescribeMacro{\volumeheader} \DescribeMacro{\leftheader} \DescribeMacro{\rightheader}
% |\volumeheader| or |\rightheader| is for setting the right
% running header for that volume (except for divider pages, the table
% of contents, the notes sections, and other special cases). Normally
% that is just the name of the particular volume. |\leftheader| is for setting
% the left running header for the entire book (except for divider
% pages, the table of contents, the notes sections, and other special
% cases). Normally that is the name of the entire book.
%
% \section{Recording textual notes, emendations, and explanatory notes}\label{recordingtextualnotes}
% \subsection{~Setup for endnote sections}
% \DescribeMacro{\maketextnotes} \DescribeMacro{\makeemendations}
% \DescribeMacro{\makeexplanatorynotes}
% To collect textual collations, issue |\maketextnotes| in your
% preamble.
% To collect emendation notes, issue |\makeemendations| in your preamble.
% To collect explanatory notes, issue
% |\makeexplanatorynotes| in your preamble.
% These commands open external files for emendations, textual
% collations, and explanatory notes (with extensions .emd, .ent, and
% .enx respectively). \textsf{poemscol} reads these files back into the main document
% at the place you specify
% with |\puttextnotes|, |\putexplanatory|, or |\putemendations|, or at
% the end (if you use the |\finish| command).
% These commands also send to the external files the commands for typesetting the
% title of each section (e.g. Explanatory Notes), for making an entry in the table
% of contents for each endnote section, and for modifying the
% running headers of the notes sections to xx--yy format (e.g.
% ``Explanatory Notes to pp.~55--7'').
%
% \textsf{poemscol} opens an entry (headed with
% the title, and the page the poem appears on in the body of the
% text, in boldface) in the textual notes
% section for every poem (since, minimally, you want to include
% information about the variants and copy text of the poem).
% In the emendations or explanatory notes sections
% \textsf{poemscol}
% sets this information only if you actually have emendations or explanatory notes on that poem.
% If you have defined a new endnote section using |\definenewnotetype| \textsf{poemscol}
% will also only set the poem heading in the notes if there actually is a note for that poem.
%
% The notes for each poem are set in a block paragraph, with a new
% paragraph for every |\poemtitle| command, and the line counter for
% the notes is reset to 1 with every |\begin{poem}|. (For long poems
% in books or cantos, it you might use |\poemtitle| for the
% canto names or numbers, or perhaps you might want to design a new species
% of title using the commands described below at section \ref{customizing titles},
% page \pageref{customizing titles}.)
%
% By default, there is one paragraph per poem, with a hanging indent to give
% prominence to the page number.
%
% If you wish to use multi-layer footnotes rather than endnotes, you
% do not need to issue |\maketextnotes| or its relatives (but you
% should of course issue |\textnotesatfoot| or its relatives). You can mix
% footnotes or endnotes as you wish. You may, for instance, wish to
% set explanatory notes as footnotes, and textual notes and
% emendations as endnotes. Instructions for setting up
% \textsf{poemscol} to make such footnotes are in section
% \ref{makingfootnotes} below.
%
% \subsection{~Customizing endnotes}
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\iftextnotessinglepar}
% \DescribeMacro{\ifemendationssingplepar}
% \DescribeMacro{\ifexplanationssinglepar}
% You may,
% particularly if you are annotating long poems, wish each
% note to appear in its own paragraph rather than in a block paragraph
% with the other notes to that poem. To do this, you need to set
% the relevant boolean. Issue |\textnotessinglepartrue|
% |\emendationssingplepartrue| or |\explanationssinglepartrue| to give
% each such note a separate paragraph. (Similar booleans will be automatically
% defined for any species of endnote you create.) By default, these notes will have a
% hanging indent, to give prominence to the line number.
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\noteindentation}
% You may have notes with multiple paragraphs. The default settings for all of
% the forms of endnotes set them with hanging indentation, which probably is not
% a good idea for multiple paragraph notes. There are two ways of approaching
% this problem. The first way is to change all of the paragraphs of the notes to
% normal indentation, which you can do by issuing
% |\literaltextnote{\setlength{\parindent}{\noteindentation}}| just after issuing |\maketextnotes| .
% You can change the amount of indentation by changing the value of the
% length |\noteindentation| (the default value is 1 em).
% You should remember to issue similar
% commands for emendations, explanatory notes, and whatever kinds of notes you
% create using |\definenewnotetype|.
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\noteparbreak}
% Alternatively, if you want to keep the hanging indent for the page number, but still have paragraph
% breaks in the note, issue |\noteparbreak| whenever you want a paragraph break
% in the midst of a note. The first paragraph will have a hanging indent for the
% page number, but every paragraph that follows a |\noteparbreak| will have normal
% paragraph indentation. By default, |\noteparbreak| indents the new paragraph
% 1em. You can change this by changing the value of the length
% |\noteindentation|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\iftextnotestwocol}
% \DescribeMacro{\ifemendationstwocol}
% \DescribeMacro{\ifexplanationstwocol}
% By default, notes are set in single columns. To set them in two column mode,
% set the relevant booleans to true, e.g. |\textnotestwocoltrue|. Again, any note type
% you create with |\definenewnotetype| will automatically define the ``twocol'' boolean
% that goes with it.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\putpagenumberinnotesfalse}
% \DescribeMacro{\puttitleinnotesfalse}
% You may not wish to have the poem's page number and title appear in
% the notes. To turn off the appearance of the page number in the
% notes, issue |\putpagenumberinnotesfalse|. You may also not wish to
% put the poem's title in the notes. To turn off the appearance of the
% poem's title in the notes, issue |\puttitleinnotesfalse|. \textsf{poemscol} assumes
% that the notes to a poem will begin with either the poem's title, or its page number, or both,
% so although you can set either boolean to ``false,'' don't set both of them to ``false."
% \textsf{poemscol} will let you do this, but the results will be strange. Also, |\putitleinnotesfalse|
% applies only the textnotes. Emendations, explanatory notes, and any note types you create
% with |\definenewnotetype| will include the title of the poem.
%
% \goodbreak
% \DescribeMacro{\contentsendnotesindent}
% \DescribeMacro{\contentsendnotesfont}
% You can control the appearance of the entry for endnote sections in
% the table of contents by changing the definition of
% |\contentsendnotesindent| (set by default to |\contentsindentone|)
% or |\contentsendnotesfont| (set by default to
% |\contentspoemtitlefont|.)
%
% \subsection{~Textual notes of various kinds}
% \DescribeMacro{\sources} To record information about the copy text,
% editions and publication history of individual poems, or any
% information not tied to specific lines in the poem, you should place
% that information in the argument to the |\sources| command.
% |\sources| sends information to the external file for textual notes, but does not
% tag what it sends with line numbers, hence its use for sending ``sources.''
% Typically, you should issue this command after you have issued
% |\poemtitle| and before you issue |\begin{poem}|. That way the ``sources'' will
% appear in the textual notes section just after the title of the poem, but before the
% notes on particular lines.
% You could conceivably use |\sources|
% send typesetting information to the textual notes file (such as to force a page
% break), but I prefer to do that
% by using |\literaltextnote|, which also sends information to the external
% file for textnotes without sending line numbers. Although they do the same thing, I use |\sources| to
% send editorial information to the texual note section, but use
% |\literaltexnote| to send formatting instructions to the textual note section, so that
% the different purposes of the note are clear at first glance. You can send
% typesetting information to other sections by using
% |\literalemend|, |\literalexplain|, or |\literalcontents|. \textsf{poemscol} also
% creates a similar ``literal'' command for any type of endnote you create on the fly
% using |\definenewnotetype|.
%
% There is one subtle difference between |\sources| and |\literaltextnote|. If you
% issue the commands to set your textual notes as footnotes rather than endnotes,
% notes issued with |\sources| will be set as footnotes, but anything issued using |\literaltextnote|
% will be discarded. To set textual notes as footnotes,
% see section \ref{makingfootnotes}, page \pageref{makingfootnotes}, below.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\textnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\emendation}
% \DescribeMacro{\explanatory}
% |\textnote| is used to capture variants and tie them to the
% correct line number. You don't have to count line numbers;
% \textsf{poemscol} keeps track of them for you. Issue |\textnote|
% immediately after the |\verseline| command which marks the ending of
% the line you wish to comment upon. Put the text of your note (which
% may be simply the recording of a variant in standard notation) into
% the argument of the command. You should put both the lemma and the
% variants or comment in the argument to the |\textnote| command.
% For emendations, use |\emendation|, and for explanatory notes,
% use |\explanatory|. These notes go to their own endnote sections. The
% only difference is that each poem opens a new paragraph (headed with the
% poem's title and page number) for its own
% textual notes, but such paragraphs for explanatory notes or emendations are only
% opened if there actually are explanatory notes or emendations for that poem.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\sameword}
% \DescribeMacro{\missingpunct}
% To
% put the $\sim$ glyph in your note (used for recording places where
% the variant and the copy text have the same word, as for instance
% when recording a variation of punctuation) use |\sameword|. To put
% the ${}_{\wedge}$ glyph into your text (used for recording places
% where a punctuation mark is missing in a variant), use
% |\missingpunct|.
%
% For notes that refer to ranges of lines, |\textnote|, |\emendation|,
% and |\explanatory| have an optional argument, which records how many
% lines the note refers to. There are two ways of using this
% argument. The grubby but simple way is simply to put into the
% argument the number of lines it refers to. If, for instance, you
% issue |\textnote[4]{lemma] rest of note}|, \textsf{poemscol}, rather
% than printing merely the number of the line which closed just before
% you issued |\textnote|, will print a line range, beginning at that
% line, and ending at the fourth line after it. If that |\textnote|
% were issued after line 214, this is to say, the output in the
% textual notes would be: 214--218: lemma] rest of note.
%
% \begin{sloppypar} It seems clumsy to count the lines referred to by
% a note, especially since you don't have to count lines to set where
% the note begins. A more sophisticated way, and one which involves
% no counting, is to make a unique poem line label for the last line
% of the range by issuing |\poemlinelabel{some unique label}| just
% after the |\verseline| or |\end{stanza}| that ends the range. (To
% use |\poemlinelabel| see section \ref{poemlinelabel}.) Then, back
% after the |\verseline| or |\end{stanza}| command that closes the
% first line of the range, put the text of the label into the optional
% argument of |\textnote| as follows: |\textnote[some unique label]{lemma]rest of note}|.
%This is the preferred method. The
% line-counting method is deprecated, but retained for backwards
% compatibility with earlier versions. If you use the label method,
% you will have to run your file through \LaTeX\ twice, once to define
% the labels, and once to set the text.\end{sloppypar}
%
% Here is a complete example:
%\begin{verbatim}
%Yes, then I met the beast. Well, better, indeed,\verseline
%\textnote[had it been the]{better, indeed, / Had it been the] better if
%it / Had been the 1953TS (revised in black pencil
%on 1953TS to 1953)}
%Had it been the manifest beast and the circumstantial\verseline
%\poemlinelabel{had it been the}
%Avatar of destruction. But no beast then: the towering\verseline
%Definition, angelic, arrogant, abstract,\verseline
%Greaved in glory, thewed with light, the bright\verseline
%Brow tall as dawn. I could not see the eyes.\end{stanza}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% Overlapping lemmas, or lemmas that
% include stanza breaks, do not pose any difficulties for |poemscol|.
%
% |\emendation| and |\explanatory| are used exactly as |\textnote|
% is. Issue the emendation or the explanatory note as the argument to
% the command. Place the command immediately after the |\verseline| that
% concludes the line to which it is a comment. These commands also can
% take optional arguments to specify line ranges.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\accidental} |\accidental| behaves exactly like
% |\textnote|. Accidentals
% are included by default, but if you issue |\global\includeaccidentalstrue|
% in your preamble, you will remind yourself of that fact.
% If you wish to distinguish between accidentals and
% substantives, using |\accidental| provides a way of doing so.\end{sloppypar}
%
% If you wish to exclude accidentals from your printed output, but to
% mark them in your source files, so that your published collation in the
% textual notes endnotes section
% consists only of substantives, issue
% |\global\includeaccidentalsfalse| in your preamble. Many publishers
% are reluctant to publish accidentals, believing that they are, well,
% less substantive than substantives. Using the |\accidental|
% command allows you to exclude accidentals from the published version
% should your publisher insist, while preserving the information about
% them in your source files should the publisher's mind change. In the very worst case, if
% you have marked all the accidentals in this way you can still
% produce a list of accidentals for later use, and other scholars can
% search for accidentals in your source files simply by searching for
% the string |\accidental|.
%
% \textsf{poemscol} does not provide for a separate backmatter section
% for accidentals, but it would be trivial to construct one, using
% |\definenewnotetype|, described in section \ref{definingnewnotes}
% below. You may, for instance, use |\definenewnotetype| to create a command called
% |\newaccidental|, then issue| \let\accidental=\newaccidental|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\tsvariant} \DescribeMacro{\tsentry} Some publishers
% may turn up their noses at typescript or manuscript variants (changes on
% a manuscript or typescript as opposed to differences between published versions) in just
% the way they turn up their noses at accidentals. If you wish to
% distinguish between published variants and typescript,
% man\-u\-script, or galley variants, |\tsvariant| (for a whole note)
% and |\tsentry| (for a typescript entry in a list of variants in a
% textual note that includes other kinds of variant) provide ways of
% doing so. By default, typescript variants are included. To exclude
% typescript variants, issue |\global\includetypescriptsfalse| in your
% preamble. You can issue |\global||\includetypescriptstrue| in your
% preamble, to remind yourself that you are including typescript
% variants. In that (default) case |\tsvariant| will behave exactly
% like |\textnote|, and entries in other notes marked with
% |\tsentry| will be included in your output.
%
% Here is how to use |\tsentry|:
% if you wish to include typescript entries in a single note including
% those entries in a list with variants from other published versions
% (as for instance when a word appears in a typescript but only in
% the second edition of the published poem), simply issue
% |\textnote| as usual, marking the relevant variant in the list of
% variants with the |\tsentry| command. If typescript variants
% are excluded, the typescript entry will also be excluded.
%
% Here is a typical use of the |\tsentry| command:
% \begin{verbatim}
% Of moonlit desert. A stallion, white and flashing, slips,\verseline
% \textnote{Of moonlit] Of the moonlit {\em NY\/}\tsentry{, SP85TS
% (revised in black pen to SP85)}}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% Notice that since the |\tsentry| comes in the middle of the list,
% it begins with a comma. You might expect an |\unskip| command
% before the comma, to prevent
% \LaTeX\ from adding white space before the comma. \textsf{poemscol}
% automatically provides the |\unskip| if the entry starts with a
% comma or a semicolon.
%
% You can
% mark individual variants with |\tsentry| in the arguments to the
% |\explanatory| and |\emendation| commands as well, and
% |\tsentry| will also behave normally in any endnote or footnote section
% you define using |\definenewnotetype|.
%
% \textsf{poemscol} does not provide for a separate backmatter section
% for typescript variants, but it would be trivial to construct one,
% again using |\definenewnotetype|. To do this, you would also have to
% copy all of the emendations, explanatory notes, and textual notes
% which have a |\tsentry| in their arguments, and add
% |\tsvariant| commands in those places. For information about
% |\definenewnotetype| see section \ref{definingnewnotes}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\margreftextnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\margrefexplanatory}
% \DescribeMacro{\margrefemendation}
% Some editions include a marginal mark in the text showing where in the
% apparatus a textual note on that line can be found. (The edition of William
% Blake's poetry and prose edited by Harold Bloom and David V. Erdman, for instance,
% includes such marks.)
% |\margreftextnote| sets a label in the textual notes section, and
% sets a marginal note with a page reference to that label in the main text. Issue
% |\margreftextnote| \emph{before} issuing the |\verseline| or
% |\end{stanza}| that closes the line to which it refers. (The textual
% note itself can be an ordinary |\textnote|, and should be placed, as
% usual, \emph{after} the |\verseline| or |\end{stanza}|.)
% |\margrefexplanatory| does the same thing for explanatory notes, and
% |\margrefemendation| does the same thing for emendations.
% If you define a new kind of endnote with |\definenewnotetype|, you
% will automatically also define a new |\margref| command for that kind of note. For
% details about how these markers work, see
% section \ref{margreftextnote}, page \pageref{margreftextnote}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\quotedversecorrectiontextnote}
% If you quote verse \emph{within} a textual note, an explanatory
% note, or an emendation, you may want to use the normal \LaTeX\
% |verse| environment for that quotation, rather than the special markup
% for \textsf{poemscol}. You can also use the special |pmclverse| environment, which
% enlarges the indentation of runover lines and the white space
% between stanzas. But you should not use the |poem| environment within the textual notes.
%
% If a textual note
% \emph{ends} with a quotation in verse, you should
% follow the |\textnote| entry with
% |\quotedversecorrectiontextnote|. I found that if I quoted verse in
% the note sections a dirty trick I used to send the notes to the
% external files would cause the following notes on that poem in the
% notes sections to be set in a new paragraph. (This is of course not
% a problem if the quoted verse is the last thing in the notes to that
% poem, since the next poem will open a new paragraph in the notes
% anyway. It is also not a problem if more of the individual textnote
% follows the verse. It's only a problem if the last thing in the
% note is quoted verse, and the note is not the last one on that
% poem.) The command should set it flush as it is, but I have found
% odd cases I can't understand in which that doesn't work, so the
% command has an optional argument, which should be the additional
% length you need to adjust the next line by to make it flush. The
% default is 0pt. |\quotedversecorrectionexplanatory| and
% |\quotedversecorrectionemendation| should follow explanatory notes
% or emendations that end with snippets of verse. These three
% commands are an embarrassing kludge on my part. They simply send
% commands to the relevant note sections that prohibit opening a new
% paragraph. You should issue this command in the main text right
% after the close of the textnote (not in the text of the textnote
% itself).
%
% \section{Creating new kinds of endnote} \label{definingnewnotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\definenewnotetype} The |\definenewnotetype| command
% can be used to create new kinds of endnote, in case the kinds
% \textsf{poemscol} has predefined do not suffice. |\definenewnotetype|
% takes five arguments. They are (assuming you are creating a new
% kind of note to be called a ``mynote''): \begin{enumerate} \item A base name
% used to construct \begin{itemize} \item some |\if| variables (e.g.\
% |\ifmynoteson| to see whether you are collecting ``mynotes'',
% |\ifnomynoteyet| to see whether you have written a ``mynote'' for a
% particular poem yet, |\ifmynotestwocol| to set the notes in two
% column mode, and |\ifmynotesinglepar| to set the notes in
% one paragraph per note form, rather than in block paragraphs).
% \textsf{poemscol} will only open an entry for a poem in the
% ``mynotes'' section if there actually is a ``mynote'' on that poem.
% Note that every |\if| that refers to a section is plural
% (|\ifmynoteson|, |\ifmynotestwocol|, |\ifmynotessinglepar|) and
% that every |\if| that refers to a singular note
% is singular (|\ifnomynoteyet|). \item The name for the output
% channel for writing the notes to the appropriate external file.
% This name will always be plural (e.g.\ ``mynotes"). \item The name for the ``literal''
% command for writing literal, unexpanded text on the file (as
% |\literaltextnote| does on the textnotes file), and for the note
% command that sends the actual textual note (line number and all) to
% the section (e.g.\ |\literalmynote| and |\mynote|), also the command to write notes in
% line-numbered prose (e.g.\ |\prosemynote|) or prose numbered by
% paragraph and sentence (e.g.\ |\pmmynote|). These commands will
% always be singular. \item The name of the |\put| command (e.g.\
% |\putmynotes|) which closes the external file for the notes section,
% reads it back in to your document, and adds an entry in the table of
% contents for that notes section. This command will always be
% plural. (There won't be a |\makemynotes| command,
% because |\definenewnotetype| takes its place.)
% \item The name of the |\margref| command for putting a
% marginal mark next to a line giving the page number in the apparatus
% where a note is to be found (e.g.\ |\margrefmynote|) \end{itemize}
% \item The extension for the external file which will hold the notes
% as you generate them. ``Emendations'' for instance, are written to
% an external file called |\jobname.emd| The file name will always be
% |\jobname|, and the different species of endnotes will all have
% distinctive extensions. (|\jobname| is a command that always expands
% to the name of your top level source file. If, for instance, I am
% setting running a file called ``myfile.tex'' through \LaTeX\,
% |\jobname.emd| translates to ``myfile.emd.'') \item The title of the
% notes section as you wish it to appear in the running header (e.g.
% ``Mynotes to ''). \item The title of the notes section as you wish
% it to appear on the first page of the notes section (e.g.
% ``MYNOTES''). \item The title of the notes section as you wish
% it to appear in the table of contents (e.g.\ ``Mynotes''). \end{enumerate}
%
% \begin{sloppypar} So, for instance,\begin{verbatim}
% \definenewnotetype{xyznote}{xyz}{Xyznotes to}{XYZNOTES}{Xyznotes}
% \end{verbatim}
% creates the booleans |\ifxyznoteson|, |\ifnoxyznoteyet|, and
% |\ifxyznotessinglepar|, the
% commands |\xyznote|, |\literalxyznote|, |\prosexyznote|,
% |\pmxyznote|, and |\putxyznotes| (and, although you don't ever have
% to use it explicitly, |\firstxyznote|) the output channel xyznotes,
% the external file |\jobname.xyz|, an entry in the contents for
% ``Xyznotes'', and an endnotes section with a running header of the
% form ``Xyznotes to pp.~xx--yy'' and a title XYZNOTES. \end{sloppypar}
%
% |\xyznote|
% takes the same arguments that |\textnote| does (which is to say,
% an optional argument for a label for entering line ranges, and an
% argument for the lemma and the comment). There won't be an entry
% for a poem in the ``Xyznotes'' endnotes section unless there
% actually is an xyznote for the poem.
%
%|\prosexyznote|
% (for ``xyznotes'' on line-numbered prose passages) takes the same
% arguments |\prosetextnote| does (which is to say, an optional
% argument for a label for entering line ranges, an argument for a
% label to capture the line number of the first line, and an argument
% for the lemma and the comment). For notes on passages of line-numbered
% prose, see section \ref{prosesections}, page \pageref{prosesections}.
%
% |\pmxyznote| (for prose passages
% numbered by paragraph and sentence) takes the same arguments as
% |\pmtextnote|. For notes on passages of prose numbered by
% paragraph and sentence, see section \ref{paragraphsentence}, page
% \pageref{paragraphsentence}.
%
% \section{Multi-level footnotes} \label{makingfootnotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\textnotesatfoot} \textsf{poemscol} will set multiple
% levels of footnotes in block paragraphs, separating each level with
% a rule. To enable this feature, call the \textsf{manyfoot} package
% as follows in your preamble: |\usepackage[ruled,para*]{manyfoot}|.
%
% To set your textual notes as footnotes, issue |\textnotesatfoot| in
% your preamble. If you do this, \textsf{poemscol} will actually
% create two sets of footnotes for textnotes, one for those that are
% called with |\textnote|, which will produce an unindented block of
% notes, and one for those that are called with |\sources|, which will
% produce individual indented paragraphs, opening a new paragraph with
% every note. |\sources| notes often have several paragraphs, so they
% are inappropriate for block-paragraph or ``para'' mode, and because
% those paragraphs are often in fact prose paragraphs, rather than
% blocks of notations, they are indented, so that they will be read as
% prose. To set your emendations as footnotes, issue
% |\emendationsatfoot| in your preamble. These notes will be set by
% default as block paragraphs. If you have multiple-paragraph notes
% in your emendations, you should redefine these notes to set plain
% rather than para style notes. (See the next paragraph for how to do
% this.) To set your explanatory notes as
% footnotes, issue |\explanationsatfoot|. These notes will also, by
% default, be plain style notes, with one indented paragraph per note.
% You do not need to issue |\maketextnotes|, |\makeemendations| or
% |\makeexplanatorynotes| if you set those notes as footnotes. If you
% use |\literaltextnote| anywhere in your file, however, you will lose
% the text it would have put in your textnotes, since |\literaltextnote|
% just writes its argument onto the external file for textual notes.
% The arguments to |\literalexplain| and |\literalemendation| will
% be discarded as well if explanatory notes or emendation notes are set as footnotes.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\iftextfootnotespara}
% \DescribeMacro{\ifsourcesfootnotespara}
% \DescribeMacro{\ifemendationfootnotespara}
% \DescribeMacro{\ifexplanfootnotespara}
% To change the style of your footnotes between plain and
% para modes, globally change the values some of the following
% booleans. |\ifsourcesfootnotespara|, obviously, is true if
% footnotes from the |\sources| command are set in ``para'' mode
% (default is false). |\iftextfootnotespara| is true if footnotes
% from |\textnote| are set in ``para'' mode (default is true).
% |\ifemendationfootnotespara|, or |\ifexplanfootnotespara| are the
% booleans which set the style of footnotes from |\emendation| and
% |\explanatory| respectively. By default, footnotes from
% |\emendation| are set in ``para'' mode (|\emendationfootnotesparatrue|), and footnotes from
% |\explanatory| are set in ``plain'' mode (|\explanfootnotesparafalse|). To change explanatory
% footnotes from plain to para mode, for instance, issue
% |\global\explanfootnotesparatrue|. Counterintuitive as it sounds,
% you must issue this \emph{before} issuing |\textnotesatfoot|, |\emendationsatfoot|,
% or |\explanationsatfoot|.
%
% When |\sources| is defined to send endnotes to the textual notes
% section, they usually appear immediately underneath the title of
% the volume or poem they comment upon in the endnotes section. If you are having |\sources|
% output footnotes, it would be a good idea to open the note with the
% title of the volume or poem it is a comment upon, in case there is
% more than one poem on the page.
%
% When note classes are set as footnotes, the symbol which marks
% cases in which a page turn falls on a stanza break will be set
% \emph{beneath} the footnotes. This is a consequence of the way
% \textsf{poemscol} uses the |\mark| mechanism to keep track of these
% cases, so I have not figured out how to change it. But it may well
% be more of an idiosyncrasy than a bug, particularly if the symbol
% is changed from * to something like ``stanza break at page turn.''
%
% \DescribeMacro{\DeclareNewFootnote}
% To create a new level of footnote, you must first declare it to
% make it known to \textsf{manyfoot}, which requires each level of
% footnote to be given a unique suffix (usually a capital letter of
% the alphabet). You can declare a new footnote level called
% |\footnoteE| for instance, by issuing
% |\DeclareNewFootnote[para]{E}|. You will want notes which don't put
% a mark in the body of the text, and begin with the line number or
% range of line numbers of the lemma. To define a footnote called
% |\mynote|, first declare new footnote |\footnoteE| (A, B, C and D
% are reserved for sources, textual notes, emendations, and explanatory notes,
% respectively, and H is reserved for use for titles with
% authorial footnotes). Then issue: \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\mynote}[2][0]{\setlemmarange{#1}\\
% \FootnotetextE{\citerange}{#2}
% \resetlemmacounters} \end{verbatim}
% |\setlemmarange|, |\citerange|, and
% |\resetlemmacounters| are internal commands to enable your footnote to handle line ranges in
% the lemma. They are defined in the implementation section below, at section
% \ref{notetools}. If a |\mynote| refers to a range of lines, you can issue
% the same kinds of optional argument that are used with |\textnote|.
%
% \section{Notes at the end of poems}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemendnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\makepoemendnotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\putpoemendnotes}
% You may wish, rather than using endnotes or footnotes, simply to print your
% notes at the end of each poem. To do this for simple notes, issue |\makepoemendnotes| just
% after |\begin{poem}|. Issue |\poemendnote| where you wish to make a note,
% using the same conventions for line ranges you use for |\textnote|. Where you want to output
% the notes, issue |\putpoemendnotes|. These notes can have multi-line lemmas,
% just like textual notes.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\ifpoemendnotessinglepar}
% By default, each poem end note is given its own paragraph. To concatenate
% them into one big paragraph, issue |\poemendnotessingleparfalse|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\poemendemendationnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\makepoemendemendationnotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\putpoemendemendationnotes}
% You can also print emendation notes at the end of each poem.
% To do this, issue |\makepoemendemendationnotes| just
% after |\begin{poem}|. Issue |\poemendemendationnote| where you wish to make a note,
% using the same conventions you use for |\textnote|. Where you want to output
% the notes, issue |\putpoemendemendationnotes|. These notes can have multi-line lemmas,
% just like textual notes.
%
% By default, each poem end note is given its own paragraph. To concatenate
% them into one big paragraph, issue |\poemendemendationnotessingleparfalse|.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemendexplanatorynote}
% \DescribeMacro{\makepoemendexplanatorynotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\putpoemendexplanatorynotes}
% You can print explanatory notes at the end of each poem.
% To do this, issue |\makepoemendexplanatorynotes| just
% after |\begin{poem}|. Issue |\poemendexplanatorynote| where you wish to make a note,
% using the same conventions you use for |\textnote|. Where you want to output
% the notes, issue |\putpoemendexplanatorynotes|. These notes can have multi-line lemmas,
% just like textual notes.\end{sloppypar}
%
% By default, each poem end note is given its own paragraph. To concatenate
% them into one big paragraph, issue |\poemendexplanatorynotessingleparfalse|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\poemendtextnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\makepoemendtextnotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\putpoemendtextnotes}
% You can print textual
% notes at the end of each poem. To do this, issue |\makepoemendtextnotes| just
% after |\begin{poem}|. Issue |\poemendtextnote| where you wish to make a note,
% using the same conventions you use for |\textnote|. Where you want to output
% the notes, issue |\putpoemendtextnotes|. These notes can have multi-line lemmas,
% just like textual notes.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\ifpoemendtextnotessinglepar}
% By default, each poem end note is given its own paragraph. To concatenate
% them into one big paragraph, issue |\poemendtextnotessingleparfalse|.
%
% \section{Printing endnotes and index}
% \DescribeMacro{\testforauxonfirstrun} If you don't want to listen to
% \LaTeX\ complain about missing references during your first run,
% issue |\testforauxonfirstrun|, which won't let |\finish|,
% |\putexplanatory|, |\puttextnotes|, or |\putemendations| run unless
% there is an .aux file for a previous run. \emph{Be sure to issue
% this command before issuing} |\begin{document}|, \emph{since that
% reads in the existing .aux file, and overwrites it with a new one.}
%
% \label{putexternalfiles}
% \DescribeMacro{\putemendations} This command closes the external file
% for emendations and reads it in. It also puts an entry for the
% emendations section into your table of contents. After
% |\putemendations| has read in the external file for emendations, you
% will need to run your file through \LaTeX\ again, to put the correct
% page number in the table of contents file.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\puttextnotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\putexplanatory} |\puttextnotes| and
% |\putexplanatory| do the same thing for the textual
% notes and for the explanatory notes.
%
% Each of these last three commands restores normal hyphenation. Since
% all three are printed with the |\small| font size, the hyphen
% character is defined only for that size. This should not create
% other issues, however, because the commands that prohibit
% hyphenation in the |poem| environment (and in the |contentsentry|
% environment) are local to those environments, so the restoration of
% the hyphen character may be redundant.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\putpoemindex} |\putpoemindex| reads in the index at
% this point, and adds an entry for the index to external file for the
% table of contents.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\putmultiplepoemindex} If you are generating
% several indices using \textsf{splitindex} |\putmultiplepoemindex|
% reads in one of them at this point. For instructions about this
% command, see section \ref{multipleindex}, p.~\pageref{multipleindex}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\finish} The
% |\finish| command is deprecated but still available. It is designed
% to be placed just before |\end{document}| (which, in fact, it
% replaces --- but you should still put an |\end{document}| at the end
% of your document for form's sake). |\finish| closes the external
% files for the three notes sections and reads them back into the
% document (turning the automatic hyphenation back on for these
% sections). It adds entries to the table of contents file for the
% notes sections. It reads in the formatted index file (which you
% have made from your raw .idx file using MakeIndex between \LaTeX\
% runs) and adds an entry for the index to the table of contents.
% Then it closes the external file for the table of contents and reads
% that in (putting it at the end of the document, as I explained
% before). Then it adds a page explaining that the symbol (by default
% *) at the bottom of certain pages marks places where a stanza break
% and a page break coincide. If you have an editor's introduction
% preceding your notes section, or a list of abbreviations, you may
% wish to consult the |\finish| command for suggestions about how to add
% the lines to read those files in and add entries for them in the
% table of contents.
%
% \section{Forewords, Appendices, Contents Entries}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\makeappendix} To make a an Appendix, or any other inserted
% prose section, use |\makeappendix|. |\makeappendix| takes one argument, the title.
% The new section will open on a recto page, and its first page will be in the empty page style.
% The title of the section will appear on the page in the style of the textual notes section.
% The title of the section will appear in the running header of subsequent pages.
% An entry for the new section, with the page number,
% will be added to the table of contents. The entry will
% be formatted the way the entries for textual notes and explanatory notes are formatted.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\appendixtitle} If you wish to add an Appendix which you don't
% want to start on a new page but do want
% to have a contents entry for, use |\appendixtitle| instead of |\makeappendix|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\makesubappendix} |\makesubappendix| behaves exactly as |makeappendix| does,
% except the contents entry will be indented by the length |\subappendixtitleindentamount|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\subappendixtitle} If you wish to add an Subappendix which you don't
% want to start on a new page but do want
% to have a contents entry for, use |\subappendixtitle| instead of |\makesubappendix|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\appendixincontents} If you wish to suppress contents entries for
% appendices, issue the boolean |\appendixincontentsfalse|. Contents entries for
% appendices or subappendices will be suppressed so long as that boolean is set to false.
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\makeforeword} |\makeforeword| and |\forewordtitle| behave basically the way
% |\makeappendix| and |\appendixtitle|. I provided separate commands because it occurred to
% me that one might want to treat front matter and back matter sections differently in the
% table of contents, so I have allowed for different indentations for their contents entries.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pmclcontentsentry} \label{pmclcontentsentry} If you want to add a
% line to the table of contents that
% will follow the formatting of other entries in the contents, issue |\pmclcontentsentry|.
% |\pmclcontentsentry| takes three arguments. The first is the title you wish to put in the contents.
% The second is the length of the indentation to appear in the contents (usually |\contentsindentone|,
% |\contentsindenttwo|, or |\contentsindentthree|, but you can use any arbitrary length).
% The third argument is the page number. The argument could be a |\pageref| rather than a number.
% if you define the |\label| for that |\pageref| somewhere else in your file.
%
%
% \section{Special cases}
% \subsection{~Epigraphs, attributions etc.} \label{centerepigraphs}
% \DescribeMacro{\epigraph} \DescribeMacro{\headnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\attribution} \DescribeMacro{\poemdedication}
% |\epigraph|, |\headnote|, |\attribution|, and |\poemdedication| set
% their arguments as epigraphs, headnotes, attributions, or
% dedications for poems or poetic sequences.
% There are in addition the special commands |\JHepigraph| and |\JHdedication|, which place
% a mark in the margin
% showing where in the notes comments on that epigraph or dedication may be found.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\volumeepigraph} If you have dedications, epigraphs, or attributions on
% the divider pages of editions that combine several volumes of
% poetry, use |\volumededication|, |\volumeepigraph|, and
% |\volumeattribution|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\centertitles}
% If |\centertitles| or |\centeritlescheme| is in effect, epigraphs, headnotes, dedications,
% and attributions will all be centered on the page. (|\volumeepigraph|, |\volumededication|,
% and |\volumeattribution|, however, are unaffected by |\centertitles|.)
% If your epigraph or headnote is a prose passage of more than one line, or
% of more than one paragraph, or a verse
% passage of more than line, or even more than one stanza, the |\epigraph| command will work
% properly if |\centertitles| is in effect, which is to say it will draw the margins in towards the center,
% rather than centering the epigraph line by line.
%
% Issuing |\centertitles| moves the margins in on both sides by the length
% |\centerepigraphindentation| (the default is 6em). The margins for
% uncentered epigraphs and the like are controlled by the length |\normalepigraphindentation|
% (the default is 1.5em). Both values can be adjusted by using |\setlength|.
%
% After issuing |\centertitles| you can move epigraphs and similar things back to the margin
% by issuing |\centerepigraphsonfalse|. After issuing |\centertitles| you can put titles at the margin
% while leaving epigraphs alone by issuing |\centertitlesonfalse|.
%
% If you use the standard \LaTeX\ |verse|
% environment within an epigraph, you may wish to add a |\smallskip| between
% stanzas. (To my eye that environment does not leave enough white space between
% stanzas.) Alternatively, you can use the special |pmclverse| environment.
% You can even use
% the |poem| environment, but if
% you do this, you should so mark line breaks with |\\| and stanza breaks
% with a blank line, as in the standard |verse| environment. If
% you mark up the epigraph with things like |\verseline| and |\end{stanza}| you may wind
% up with marginal line numbers in your epigraph.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}You
% may also wish to align epigraphs, dedications, attributions, or
% headnotes with the left margin of the verse block (even if you
% center the titles). To do this, issue |\leftalignepigraphstrue| to
% set the boolean |\ifleftalignepigraphs|. Remember that for |\leftalignepigraphstrue| to
% work, you will need to use the |\settowidth| command. Issue
% |\settowidth{\versewidth}{Text to be used for centering.}| just
% before you issue the |\poemtitle| command.
% |\leftalignepigraphstrue| will also align attributions,
% dedications, and other pre-texts of poems. \end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\shortpoemepigraph}
% \DescribeMacro{\shortpoemdedication}
% \DescribeMacro{\shortpoemattribution}
% Because |\centerepigraphs| merely
% draws in the margins on both sides rather than centering each line
% line by line, short epigraphs may not appear
% well centered. |\shortpoemepigraph| |\shortpoemdedication| and
% |\shortpoemattribution|, are better for single line epigraphs,
% since they will center their arguments line by line.
%
% \begin{sloppypar} The commands
% |\shortpoemepigraph| |\shortpoemdedication| and
% |\shortpoemattribution| will all place their texts in
% accordance with the title placement scheme you select in your
% preamble.
% |\normaltitleindentationscheme| will place them near the left text
% margin.
% |\titlesatleftversemarginscheme| will place them at the left verse
% margin.
% |\titlescenteredonleftverseblockscheme| will center them over the
% longest line of a left-flushed verse block.
% |\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblockscheme| will place them at the
% left margin of a centered verse block.
% |\centertitlesscheme| will center them over a centered verse block.
% You can center epigraphs and similar things on the page over an uncentered verse block
% by issuing the boolean |\centerepigraphson|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\JHshortepigraph}
% I have also defined
% |\JHshortepigraph| and |\JHshortdedication|, which set marginal
% marks pointing to where notes on the epigraph or dedication in the textual notes section may be
% found, in the manner of |\JHpoemtitle|.
% These commands too obey the title placement scheme that may be in effect. \end{sloppypar}
%
% \subsection{~Appending publication date}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemdate} You can append the date of the poem
% with |\poemdate|. Issue |\poemdate| just after |\end{poem}|. You can
% include both the composition and publication date if you wish simply by
% including both dates in the argument.
% (In fact, you can put anything in the argument, not just dates.) By default |\poemdate| places the
% date one |\bigskip| under the left margin of the verse block of the poem,
% whether the poem is set at the left
% margin or whether the verse block is centered on the longest line.
% You can move the placement of the date left or right
% by changing the value of the length |\dateindent|. If you wish to change
% |\dateindent| you will have to issue |\setlength{\dateindent}{your value}| before
% each instance of |\poemdate|, since \textsf{poemscol} recalculates
% |\dateindent| freshly for every poem.
%
% There is a slight bug in |\poemdate|. If there is a page turn between the last line of the
% poem and the date, and the last line has a runover portion, the date will be set
% flush with the indented runover portion of the line rather than with the beginning
% of the line. This should not in practice
% be a problem, because you should use |\longpage| or several |\shortpage| commands
% to move the widowed date line anyway.
% (For |\longpage| and |\shortpage| see section \ref{longpage},
% page \pageref{longpage}.)
%
% \subsection{~Pausing line numbering}
% \DescribeMacro{\saveverselinenumber}
% \DescribeMacro{\restoreverselinenumber} There are cases in which you
% might want to pause and resume line numbering later at the same number.
% For instance, you may have inset prose
% passages which do not take line numbers, but you wish to resume line numbering the verse
% after the passage. The way to set this is to issue |\end{stanza}|
% at the end of the stanza before the prose insert. Then issue
% |\saveverselinenumber|. Then issue |\end{poem}|. Insert the prose
% quotation (perhaps followed by |\attribution|). Then issue
% |\begin{poem}| followed by |\restoreverselinenumber| and |\begin{stanza}|.
% Then begin entering the rest of the poem as usual. Longer, independent prose
% sections (such as the author's preface or prose poems) require
% different handling. To provide line numbers and notes for such
% prose sections, see section \ref{prosesections}.
%
% \subsection{~Quoted verse}
% Sometimes you wish to quote verse within verse (as when a speaker
% in a verse play quotes a poem). \DescribeMacro{quotedverse} The
% |quotedverse| environment is designed for this contingency. If
% you issue |\verseline| commands or the |stanza| environment, line counting
% and annotation will proceed as usual in quoted verse.
%
% \subsection{~Multiline poem titles}\label{multilinetitles}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlefirstline}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlemiddleline}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlelastline}
% Very long titles present special problems. In the first place, they
% require special provisions to make sure that page breaks don't
% happen in the middle of a title, or immediately after a title. In
% the second place, they raise questions about how the author wished
% to break them up over several lines. If you think it might matter,
% these commands make it possible for you to ensure that long titles are
% broken in exactly the same way in your text and in your table of
% contents. (I didn't pursue this question for titles in notes
% sections, and in notes sections these commands simply concatenate a
% long title.)
%
% There are similar commands for most but not all of the whole series of
% titles for sequences, sequence sections, sequence subsections, and so on.
% If you need commands for a kind of multi-line title that is not already
% defined, see below at section \ref{customizing titles}, page \pageref{customizing titles}.
%
% Alternatively, you can just let \textsf{poemscol} handle the long
% titles by itself. If you are pretty sure that the author did not
% care how long titles were broken up, this would probably be the
% best thing to do. Remember also that if \textsf{poemscol} breaks a
% title across two lines, you can always force it not break the line
% by using enclosing the argument to |\poemtitle| in an |\hbox|. You
% may get a complaint on your log file about an overfull |\hbox| if
% you do this, however.
%
% \subsection{~Poems in sections}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemsectiontitle}
% |\poemsectiontitle| and |\poemsubsectiontitle|, as their
% names imply, set their arguments as the titles of sections or subsections of poems.
% |\poemfirstsectiontitle| is for the first section
% of a poem with many sections. (It differs from |\poemsectiontitle|
% in that it tries to make it harder for a page break to separate the
% title of a poem from the title of its first section.)
% |\poemsectiontitlefirstline|, |\poemsectiontitlemiddleline|,
% |\poemsectiontitlelastline|, |\poemsectiontitlenocontents|, and
% |\poemsectiontitlebaretitle|), as their titles imply, are used for
% special cases such as long section titles, if you wish to specify
% explicitly how the title is to be broken up in the text and in the
% table of contents. You can construct variants of these commands for
% dealing with special cases I didn't anticipate by using
% the commands described in section \ref{customizing titles}.
%\end{sloppypar}
%
% \subsection{~Poetic sequences}\label{poeticsequences}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\sequencetitle} \DescribeMacro{\sequencesectiontitle}
% \DescribeMacro{\sequencefirstsectiontitle}
% \DescribeMacro{\sequencesubsectiontitle} Sequences of related
% poems, perhaps with an over-title, demand special handling in the
% text, in the notes sections, and in the table of contents. (A
% moment's thought will show that they are different in some ways from
% poems in sections. For one thing, a sequence manifests a different
% relationship between part and whole than a poem in sections does,
% and often provides stronger experiences of momentary closure between
% sections.) |\sequencetitle| sets its argument as the title of the sequence,
% |\sequencesectiontitle| sets the titles of the sections of the
% sequence, and |\sequencesubsectiontitle| sets the titles of
% subsections of the sequence (there is even a command for the title
% of sub-subsections, |\sequencesubsubsectiontitle|).
% |\sequencefirstsectiontitle| gives a little more
% vertical space between the main title and the first section title
% than |\sequencesectiontitle| gives between adjacent sections later
% on in the sequence (since the over-title for the sequence is in
% larger type) and adjusts the page breaking penalties to reflect the
% fact that such titles should not occur near the bottom of a page,
% since there should be no page break between the sequence title and
% the title of the first section of the sequence (although page breaks
% are permissible, indeed even slightly favored, between later
% sections). There should also never be a page break between a
% section title and the first or second line of the section. The
% penalties \textsf{poemscol} sets should take care of these
% automatically, but you may still have cases which require you to
% specify a page break with |\pagebreak| or |\newpage|. There are a
% host of other commands, all with self-explanatory titles, that deal
% with some special situations that arise in setting the elements of
% poetic sequences, such as cases where you wish to specify how long
% titles will be broken up into lines, or where you wish no entry to
% be made for the section in the table of contents or in the notes
% sections. These commands don't of course exhaust the dizzying
% possibilities, but from them you can construct whatever other commands
% you may need.
%
% Here is a list of all of the defined title commands.
%
% \begin{itemize}
% \item Commands for Poem titles
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |\poemtitle|
% \item |\poemtitlefirstline|
% \item |\poemtitlemiddleline|
% \item |\poemtitlelastline|
% \item |\poemsubtitle|
% \item |\poemtitlenotitle|
% \item |\poemtitlenocontents|
% \item |\poemtitlebaretitle|
% \item |\poemtitleonlycontents|
% \item |\poemtitleonlynotes|
% \end{itemize}
% \item Poems in Sections
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |\poemsectiontitle|
% \item |\poemsectiontitlefirstline|
% \item |\poemsectiontitlemiddleline|
% \item |\poemsectiontitlelastline|
% \item |\poemsectiontitlenocontents|
% \item |\poemsectiontitlebaretitle|
% \item |\poemfirstsectiontitle|
% \item |\poemfirstsectiontitlebaretitle|
% \item |\poemsubsectiontitle|
% \end{itemize}
% \item Sequence Titles
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |\sequencetitle|
% \item |\sequencetitlefirstline|
% \item |\sequencetitlemiddleline|
% \item |\sequencetitlelastline|
% \item |\sequencetitlenonotes|
% \end{itemize} \goodbreak
% \item Sequence Sections
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |\sequencesectiontitle|
% \item |\sequencesectiontitlenocontents|
% \item |\sequencesectiontitlenonotes|
% \item |\sequencesectiontitlebaretitle|
% \item |\sequencesectiontitlefirstline|
% \item |\sequencesectiontitlemiddleline|
% \item |\sequencesectiontitlelastline|
% \item |\sequencefirstsectiontitle|
% \item |\sequencefirstsectiontitlenocontents|
% \item |\sequencefirstsectiontitlenonotes|
% \item |\sequencefirstsectiontitlefirstline|
% \item |\sequencefirstsectiontitlemiddleline|
% \item |\sequencefirstsectiontitlelastline|
% \item |\sequencesectionsubtitle|
% \end{itemize}
% \item Sequence Subsections
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |\sequencesubsectiontitle|
% \item |\sequencesubsectiontitlenocontents|
% \item |\sequencefirstsubsectiontitle|
% \item |\sequencefirstsubsectiontitlenocontents|
% \item |\sequencesubsectiontitlefirstline|
% \item |\sequencesubsectiontitlemiddleline|
% \item |\sequencesubsectiontitlelastline|
% \item |\sequencefirstsubsectiontitlefirstline|
% \item |\sequencefirstsubsectiontitlemiddleline|
% \item |\sequencefirstsubsectiontitlelastline|
%
% \item |\sequencesubsubsectiontitle|
% \item |\sequencesubsubsectiontitlenocontents|
% \item |\sequencefirstsubsubsectiontitlenocontents|
% \end{itemize}
% \end{itemize}
%
% \subsection{~Titles with marginal markers}
% \DescribeMacro{\JHpoemtitle}
% In his edition of the poetry of Jos\'e Maria Heredia, Tilmann
% Altenberg placed a marker in the margin next to poem titles with a
% reference to where in the apparatus notes on that poem could be
% found. To do this, use the |\JHpoemtitle| command. This command
% takes two arguments: first, the title of the poem, second, the label
% used by the |\label| command on the page of the notes section to
% which the title refers. So, you would issue the poem title command
% this way: |\JHpoemtitle{Los desvelados}{EP_LosDesvelados_AC}|.
%
% (Up to
% version 2.49 of \textsf{poemscol} you had to be sure to define the
% label in the notes sections by issuing
% |\literaltextnote{\label{EP_LosDesvelados_AC}}|. This is no longer
% necessary, and |\JHpoemtitle| defines both the |\label| and the
% |\pageref|.)
%
% Instructions are given in section \ref{JHpoemtitle},
% p.~\pageref{JHpoemtitle} for how to construct similar commands for
% sequences, sequence sections, and so on.
% The following related commands are defined already:
% \begin{itemize}
% \item |\JHsequencetitle| \item |\JHsequencefirstsectiontitle|
% \item |\JHsequencesectiontitle| \item |\JHsequencesubsectiontitle|
% \item |\JHpoemsectiontitle| \item |\JHpoemfirstsectiontitle|
% \item |\JHpoemsubtitle| \item |\JHepigraph| \item |\JHprosesectiontitle|
% \item |\JHdedication| \end{itemize}
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\setmargpoemtitle}
% |\setmargpoemtitle| is a more general version of
% |\JHpoemtitle|, with the second argument being any commands you
% want to be issued just after the title is processed.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\margreftextnote}\label{margreftextnote}
% Another feature of Altenberg's Heredia edition is a marginal mark
% attached to lines to which text notes refer showing where in the
% apparatus a comment upon that line is to be found.
% |\margreftextnote| sets a label in the textual notes section, and
% sets a marginal note with a page reference to that label in the main text. Issue
% |\margreftextnote| \emph{before} issuing the |\verseline| or
% |\end{stanza}| that closes the line to which it refers. (The textual
% note itself can be an ordinary |\textnote|, and should be placed, as
% usual, \emph{after} the |\verseline| or |\end{stanza}|.)
%
% |\margreftextnote| generates its own label, so there is no need to
% make up one yourself.
%
%\begin{sloppy}
% |\margreftextnote| and its siblings use a
% new kind of insert, |\JHmarginpar|, to set the marginal marks.
% This is so that you can control the placement of these marks
% independently of how you place the line numbers (which use
% |\pmclsidepar|) or other marginal marks you may define using
% |\marginpar|.
%
% Horizontal placement of the mark is controlled by the
% length |\JHmarginparsep|, which is set by default to 0 pt. Vertical
% placement of the marginal mark for a textual note, relative to the baseline, is set by
% the length |\JHmarginparvshift|, which is set by default to 0 pt.
% The horizontal placement of the
% marginal mark set by |\JHpoemtitle|, and its siblings, however,
% is controlled by the length |\JHtitlemarginparsep|. |\JHtitlemarginparsep|
% is set by default to value of |\JHmarginparsep|,
% so that the two
% kinds of mark
% should align with each other by default.
% \end{sloppy}
%
% By default these marginal references are placed in the right
% margin. If you wish to set them in the left margin, issue the
% command |\JHmarksleft|. If you wish to place them back into the
% right margin, issue the command |\JHmarksright|.
% If you wish the
% marks to aways be in the outer margin, issue the command
% |\JHmarksouter|. If you wish the marks to always be in the inner
% margin, issue |\JHmarksgutter|. (The marks for titles and the marks for
% notes always appear on the same side of the page, and the different |\JHmarks| commands
% always move both kinds of mark.)
%
% If you are centering the verse block on the longest line, the verse
% line numbers normally move in towards the verse block. (To center
% the verse block on the longest line, see section
% \ref{centeringtextblock}.) The marginal
% marks for |\margeftextnote| do not do this, since they are designed to
% line up with the marginal mark produced by |\JHpoemtitle|. You can change
% the alignment if you wish by changing the value of either the length |\JHmarginparsep|,
% which controls the placement of marginal marks for notes, or changing the value
% of the length |\JHtitlemarginparsep|, which controls the placement of the marginal
% marks for titles.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% If you define a new endnote type using |\definenewnotetype|,
% |\definenewnotetype| will also define a new |\margref| command to go
% with it. So, for example, if you define a new note type called
% |\mynote|, you will automatically also define a ``margref'' command
% called |\margrefmynote| which will place a mark in the margin with
% a label showing where in the end notes sections the text of that
% |\mynote| can be found. \end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\setmargrefmarker} Altenberg's edition used a ding
% from the pifonts collection in the marginal marks made by
% |\margreftextnote| and its siblings. I have set the default to
% |\dag|, so as not to depend upon yet another style package. You can
% choose another mark using |\setmargrefmarker| (e.g.\
% |\setmargrefmarker{\ding{228}}|).
%
% \DescribeMacro{\settitlemargrefmarker} Altenberg's edition also used a
% different marker for marginal marks for the titles of poems from that used
% for marginal marks made by |\margreftextnote|. By default that marker
% is |\dag|, but you can change it by using |\settitlemargrefmarker|,
%
% \DescribeMacro{\margrefemendation} |\margrefemendation| is a
% version of |\margreftextnote| for emendations.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\margrefexplanatory}|\margrefexplanatory| is a
% version of |\margreftextnote| for explanatory notes.
%
% \subsection{~Titles with footnotes}
% In James Benstead's edition of the collected poems of Hugh
% MacDiarmid, many of the titles of the poems have footnotes by the
% author. Under most circumstances, one can put a note about the title
% in the textual notes section simply by, after the |\begin{poem}|
% command, issuing something like this: |\literaltextnote{title] text of note}|.
% (One can make similar notes for the explanatory notes
% section or for the emendations section.) But MacDiarmid's notes are
% authorial, not editorial, and should be considered part of the
% title. At the same time, the notes should not be printed in the Table
% of Contents, nor for that matter in the endnotes sections.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footnotepoemtitle} |\footnotepoemtitle| is for the default
% case. It takes two arguments. The first argument is the title of
% the poem. The second is the text of the footnote.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\footnotepoemtitlefirstline}
% |\footnotepoemtitlefirstline| |\footnotepoemtitlemiddleline| and
% |\footnotepoemtitlelastline| are for long titles in which how the
% author broke up the title on the page matters, and one or more of
% the lines has a footnote. These commands also take two arguments,
% of which the first is the title line and the second is the text of
% the footnote. You can intersperse these commands with
% |\poemtitlefirstline|
% |\poemtitlemiddleline| or |\poemtitlelastline| (depending on which
% line has the footnote). The lines will be broken in the same way in
% the text and in the table of contents. \end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\footnotesplitpoemtitle} |\footnotesplitpoemtitle|
% is for the most general case. Use it if there is a footnote in the middle
% of the title, or if you have a long title and don't need to ensure
% that it is broken in the text and in the table of contents in the
% same way. |\footnotesplitpoemtitle| takes three arguments. The first
% argument is the first part of the title, up to the footnote mark,
% the second is the text of the footnote, and the third is the rest
% of the title.
%
% I have not created footnoted titles for sequences, sequence
% sections, and so on. But if you compare how those titles are
% defined in the implementation section below and how footnoted
% titles are defined at \ref{footnotetitles}
% (page \pageref{footnotetitles}), how to write those commands should be clear.
%
% You can control where the footnotes for footnoted titles are placed.
% By default, those footnotes are conventional footnotes (and all
% their parameters are set in the way normal \LaTeX\ footnotes are
% set). You can force the default setting by issuing the command
% |\maketitlefootnotesplain| in your preamble. If you are setting
% your textual notes or other notes at the foot of the page using
% ``layers'' of footnotes, you can treat these footnotes as just
% another layer by issuing the command |\maketitlefootnoteslayered| in
% your preamble. (``Layered'' footnotes are described at section \ref{makingfootnotes},
% page \pageref{makingfootnotes}.) If you wish to place these footnotes at the end of
% the poem, you must issue |\maketitlefootnotesatpoemend| in the
% preamble. Just before you declare a title with a footnote, issue
% |\makepoemendnotes|, and just after issuing |\end{poem}| for that
% poem, issue |\putpoemendnotes|.
%
% \subsection{~Empty poem titles and italicized poem titles}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlenotitle}
% |\poemtitlenotitle|, with its paradoxical name, is for poems
% without formal titles. Usually such poems are referred to by their
% first lines. This command does not produce a title in the text, but
% sets its argument in the table of contents and in the notes. Usually
% you use the first line as the moral equivalent of a title.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitleitalic}
% Titles
% with italics or other special formatting posed special problems in
% earlier versions (before version 1.7) since the typesetting commands
% gummed up how I passed parameters around that I was unable to solve
% using |\protect|. All of these commands are obsolete now, but are
% retained for backward compatibility.
% |\poemtitleitalic| takes
% two arguments. The first is the title of the poem with the italics
% (or small capitals or international characters or what have you),
% for typesetting, and the second is the title without the commands,
% for cross reference purposes. (Actually, now that \textsf{poemscol}
% no longer needs to treat italics in titles in a different way, it can
% be anything you want, since the second argument is discarded.)
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlenotitleitalic}
% |\poemtitlenotitleitalic|, with its doubly paradoxical name,
% is for poems without formal titles but with italicized words in their
% first lines. |\poemtitlenotitleitalic| takes two arguments. The
% first is the first line with the italics (for typesetting
% purposes), and the second is the
% first line without the italics (for crossreference purposes). This command
% is obsolete now that italics in titles no longer require special
% handing, but is retained for backwards compatibility.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \subsection{~Problem titles}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlebaretitle}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitleonlycontents}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitleonlynotes}
% If you have a problem title, one for instance
% in which the title in the text might cause problems in the contents or in the notes,
% you can send information
% separately to the places it will be used.
% For example, a user planned to attach a footnote to a poem title,
% but didn't want the mark or the text of the
% note to show up in the contents or in the endnotes. I would usually
% have advised him to use |\sources| to send the text of the note to the endnotes,
% but he really wanted the title to include the footnote mark and to put the footnote
% on the same page. The solution to this problem
% was to set the title in the text separately from setting it in the notes and in the contents.
% |\poemtitlebaretitle|, for instance simply sets the title in the text. Then
% you can use |\poemtitleonlycontents| to send the title to the contents
% and |\poemtitleonlynotes| to send the title to the notes. These commands
% are defined for poem titles, and for some but not all of the whole range of titles including
% sequence titles, sequence section titles, sequence section subtitles, and so on. But
% it would be easy to roll your own versions of these commands by looking below at
% section \ref{customizing titles}, page \pageref{customizing titles}, or at the
% models in the code below at section \ref{poemtitlecode}, page \pageref{poemtitlecode}.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlenocontents}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlenonotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\poemtitlenotitle}
% There are also commands to send information to any two of the relevant locations
% but not the third. |\poemtitlenocontents| sends the title to the text and to the notes,
% but not to the contents. |\poemtitlenonotes| sends the title to the text and to the
% contents, but not to the notes. |\poemtitlenotitle| sends the title to the contents and the
% notes, but not to the main text.
%
% Remember that in the last resort, you can send information to the contents section
% with |\literalcontents|. To actually set a contents entry using |\literalcontents| is a tall order,
% however, since you would have to include all the information from the |\c@ntentsinfo| command
% for the relevant type of title. (For what |\c@ntentsinfo| does,
% see section \ref{customizing titles}, below.)
% For instance, for a poem called
% Test Poem, that would be:
%
% \begin{verbatim}
% \literalcontents{\setlength\contentsentryoverrun{\contentsindenttwoamount }
% \begin{contentsentryenvironment}
% \contentsindentone
% {\contentspoemtitlefont
% Test
% Poem}
% \contentsleaders
% \pageref{testpoemlabel} % pick a unique label
% \end{contentsentryenvironment}
% \par}
% \end{verbatim}
%
% Another tricky thing about this method is the |\pageref| line in the above, which is a pageref to find
% and set in the contents the number of the
% page the poem appears on. You should put |\label{testpoemlabel}|, with any unique
% text for the label (so long as it is the same one used in the |\pageref| line),
% on the page of the text where the poem occurs, in order to capture
% the correct page number. (Alternatively, you could just put the actual page number in
% what you send to the contents with |\literalcontents| instead of the pageref line, but you will
% have to remember to change this number if anything changes in your edition.)
%
% Remember also that you can send information to the relevant notes sections using
% |\literaltextnote|, |\literalexplain|, and |\literalemend|.
%
%
% \subsection{~Customizing titles} \label{customizing titles} \textsf{poemscol} provides a large
% number of ways of setting titles, but conceivably you may wish to
% define your own. Here is a template for designing a new kind of
% title. Suppose you wish to create a kind of title called
% |\mytitle|. It would take one argument, which would be the title
% itself. The command defining the |\mytitle| command should call three commands,
% |\set@p@emtitle|, to set the title in the main text and make the
% label for use by the contents and notes sections, |\c@ntentsinfo| to
% set the title in the table of contents, and |\t@xtnotesinfo|, which
% sets the title in the notes sections. (You should enclose the whole thing
% between |\makeatletter| and |\makeatother|.)
%
%\DescribeMacro{\set@p@emtitle}
% |\set@p@emtitle|
% takes six arguments, which are, in order, (1) the title (which, if
% you are calling this command inside of the definition of |\mytitle|
% should just be |#1|), (2) commands to be issued before setting the
% title (minimally, a penalty, such as |\poemtitlepenalty|), (3) the
% font size in which the title is to be set in the text (such as
% |\poemtitlefont| or |\large|), (4) any indentation of the title
% (|\relax| for |\poemtitle|, or |\titleindent| for
% |\sequencesectiontitle|), (5) commands to be issued after the
% title is set (such as |\afterpoemtitleskip|) and (6) the amount
% overrun lines in the title should be indented.
%
%\DescribeMacro{\c@ntentsinfo}
%|\c@ntentsinfo| takes
% four arguments, which are, in order, (1) the title, (2) the
% indentation of the title in the table of contents (such as
% |\contentsindentone|), (3), the font size in which the title
% should be set (such as |\contentspoemtitlefont|) and (4) the amount
% overrun lines in the table of contents should be indented (such as
% |\contentsindenttwoamount|).
%
% \DescribeMacro{\t@xtnotesinfo}
% |\t@xtnotesinfo|
% takes one argument, the title.
%
% So, for example, to create a new kind of title called |\mytitle| which looks
% just like |\poemtitle|, issue
% \begin{verbatim}
% \makeatletter
% \newcommand{\mytitle}[1]{%
% \set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
% {\relax}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
% \c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentone}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
% {\contentsindenttwoamount}%
% \t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
% }
% \makeatother
% \end{verbatim}
%
% (The |\z@| which is the sixth argument to |\set@p@emtitle| above is
% a constant set to zero. You will also notice that I became completely hysterical
% on the subject of preventing a page break after a poem title.)
% By default, \textsf{poemscol}
% does not indent the overrun portion of titles relative to the first
% line of the title, but if that first line is indented will set the
% overrun portions to be indented the same amount. Overrun portions
% of titles in the table of contents will be indented by one
% |\contentsindentamount| more than the first line is indented. Both
% of these behaviors can be changed by changing the arguments to
% |\set@p@emtitle| or |\c@ntentsinfo|.
%
%\DescribeMacro{\firstlinesettings}
%\DescribeMacro{\middlelinesettings}
%\DescribeMacro{\lastlinesettings}
%\DescribeMacro{\restoresinglelinesettings}
% If you wish to design a title which might have multiple lines,
% and you wish to specify how those lines are broken up, you
% will need to write three commands: one for the first line, one for
% middle lines, and one for the last lines.
% (This only matters if you care how the title is broken up. You
% can choose to let \LaTeX\ do the breaking if you wish.) Before issuing
% |\set@p@emtitle| issue |\firstlinesettings|, |\middlelinesettings|,
% or |\lastlinesettings| (as the case may require). And issue
% |\restoresinglelinesettings| last of all in each of your three
% commands. The lines will be broken in the table of contents and in
% the body of the text in the same way, but will be run in in the
% notes sections.
%
% \subsection{~Customizing indentations in titles in the text body}\label{customtitleindentations}
% Titles of poems, subtitles, titles of sequences, sections of sequences (and subsections and so on),
% appear in the text with a hierarchy of indentations. If you want to change anything
% about these indentations, you don't need to modify the various title-setting commands, but only to
% change the length of the relevant indentation command. I
% have given the indentations for each class of title a defined length, which you can change
% by changing the definition of the indentation command. (e.g.
% |\renewcommand{\poemtitleindent}{\hspace{3em}}.)| For many of these
% indentations you can also simply change the applicable length (e.g.
% |\setlength{\sequencesubtitleindentmount}{\titleindenttwoamount}|. )
%
% The ``amount'' part in the command
% is important. |\poemtitleindentamount| is a length. On the other
% hand, |\sequencesectiontitleindentindent| is a command, defined
% defined as\\
% |\hspace{\sequencesectiontitleindenttitleindentamount}|. \\
% The table lists all the commands for these
% indentations. In the table ``Extra Lines'' refers to the indentation for the second and third lines
% (and so on) of multi-line titles. If you wish to change the
% indentation of any of the titles whose default length is listed as
% 0 in the table, you must use the |\renewcommand| method. (I
% found that setting the length of one of the indentations to 0pt
% added a few points of white space I could not figure out how to get
% rid of, so by default those commands are defined not by using a
% length but by, for example, |\newcommand{\poemtitleindent}{\relax}|.)
%
%\begin{table}[t]
%\caption{Indentations in Titles}
%\bigskip
%{\scriptsize
%\begin{tabular}{l l l}
%\hline
%Entity Title & Indentation & Default Length\\
%\hline
%Volume & |\volumetitleindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Extra Lines & |\volumetitlesecondlineindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Volume Subtitle & |\volumesubtitleindentamount| & |\titleindentamount| (1pc)\\
%Extra Lines & |\volumesubtitlesecondlineindentamount| & |\titleindentamount| \\
%Volume Section & |\volumesectiontitleindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Extra Lines & |\volumesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Poem & |\poemtitleindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Extra Lines & |\poemtitlesecondlineindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Poem Subtitle & |\poemsubtitleindentamount| & |\titleindentamount| \\
%Poem Section & |\poemsectiontitleindentamount| & |\titleindentamount| \\
%Extra Lines & |\poemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount| & |\titleindentamount| \\
%Poem Subsection & |\poemsubsectiontitleindentamount| & | \titleindenttwoamount| \\
%Sequence & |\sequencetitleindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Extra Lines & |\sequencetitlesecondlineindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Sequence Subtitle & |\sequencesubtitleindent | & |\titleindentamount| \\
%Extra Lines & |\sequencesubtitlesecondlineindentamount| & |\titleindentamount| \\
%Sequence Section & |\sequencesectiontitleindentamount| & |\titleindentamount| \\
%Extra Lines & |\sequencesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount| & |\titleindentamount| \\
%Sequence Section Subtitle & |\sequencesectionsubtitleindentamount| & |\titleindenttwoamount| \\
%Extra Lines & |\sequencesectionsubtitlesecondlineindentamount| & |\titleindenttwoamount| \\
%Sequence Subsection & |\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount| & |\titleindenttwoamount| \\
%Sequence Subsubsection & |\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindentamount| & |\titleindentathreeamount| \\
%Appendix & |\appendixtitleindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%SubAppendix & |\subappendixtitleindentamount| & |\titleindentamount| \\
%Foreword & |\forewordtitleindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Notes Sections & |\notestitleindentamount| & |0pt|
%\end{tabular}}
%\end{table}
%
% \subsection{~Customizing indentations in titles in the Contents}\label{contentsindentations}
% There is also a hierarchy of indentations for titles in the Table of Contents. Again,
% to change the indentations in the Contents, you don't need to redefine the title-setting
% commands, only to change the value of the relevant length. The table shows the hierarchy
% of indentations in the Table of Contents:
%
%\begin{table}[t]
%\caption{Indentations in Contents}
%\bigskip
%{\scriptsize
%\begin{tabular}{l l l}
%\hline
%Entity Title & Indentation & Default Length\\
%\hline
%Volume & |\contentsvolumetitleindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Extra Lines & |\contentsvolumetitlesecondlineindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Volume Subtitle & |\contentsvolumesubtitleindentamount| & |\contentsindentoneamount| (24pt)\\
%Extra Lines & |\contentsvolumesubtitlesecondlineindentamount| & |\contentsindentoneamount| \\
%Volume Section & |\contentsvolumesectiontitleindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Extra Lines & |\contentsvolumesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Poem & |\contentspoemtitleindentamount| & |\contentsindentoneamount| \\
%Extra Lines & |\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindentamount| & |\contentsindentoneamount| \\
%Poem Section & |\contentspoemsectiontitleindentamount| & |\contentsindenttwoamount| \\
%Extra Lines & |\poemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount| & |\contentsindenttwoamount| \\
%Sequence & |\contentssequencetitleindentamount| & |\contentsindentoneamount|\ \\
%Extra Lines & |\contentssequencetitlesecondlineindentamount| & |\contentsindentoneamount| \\
%Sequence Section & |\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount| & |\contentsindenttwoamount| \\
%Extra Lines & |\contentssequencesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount| & |\contentsindenttwoamount| \\
%Sequence Subsection & |\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindentamount| & |\contentsindentthreeamount| \\
% Sequnce Subsubsection & Does not appear in Contents & \\
%Appendix or Foreword & |\contentsappendixtitleindentamount| & |0pt| \\
%Notes Sections & |\contentsnotestitleindentamount| & |0pt|
%
%\end{tabular}}
%\end{table}
%
% \subsection{~Visual formatting}
% \DescribeMacro{\longpage}
% \DescribeMacro{\shortpage}
% \label{longpage}
% The ideal in \LaTeX\ is to separate
% content markup and formatting as completely as possible. In the text
% itself you simply mark the logical units (a poem, a title, a stanza,
% a textual note), and a header program (like \textsf{poemscol}) interprets the
% meaning of those terms typographically. However, one still winds up
% having to do some visual formatting. Especially in prose sections,
% such as in the textual notes, you will sometimes have to enlarge or
% shrink a page by one line in order to avoid an intractable widow or
% club line, and when one does so one must be careful to do the same to
% the other member of the two-page spread of which that page is a part
% so that the spread will be properly balanced.
% These commands enable one to wiggle pagelength enough to handle these
% problems. Since verse sections should be set with |\raggedbottom|
% in effect, the commands are not necessary in verse sections.
%
% |\longpage| and |\shortpage| are cumulative: issuing |\longpage| twice lengthens the
% page by two lines, and issuing |\shortpage| twice shortens the page by two lines.
%
% \section{Customizing page geometry and page styles}
%
%
% \subsection{~Font sizes, skips, sinks, indents, and penalties}
%
% \label{changingfontsandleading}
% \textsf{poemscol} sets the font sizes, but not the typeface, of
% fonts for many common tasks, in order to create a hierarchy of
% sizes. They can be changed with a |\renewcommand| of the following
% form, where the first number is the font size in points and the
% second is the leading:\\
% |\renewcommand{\volumetitlefont}{\fontsize{18}{23}\selectfont}|
%
%
% The following table gives the default values for the fonts. The titles of
% the fonts give their uses. Backmatterheaderfont is for setting the
% titles of back matter sections. Sequence section titles use
% poemtitlefont. Backmattertext font is |\small|, backmatterintrofont
% is |\normalsize|.
% \bigskip
%
% \begin{tabular}{l l l}
% \textbf{Font} & \textbf{Size} & \textbf{Leading} \\
% volumetitlefont & 18 & 23 \\
% volumesubtitlefont & 14 & 18 \\
% poemtitlefont & 14 & 18 \\
% sequencetitlefont & 16 & 20 \\
% subsectiontitlefont & 12 & 14.5 \\
% backmatterheaderfont & 16 & 20 \\
% backmattervolumefont & 12 & 14.5 \\
% backmattervolumesubtitlefont & 11 & 13 \\
% contentsvolumefont & 13 & 20 \\
% contentsvolumesubtitlefont & 12 & 14.5 \\
% contentssequencetitlefont & 10 & 14 \\
% contentspoemtitlefont & 10 & 14 \\
% \end{tabular}
%
% \bigskip
%
% The following table gives various skips, sinks, penalties, and indentations. The
% titles of these should be self-explanatory. These should be changed
% with |\renewcommand| as follows:\\
% |\renewcommand{\volumetitlesink}{\leavevmode\vspace{23.5pt}}|
% \bigskip
%
% \begin{tabular}{l l l}
% \textbf{Name} & \textbf{Argument} & \textbf{Comment} \\
% backmattersink & 21.5pt & \relax \\
% backmatterafterheadersink & 11pt& \relax \\
% afterpoemtitleskip & |\smallskip| & \relax \\
% afterpoemskip & |\bigskip| & \relax \\
% aftersequencetitleskip & |\medskip| & \relax \\
% stanzaskip & |\medskip| & Extra skip between stanzas \\
% titleindent & |\titleindentamount| (1pc) & use |\setlength| to
% change \\
% parindent & |\titleindentamount| & \relax \\
% volumetitleshift & |\volumetitleshiftamount| (1pc) & use |\setlength| to
% change \\
% contentsindentone & 24pt & \relax \\
% contentsindenttwo & 42pt & \relax \\
% contentsindentthree & 60pt & \relax \\
% contentsindentfour & 72pt & \relax \\
% runoverindentvalue & 6em & for runover lines in verse\\
% verseindent & 2em & for formally indented lines\\
% notesclubpoempenalty & -300 & \relax \\
% notessequenceclubpenalty & -1500 & \relax \\
% notesvolumetitlepenalty & -1500 & \relax \\
% epigraphquoteleftmargin & 1.5em & for epigraphs, attributions, etc.\\
% epigraphquoterightmargin & 1.5em & \relax \\
% \end{tabular}
%
% \subsection{~Customizing page styles}
% \textsf{poemscol} sets several default page styles, defined
% below. The main page style is ``fancy,'' which is used for
%the main body of the poetry,
% prose frontmatter (such as introductions), and the endnotes sections.
% ``Volumefirststyle'' is for the
% first page of a volume of poems. ``Volumetitlestyle'' is for the
% title page of a volume of poems. The external file for the table of
% contents redefines ``fancy,'' so you should issue |\resetpagestyle|
% after issuing |\putpoemcontents|. |\resetpagestyle| resets the page
% style to ``main'' (which is the same as the original ``fancy'').
%
% Because |\putpoemcontents| resets the page style to ``main,'' any page style you defined
% in the preamble becomes forgotten if you include a table of contents. There are two
% possible solutions to this. The first is to define your page style after you have issued
% |\putpoemcontents|. The second is to redefine the fancypage style ``main,'' so that it does
% what you want. In either case, do not forget to issue |\pagenumbering{arabic}|
% after |\putpoemcontents|, else all of your page numbers will be in roman numerals.
% You can find the default
% definitions of those ``fancy'' and ``main'' below at \ref{pagestyledefs}, page \pageref{pagestyledefs}.
%
%\begin{sloppypar}
% You can change the text in the left (verso) running head
% by issuing |\leftheader{your header}| or |\volumeheader{your header}|. (The commands
% are synonyms.) You can change the text in the right (recto) running head by issuing
% |\rightheader{your header}|. \end{sloppypar}
%
% \subsection{~Special page style for long poems} The fancy page style ``longpoem''
% will add information of the form ``firstline--lastline'' to the running header. This
% page style otherwise resembles ``main,'' and ``fancy.''
% Issue |\pagestyle{longpoem}| to use this page style. If you use ``longpoem,'' be sure to
% call \textsf{etex} and \textsf{emarks} in your preamble. Also, when a poem ends, be sure
% to issue |\newpage|, otherwise the running header will list the first line on the page from the
% first poem and the last line on the page from the second poem.
%
% If you use ``longpoem'' and you have a table of contents, you must issue
% |\pagestyle{longpoem}| at some point \emph{after} issuing |\putpoemcontents|.
% Do not forget to issue |\pagenumbering{arabic}|
% after |\putpoemcontents|, else all of your page numbers will be in roman numerals. Also, if you
% have back matter, you must issue |\pagestyle{main}| at the end of your poetry section,
% before the back matter starts, since otherwise your header will include the last line
% number \textsf{poemscol} saw. Issuing |\pagestyle{main}| will restore the normal page
% headers for the backmatter
% sections.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% The header will include the abbreviation l.\ (for a single line) or ll.\ (for a range of lines).
% You can change either abbreviation with |\changesinglelineabbrev| or
% |\changemultiplelineabbrev|. So, for instance, to get rid of the abbreviations
% entirely, issue |\changemultiplelineabbrev{\relax}| and |\changesinglelineabbrev{\relax}|.
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% You may need to play with |\leftheader| and |\rightheader| to get the information you
% want into the header. You might, for instance, what to use something like
% |\leftheader{``Your main title'' \hfil ``Your poem title''}| and
% |\rightheader{``Your volume title'' \hfil ``Your poem title''}|. Whatever else you put into
% the header, the last thing should be your poem title, since it will be followed by the line
% numbers.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \subsection{~Page geometry and type leading}
%
% You have to give geometry the values that suit you. I include the
% values I used in my own book, just to give you a starting place.
% The default values for marginparsep and
% marginparwidth are different now (18pt and 18pt respectively). With
% that warning, here is a list of the values I used:
%
% \bigskip
%
% \begin{tabular}{l l}
% textheight&6.75in\\
% marginparsep&18pt\\
% marginparwidth&18pt\\
% headheight& 14pt\\
% paperwidth&6in\\
% paperheight& 9in\\
% inner&4.5pc\\
% outer&4.5pc\\
% footskip&15pt\\
% \end{tabular}
%
%\bigskip
%
%%
% In my own book I also, strictly to save money, and at the price of
% some ugliness, changed the definition of |\normalsize| and |\small|,
% so that the former was 10 pt type on 11 pt leading (rather than 12
% pt), and that the latter was 9 pt type on 10 pt leading. You can
% reproduce this setting by issuing |\tightleading|, although I would
% advise not doing so unless you are under financial constraints.
%
% \section{Prose Sections with line numbers} \label{prosesections}
% \subsection{Setup}
%\textsf{poemscol}
% uses the \textsf{lineno} package to make marginal line numbers for
% prose sections such as the Author's Introduction, Afterword,
% Author's Notes, or such prose interludes or prose poems the volume
% may include. To control the appearance, placement, and frequency of
% marginal line numbers in prose sections, you may wish to consult the
% manual to \textsf{lineno}. I have added a minimal user interface to
% make \textsf{lineno} cohere with poemscol. You may have to fiddle
% with the parameters of both \textsf{poemscol} and \textsf{lineno} to
% persuade them to set marginal line numbers that look the same way in
% prose and verse contexts. The default values should work as is.
%
% Line numbers in prose sections are placed using a different
% |\length| from that used in verse sections. Essentially, verse
% sections, and prose sections which use paragraph and sentence
% numbering --- see below, in section \ref{paragraphsentence} ---
% place the marginal line numbers using |\marginparsep|. Prose
% sections which are numbered by line use |\linenumbersep| instead,
% which is a length defined in the \textsf{lineno} package. I have
% given values for both lengths which seem to place line numbers on
% the left and on the right side in prose sections roughly where they
% are placed in verse sections. You can change these values with
% |\setcounter{countername}{length}|.
%
% |\verselinenumberstoleft| and |\verselinenumberstoright| also place
% the line numbers to the left or to the right, respectively, in prose
% sections. If you wish the numbering to appear on a different side
% in prose contexts you can set the side by issuing |\leftlinenumbers|
% or |\rightlinenumbers|. These last are commands from the
% \textsf{lineno} package. The two forms in which line numbers switch
% sides in prose contexts can't at the moment be used, because of a
% clash between how \textsf{lineno} handles line numbers that switch
% sides and the way I pass the line numbers to notes sections. If you
% have set the verse line numbers to switch sides, prose line numbers
% will appear on the right side. I hope soon to find a workaround for
% this problem.
%
% By default, the line modulo for prose sections is the same as that for
% verse sections; if you have a line number every 5 lines in verse,
% you will have the same in prose. You can set the prose line modulo
% independently with |\setprosemodulo|.
%
% \textsf{poemscol} may deal with rather long stretches of prose, but
% it is not designed to be used for critical editions of extended
% prose texts, as \texttt{EDMAC}, \textsf{reledmac}, or \textsf{ednotes}
% are. The method of entering line ranges into notes in prose
% contexts is something of a hack, and rather a worse one than the one
% employed in verse contexts, since it involves using two labels for
% each note, one to capture the line number of the beginning, the
% other to capture the line number of the end. Other limitations of
% this method may show up with longer prose extracts.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\prosesectiontitle} Prose sections may be titled with
% |\prosesectiontitle| which is essentially just |\poemtitle|, or
% |\prosesectiontitlenotitle|, which is essentially just
% |\poemtitlenotitle|. (Remember that if you use the latter command,
% you must specify a ``dummy'' title to use in the note and contents
% sections.) They will be formatted in the notes and contents
% sections as poems are. Alternatively, you can use
% the commands for defining new kinds of titles, in section
% \ref{customizing titles}, page \pageref{customizing titles},
% to make new kinds of titles for prose sections.
%
%\DescribeMacro{prosesection}
% Prose sections should be enclosed in a |prosesection| environment
% (between |\begin{prosesection}| and |\end{prosesection}|). Entering
% this environment sets the modulo repeat for line numbering to the
% same value that prevails in verse contexts, and resets the prose
% line number to zero. If for some reason you do not wish to reset
% the line number but continue on from where it left off at the end of
% the last prose section, use the |prosesectionnoreset| environment
% instead.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\setprosemodulo}
% If you wish to set the modulo repeat for line numbering in prose to
% some value different for that from verse contexts, issue the new
% modulo as the argument to |\setprosemodulo|.
%
% It is possible, if a prose section is interpolated in the midst of
% verse, to number the prose and verse continuously. To move from a
% verse passage to a prose passage, just before the |\end{poem}| at
% the end of the first verse passage issue |\saveverselinenumber| to
% save the number of the verse passage. After you issue
% |\begin{prosesection}| issue
% |\resetlinenumber[\theverselineumberscratch]| to apply that number
% to the prose section. To number continuously while moving from
% prose to verse is more tricky. One way might be to mark a label at
% the end of the prose passage with |\proselinelabel{prose end label}|
% (or some other suitably unique label). This label will record the
% line number of the last prose line. Pass that value to
% |\restoreverselinenumber| by issuing
% |\setcounterfromref{verselinenumberscratch}{prose end label}|. Then
% issue |\restoreverselinenumber| just after issuing the
% |\begin{poem}| that restarts the verse again. I would recommend
% against numbering verse and prose continuously, however, since a
% verse line and a prose line are different categories of thing, the
% one being an element of prosody, the other being only an element of
% typography.
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\proselinelabel}
% |\proselinelabel| is simply |\linelabel| from \textsf{lineno}. I
% have provided the new name to make it easy to distinguish from
% |\poemlinelabel|.
%
%
% \subsection{Endnotes for prose sections}
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\prosetextnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\prosemendation}
% \DescribeMacro{\proseexplanatory}
% Special versions of |\textnote|, |\emendation| and |\explanatory|
% are available for use in prose sections. |\prosetextnote|,
% |\proseemendation|, and |\proseexplanatory| differ from the verse
% versions in that they each require an extra argument, a unique label
% to be used in locating the line number for use by the notes
% commands. If |\maketextnotes|, |\makeemendations|, or
% |\makeexplanatorynotes| have been issued, the endnotes will be sent
% to the usual sections, where all the notes from that prose section
% will be grouped into a paragraph, with the entry headed by the title
% given by |\prosesectiontitle|, just as if that were the title of a
% poem. |\textnotesatfoot|, |\emendationsatfoot|, and
% |\explanationsatfoot| will send the notes from prose contexts to the
% usual footnote levels. Notes commands in prose contexts take three
% arguments. As in verse sections, in prose sections textnotes,
% explanatory notes, and emendations have an optional first argument
% for recording line ranges. As in verse sections, you can record
% these line ranges either by simply putting in the argument how many
% lines the lemma will refer to (a deprecated method retained for
% backward compatibility reasons), or the argument of a
% |\proselinelabel| command on the last line of the lemma. (The only
% difference from the verse version here is that you should make the
% label using the |\proselinelabel| command, rather than with the
% |\poemlinelabel| command.) The second argument is a label to
% identify each note uniquely, which is used to find the line number
% at which the note begins. You will need a different label for
% every note. The third argument is the text of the note, which
% should include both the lemma and the rest of the note, as in the
% notes for verse sections.
% |\proseemendation| and
% |\proseexplanatory| are coded the same way. So, if you wished
% to make a textual note on a passage that begins with ``Call me
% Ishmael.'' and ends ``a way of driving away the spleen,'' you would
% issue at the point where the note is to
% occur (at the beginning of the passage):
% \begin{verbatim}
% \prosetextnote[a way of driving away the spleen] {Call me Ishmael}
% {Call me Ishmael \ldots\ a way of driving away the spleen] text of
% textual note} \end{verbatim} On the
% last line of the passage to which the note refers you would
% issue: \\ |\proselinelabel{a way of driving away the spleen}|.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\prosetsvariant}
% \DescribeMacro{\proseaccidental}
% \DescribeMacro{\prosetsaccidental}
% You can issue |\sources| and |\tsentry| in prose contexts as usual.
% For typescript variants and accidental variants you need to issue
% |\prosetsvariant|, |\proseaccidental|, and
% |\prosetsaccidental|. |\prosetsvariant| is entered just as
% |\prosetextnote| is, with an optional argument (for use with
% line ranges, as usual), and two mandatory arguments (the first a
% label to capture the line number, the second the lemma and comment).
%
% |\proseaccidental| and |\prosetsaccidental| take only the two
% mandatory arguments, since by definition an accidental variant is
% confined to one line.
%
% One caveat: because the line numbers for notes in prose contexts
% are generated by a label/ref mechanism, each note will result in a
% complaint about an undefined reference the first time the file is run through
% \LaTeX. Either run the first pass in quiet mode, or be prepared to
% ignore a lot of griping until
% \LaTeX\ has generated the .aux file at the end of the first run.
%
% \section{Paragraph and sentence annotation}\label{paragraphsentence}
% \subsection{~Setup}
% Annotating a prose section by sentence number, or by paragraph number and
% sentence number, has some advantages over annotating it by line
% number. The principal advantage is that the annotation and reference
% system can remain stable over multiple editions, even if they are set
% in different formats. The most familiar of such systems is the
% chapter and verse system in the Bible, introduced by Archbishop
% Stephen Langton in the thirteenth century (who divided the Vulgate
% edition into numbered chapters) and by Robert Estienne in the
% sixteenth century (who added the verse numbers). Such a form of
% annotation might be especially useful for medieval prosimetra, a form
% combining verse and prose. (Hence the commands that follow often
% begin with |pm|.)
%
% \DescribeMacro{pmsection}
% You should put prose marked up for sentence and paragraph
% annotation in a |pmsection| environment.
% You do not need to put prose marked up for sentence and paragraph
% annotation in a |prosesection| environment. That environment is
% only needed if you are line-numbering prose. You also do not need
% to load the \textsf{lineno} package if you are using the sentence
% and paragraph system for annotating prose. You might, however,
% still wish to set the title with |\prosesectiontitle|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\setprosebysentence}
% |\setprosebysentence| sets \textsf{poemscol} to number prose by
% sentence rather than by line number. This command is mostly a
% placeholder now, used only for setting the value of |\marginparsep|
% to something better for prose. (|\marginparsep| sets how far the
% line numbers are from the text block.) |\verselinenumberstoleft|,
% |\verselinenumberstoright|, and |\verselinenumbersswitch| each pick
% convenient values for |\marginparsep|. By default these values all
% line up on the page, but if you change any of them, you may have to
% use reset |\marginparsep| to some value you will have to find by
% trial and error, since they each use |\marginparsep| in slightly
% different ways. You can change |\marginparsep| either by using
% |\setlength{\marginparsep}{length}| or, better, by using
% |\renewcommand| to change the setting of |\marginparsep| in
% |\verselinenumberstoleft| or whatever else you intend to use. Adjust
% |\headoffsetlength| to make the page numbers line up with the line numbers.
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pmsentence} Each sentence must begin with
% |\pmsentence|. |\pmsentence| increments the sentence counter,
% optionally puts the sentence number in the running text, and
% optionally puts the sentence number in the margin.
%
% |\runningsentencenumberstrue|
% sets sentence
% numbers in the running text.
% To set sentence numbers in the margin, issue
% |\marginsentencenumberstrue|. You can issue both, either, or neither of
% these commands.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\setpmmodulo} If you are putting sentence numbers in
% the margin, you need not number every sentence. Indeed, if there is
% more than one sentence on a line, the numbers will overwrite each
% other (unless you use the marn.sty package, and substitute |\marn|
% for |\pmclrightsidepar|, |\pmclleftsidepar| or |\pmclsidepar| in the
% code for |\pmsentence|). You can also avoid overlapping sentence
% numbers by using |\pmsentencetwo| and its siblings, defined below.
% You can set the modulo for sentence marginal numbers by issuing
% |\setpmmodulo|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pmsentencetwo}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmsentencethree}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmsentencefour} If you know, from a prior run,
% that there will be a second or third sentence on some particular
% line, marking them with these commmands will ensure that the
% marginal sentence numbers do not overwrite each other. These commands
% are something of a kludge, but they will do until I figure out how
% to do this better.\newpage
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pmnumberstoright}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmnumberstoleft}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmnumbersgutter}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmnumbersouter}
% If you wish to control the
% margin in which sentence and paragraph numbers appear, issue
% |\pmnumbersright|, |\pmnumbersleft|, |\pmnumbersgutter|, or
% |\pmnumbersouter|. By default, these numbers will line up with the
% line numbers in verse sections. If you change the value of
% |\marginparsep| for prose sections from those used by their verse
% equivalents, it is a good idea to issue the verse equivalent command
% (|\versenumberstoright| or whatever) again when you move from a
% prose to a verse environment.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% |\runningsentencenumberformat| sets the format of running sentence
% numbers. Currently it is |\textsuperscript| (the numbers are set as superscripts) and |\tiny|.
% The format of marginal sentence
% numbers is set by |\marginsentencenumberformat|. Currently it is
% |\tiny|. Definitions of both commands are found at section \ref{runningsentencenumberformat},
% page \pageref{runningsentencenumberformat}. You can change either with |\renewcommmand|.
%\end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pmpara}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmsentencebypara}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmsparainmartrue}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmpararunningtrue}
% You can also number paragraphs. Each paragraph must begin with
% |\pmpara|. |\pmpara| increments the paragraph counter, optionally
% puts the paragraph number in the running text, and optionally puts
% the paragraph number in the margin. To reset the sentence counter
% at the beginning of each paragraph, issue |\pmsentencebyparatrue| in
% your preamble. To set paragraph numbers in the margin, issue
% |\pmparainmartrue|. To set paragraph numbers in the running text,
% issue |\pmpararunningtrue|. You can issue both, either, or neither of
% these last two commands. Which margin these numbers are set in
% is controlled by the same commands that control placement of
% marginal sentence numbers.
%
% If you begin a paragraph with |\pmpara| \textsf{poemscol} will
% assume that you intend to include the paragraph number in your
% notes (in the form \textless \emph{paragraph
% number}\textgreater:\textless \emph{sentence number}\textgreater\ for simple
% references, or \textless \emph{first paragraph
% number}\textgreater:\textless \emph{first sentence number}\textgreater\ --
% \textless \emph{lastparagraph
% number}\textgreater:\textless \emph{last sentence number}\textgreater\
% for ranges of sentences) even if you do not reset
% the sentence number at the beginning of each paragraph. Normally
% you would not issue |\pmpara| if you are not resetting the sentence
% number at the beginning of each paragraph, since under those
% circumstances you don't really need to keep track of the paragraph
% numbers, in which case each note would simply include the sentence
% number (just as in verse it would include the line number). In the
% unusual event in which you wish to put the paragraph number in the
% margin but refer only to sentence numbers in the notes, simply
% follow every use of |\pmpara| with |\pmparasfalse|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\pmpararunningformat}\DescribeMacro{\pmparmarformat}
% The format of running paragraph numbers is set
% by |\pmpararunningformat|. Currently it is
% |\textbf| and |\small|.
% The format of marginal paragraph numbers is set by
% |\pmparmarformat|. Currently it is
% |\textbf| and |\small|. The definitions of these commands are found at
% section \ref{pmparrunningformat}, page \pageref{pmparrunningformat}, Either can
% be changed with |\renewcommand|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\ifsupressfirstpara}
% \DescribeMacro{\ifsuppressfirstsentence}
% Some readers find it annoying to have the first sentence or the first paragraph marked.
% To suppress the appearance of the first sentence number, whether in the margin or in the
% running text, issue |\suppressfirstsentencetrue|. To suppress the appearance of the
% first paragraph number, whether in the margin or in the running text, issue |\suppressfirstparatrue|.
% These commands will not affect the appearance of entries in the endnote
% sections or in the footnotes.
%
% \subsection{~Cross references by sentence and paragraph}
% \DescribeMacro{\sentencelabel}
% To make labels that refer to sentences or paragraphs, issue
% |\sentencelabel|. The label will be either both the paragraph
% number and the sentence number (if you are resetting sentence numbers
% by paragraph), or only the sentence number (if you are not resetting
% sentence numbers by paragraph).
%
% \subsection{~End notes by sentence and paragraph}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmtextnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmexplanatory}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmemendation}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmaccidental}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmtsvariant}
% \DescribeMacro{\pmtsaccidental}
% |\pmtextnote|, |\pmexplanatory|, |\pmemendation|, |\pmaccidental|,
% |\pmtsvariant| and |\pmtsaccidental| are special versions of the
% usual endnote commands for use with annotations by sentence and
% paragraph. If you have not issued |\pmsentencebypara| these
% commands will write the sentence number at the head of each note,
% where the line number would usually go. If you have issued
% |\pmsentencebypara|, these commands will issue both the paragraph
% and sentence number, in the format \textless \emph{paragraph
% number}\textgreater:\textless \emph{sentence number}\textgreater. You can
% refer to ranges of sentences (or paragraphs and sentences) in a way
% very similar to how you do so in verse sections. At the end of the
% range, issue a |\sentencelabel| command, with a unique label. At
% the beginning of the range, issue your |\pmtextnote| command with the
% optional argument in square brackets before the main argument,
% giving your unique label as the value of that argument, e.g.
% |\pmtextnote[some label]{text of lemma] comment}|. At the end of
% your range, issue |\sentencelabel{some label}|, using the same
% label you put in the square brackets for the |\pmtextnote|. If you have not
% issued |\pmsentencebypara|, the range will simply be the range of
% sentence numbers. If you have issued |\pmsentencebypara|, the range
% will include paragraph and sentence numbers, like this:
%\textless \emph{first paragraph
% number}\textgreater:\textless \emph{first sentence number}\textgreater\ --
% \textless \emph{lastparagraph
% number}\textgreater:\textless \emph{last sentence number}\textgreater, for example:
% 4:12--6:13.\end{sloppypar}
%
% |\sources| needs no special handling if you are annotating by
% sentence and paragraph.
%
% \subsection{~Footnotes by sentence and paragraph}
% |\textnoteatfoot| shifts |\pmtextnotes| to the foot, as with
% |\prosetextnote|. |\emendationsatfoot| and |\explanationsatfoot|
% work the same way.
% \subsection{~Bible chapter and verse}
% Since |\pmsentence| and |\pmpara| are the moral equivalents of bible
% verse and chapter, |\biblechapter| and |\bibleverse| are provided
% for convenience.
% \section{Parallel text editions} \label{parallelhack}
% \subsection{~Setup for parallel texts in verse}
% \textsf{poemscol} can make parallel
% text editions in which the contrasting versions are set on facing
% verso and recto pages. \textsf{poemscol} does not automatically provide the page
% breaks for parallel editions, and even if it did, one would still
% probably have to specify page breaks every two or three pages to keep
% the texts in register anyway, so you will have to use |\newpage|
% to mark every page break. If you are willing to set the page breaks
% yourself, however, \textsf{poemscol} does provide commands for keeping the line count
% correct on successive recto or verso pages, and for keeping track of
% whether or not one was in the middle of a stanza when one closed the
% previous verso or recto page (as the case may be). And it provides, in
% the |\synchrolabel| and |\synchroref| commands, a way of marking which
% lines on the recto side correspond to particular lines on the verso
% side. |\synchroref| will even tag the marginal line number it makes
% with a marker to specify the text to which it refers.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\startparalleltexts}
% \DescribeMacro{\finishparalleltexts}
% \DescribeEnv{parallelverse}
% You must begin a region of parallel text on a \emph{verso} page.
% A parallel text region must begin with
% |\startparalleltexts| and end with |\finishparalleltexts|.
% Setting parallel texts requires one to redefine the poem and stanza
% environments, and |\startparalleltexts| redefines those environments.
% You can make those changes local to the parallel text region by using
% |\begin{parallelverse}| and |\end{parallelverse}| rather than |\startparalleltexts|
% and |\finishparalleltexts|.
% |\startparalleltexts| and |\finishparalleltexts| can be issued on their own
% but I have combined them to make the |parallelverse| environment. \end{sloppypar}
%
% Although usually with \textsf{poemscol} it is up to you where to put
% the marginal line numbers, when you issue |\startparalleltexts| the
% positions are fixed as follows: marginal line numbers are in the left
% margin, line cross references (marking which lines in the recto text
% correspond to which lines in the verso text, which
% are made with |\synchroref|) are in the right margin.
%
%\begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\startrectopage}
% \DescribeMacro{\finishrectopage}
% \DescribeMacro{\startversopage}
% \DescribeMacro{\finishversopage}
% Verso pages
% should begin with |\startversopage| and end with |\finishversopage|.
% Recto pages should begin with |\startrectopage| and end with
% |\finishrectopage|. You have to declare the page breaks manually,
% so be sure you are putting the |\finishversopage| or |\finishrectopage| commands
% in places which
% will work. |\finishparalleltexts| just makes certain that stanzas, and poems,
% that you opened in a region of parallel texts are closed when you leave it.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\versopoemtitle}
% \DescribeMacro{\rectopoemtitle}
% \DescribeMacro{\versopoemtitlenocontents}
% \DescribeMacro{\rectopoemtitlenocontents}
% Use |\versopoemtitle| and |\rectopoemtitle|
% rather than |\poemtitle| for the title of the poem (or prose passage)
% on the verso or recto pages.
% if you are making a parallel text of Wordsworth's 1805 and 1850
% versions of \emph{The Prelude}, you might want to use something
% like |\versopoemtitle{The Prelude (1805 Version)}| and
% |\rectopoemtitle{The Prelude (1850 Version)}|.
% I have also made versions of these commands that do not make
% entries in the table of contents, should the need arise for them.
% If you wish to make titles for other things,
% such as poetic sequences or sequence sections, you can use the techniques
% described in section \ref{customizing titles} above, page \pageref{customizing titles},
% except substitute the command |\versoset@p@emtitle|
% or |\rectoset@p@emtitle| for |\set@p@emtitle|, using
% all the same arguments you would have used with |\set@p@emtitle|.
%
%\subsection{~Parallel texts and on the fly note types}
% If you are making a parallel text edition, you may need to
% use |\definenewnotetype| to make the different kinds of endnote
% for the parallel texts. For instance,
% if you are making a parallel text of Wordsworth's 1805 and 1850
% versions of \emph{The Prelude}, you may use something like |\fiveexplanatory|
% and |\fiftyexplanatory| for explanatory notes for the poems on the verso
% and recto pages.
%
%
% \DescribeMacro{\keeptitlestraight}
% Without special care, \textsf{poemscol} may become
% confused about whether it has seen, for example, a |\fiveexplanatory| for
% a particular book of \emph{The Prelude} or not, and, if |\settitleinnotes| is set,
% may neglect to put the
% title of that book of \emph{The Prelude} in the notes
% for the first note for that book. To remedy this, |\versopoemtitle|
% and |\rectopoemtitle| set up a way of keeping track whether each species
% of note has appeared already or not.
% While setting parallel texts \textsf{poemscol} checks at the beginning of every
% verso or recto page whether the the different species of endnote for the poem on
% that page has appeared before. On rare occasions this turns out not to be frequently
% enough in cases
% where you are defining your own kinds of endnote.
% In this case, the following hack, |\keeptitlesstraight|, will check whether the verso or recto
% poem has set that species of note each time it is issued. Suppose, for instance,
% going back to our Wordsworth example,
% that you have defined, using |\definenewnotetype|, the following six
% kinds of endnotes: |\fivetextnote| |\fiveemendation|, |\fiveexplanatory|,
% |\fiftytextnote|, |\fiftyemendation|, and |\fiftyexplanatory|. You should
% define a new command called |\keeptitlesstraight| to keep track of these six
% kinds of note. Here is how it might look:
%
% \medskip
%
% \noindent|\newcommand{\keeptitlesstraight}{|\\
% |\pretocmd{\fivetextnote}{\versotitleinnotescheck}{\relax}{\relax}|\\
% |\pretocmd{\fiveemendation}{\versotitleinnotescheck}{\relax}{\relax}|\\
% |\pretocmd{\fiveexplanatory}{\versotitleinnotescheck}{\relax}{\relax}|\\
% |\pretocmd{\fiftytextnote}{\rectotitleinnotescheck}{\relax}{\relax}|\\
% |\pretocmd{\fiftyemendation}{\rectotitleinnotescheck}{\relax}{\relax}|\\
% |\pretocmd{\fiftyexplanatory}{\rectotitleinnotescheck}{\relax}{\relax}|\\
% |}|
%
% \medskip
%\begin{sloppypar}
% All those fields filled with |\relax| are for reporting the success or failure
% |\pretocmd| has had in appending |\versotitleinnotescheck| (or |\rectotitleinnotescheck|)
% to the different endnotes commands. You may wish to replace
% the |\relax| with something like |\typeout{fiftytextnote modified}| or
% |\typeout{fiftytextnote not modified}|. \end{sloppypar}
%
%If you are using the |\keeptitlestraight|
% hack described here, you should add \textsf{etoolbox}
% to your package list.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\resettitleinnotes}
% If you are defining new kinds of note, and a section of
% non-parallel texts follow a section of parallel texts, you
% will need to issue the following hack after the parallel texts close
% (again I am using the Wordsworth example):\\
% |\newcommand{\resettitleinnotes}{|\\
% |\nofiveemendationyettrue%|\\
% |\nofiveexplanatoryyettrue%|\\
% |\nofivetextnoteyettrue%|\\
% |\nofiftyemendationyettrue%|\\
% |\nofiftyexplanatoryyettrue%|\\
% |\nofiftytextnoteyettrue%|\\
% |}|
%
% \subsection{~Parallel texts and generic note types}
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\rectotexnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\rectoemendation}
% \DescribeMacro{\rectoexplanatory}
% \DescribeMacro{\versotexnote}
% \DescribeMacro{\versoemendation}
% \DescribeMacro{\versoexplanatory}
% In case you find using these hacks a bit burdensome,
% I have defined for your convenience six generic kinds of endnote for use in parallel text
% editions: |\rectotextnote|, |\rectoeemendation|, |\rectoexplanatory|,
% |\versotextnote|, |\versoemendation|, and |\versoexplanatory,| as well as |\rectoprosetexnote|,
% |\versoprosetextnote,| |\rectoproseemendation,| |\versoproseemendation|,
% |\rectoproseexplanatory|, and |\versoproseexplanatory.|
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% I have also defined
% |\literalrectotextnote|, |\literalversotextnote|, |\literalrectoemendation|, |\literalversoemendation|,
% |\literalrectoexplain|, and |\literalversoexplain| for sending material other than formal
% endnotes to these endnote sections.
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% You can use all of these without creating versions of |\keeptitlesstraight| and
% |\resettitleinnotes|.
%
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\makerectotexnotes}
% \DescribeMacro{\makerectoemendations}
% \DescribeMacro{\makerectoexplanatorynotes}
%To use these
% kinds of note, issue |\makeversotextnotes|, |\makeversoemendations|,
% |\makeversoexplanatorynotes| or their recto equivalents in your preamble. You can mark
% up your texts with these notes
% just as you would do with |\textnote|, |\emendation| or |\explanatory| (or |\literalversotextnote|
% |\literalversoemendation| and |\literalversoexplain|), without any of the special hacks
% I have just described.
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\changerectotextnotesname}
% \DescribeMacro{\changerectotextnotesheader}
% \DescribeMacro{\rectotextnotessinglepar}
% \DescribeMacro{\rectotextnotestwocol}
% I have given the endnotes sections generated by these notes rather
% generic names (|\rectotextnote| and |\versotextnote| for instance, both open endnote sections
% with the title TEXTUAL NOTES, with a running header of the form ``Textual Notes to pp.~xx--yy''
% an a contents entry of Textual Notes). You will probably need to change
% those to something more descriptive. You can change any of these with
% |\changeversotextnotesname{Your Title}|, |\changeversotextnotesheader{Your running header}|,
% and |\changeversotextnotescontentsname{Your contents entry}|.
% You can change the appearance of these notes
% by changing the values of the booleans |\versotextnotessinglepar| and |\versotextnotestwocol|.
% Similar sets of commands are available for |\versoemendation| and |\versoexplanatory|
% and their recto equivalents.
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\putrectotextnotes}
% To include these note sections in your document, issue |\putversotextnotes|, |\putrectotextnotes|,
% |\putversoemendations|, |\putrectoemendations|, |\putversoexplanatorynotes|, or
% |\putrectoexplanatorynotes| at the point where you wish them to appear. These commands
% behave exactly like |\puttextnotes|.
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \subsection{~Parallel text labels}
% \DescribeMacro{\synchrolabel} \DescribeMacro{\synchroref}
% \DescribeMacro{\setsynchroflag} You may want to mark cross references
% to make it clear to the reader which line of the poem on the recto side
% of the spread corresponds to a particular line on the verso side.
% To mark these cross references, you
% need to make a label on the verso side (using |\syncrolabel|), and a corresponding
% reference on the recto side (using |\synchroref|). You may also wish to add a mark to
% that reference (using |\setsynchroflag|) to specify to the reader what edition it refers to. So, for
% instance, if your verso text is the 1805 version of Wordsworth's
% \emph{The Prelude}, and your recto text is the 1850 version, you may
% wish to specify |\setsynchroflag{1805: }|, which will preface the
% references put out by the |\synchroref| command with~`1805:~'.
% Suppose you wished to tie these corresponding passages from the ``Boy of Winander''
% episode in Book 3. To make the label, issue the
% |\synchrolabel| command on the verso side (the 1805 side) just after the
% |\verseline| or |\end{stanza}| which closes the line you wish to
% label:
%
% \begin{verbatim}
%This boy was taken from his mates, and died \verseline
%In childhood ere he was full ten years old \verseline
% \synchrolabel{full ten years old}
% \end{verbatim}
% You don't have to quote the whole line in the label, but it should be
% long enough to uniquely pick out that line in the poem. (If the line
% is repeated in the poem, you will have to exercise your ingenuity in
% making up a unique label.)
%
% Over on the recto side (the 1850 side), you will want to use |\synchroref| in order
% to print the marginal cross reference. The |\synchroref| command
% should come \emph{before} the |\verseline| that closes the line it is
% tied to, as follows:
%
% \begin{verbatim}
%This Boy was taken from his mates, and died\verseline
%In childhood, ere he was full twelve years old.
% \synchroref{full ten years old}}\verseline
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \subsection{~Parallel prose passages}
% \DescribeMacro{parallelprose}
% \DescribeMacro{\startparalleltextprose}
% \DescribeMacro{\finishparalleltextprose}
% \textsf{poemscol} is not designed to manage long parallel texts in prose,
% but for shorter texts up to a couple of dozen pages, such as
% two versions of an Author's Preface, say, \textsf{poemscol} has the |parallelprose|
% environment. (You can also use |\startparalleltextprose| and |\finishparalleltextprose|.)
% Like passages of parallel text in verse, parallel prose passages must start
% on a verso page.
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\startversoprosepage}
% \DescribeMacro{\finishversoprosepage}
% \DescribeMacro{\startrectoprosepage}
% \DescribeMacro{\finishrectoprosepage}
% Each verso page must start with |\startversoprosepage| and finish with
% |\finishversoprosepage|, and each recto page must start with |\startrectoprosepage|
% and finish with |\finishrectoprosepage|. If a page continues a paragraph from the previous
% page, say, from a previous recto page, put the beginning of the
% text on the second page right after the |\startrectopage| command with
% no blank line. (Alternatively, you could just
% begin that page with |\noindent|.)
% \end{sloppypar}
%
% \DescribeMacro{\parastart}
% \DescribeMacro{\paraend}
% You must mark the beginning and end of every paragraph in parallel prose passages
% with |\parastart| and |\paraend|.
%
% You will have to pick the page breaks manually, using |\newpage|, once you find where
% \LaTeX\ would naturally break the page. Because how \LaTeX\ justifies text is a little
% unpredictable, however, you may find that the line before the page break, which filled
% the line before you added the page break, is actually a little shorter, and thus is
% no longer justified, once you add the page break. You may well not be able to exactly
% fill out the line by trial and error, adding a word or even just a syllable, to the line at a time.
% You can kludge around the problem, however, by adding
% an |\hfil| between each word of the last line.
%
% \section{Using \textsf{poemscol} in a multilingual world}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\changecontentsname}
% By default, \textsf{poemscol} uses English language titles for such
% things as the Table of Contents, the Explanatory Notes, and so on,
% and uses English language running headers. As of version 2.5 these
% are easily changed. To change the name of the Table of Contents
% (the default is CONTENTS) to Inhaltsverzeichnis, issue
% |\changecontentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}|. To change the running
% header on contents pages, issue
% |\changecontentsheader{your header}|.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\changenotesname} To change the name for the endnote
% section for textual notes (the default is TEXTUAL NOTES), issue
% |\changenotesname{your version}|. To change the running header (by
% default ``Textual Notes to'') issue
% |\changenotesheader{your version}|.
% To change the name for
% the textual notes in the table of contents issue
% |\changetextnotescontentsname{your version}|.
%
% \DescribeMacro{\changesinglepageabbrev}
% \DescribeMacro{\changemultiplepageabbrev}
% Running headers refer to single pages with the English
% abbreviation ``p.'' and to multiple pages with the English
% abbreviation ``pp.'' To change these issue
% |\changesinglepageabbrev{new abbrev}| or
% |\changemultiplepageabbrev{new abbrev}| respectively. The ultimate
% outcome is to translate a header of the form ``Textual Notes to
% pp.~xx-yy'' to the form appropriate for your language.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\changeemendationsname} To change the name for the endnote
% section for emendations (the default is EMENDATIONS), issue
% |\changeemendationsname{your version}|. To change the running header (by
% default ``Emendations to'') issue
% |\changeemendationsheader{your version}|. To change the name for
% the emendations in the table of contents issue
% |\changeemendationscontentsname{your version}.|\end{sloppypar}
%
%\begin{sloppypar}
% \DescribeMacro{\changeexplanationsname} To change the name for the endnote
% section for explanatory notes (the default is EXPLANATORY NOTES), issue
% |\changeexplanationsname{your version}|. To change the running header (by
% default ``Explanatory Notes to'') issue
% |\changeexplanationsheader{your version}|.
% To change the name for
% the explanatory notes in the table of contents issue
% |\changeexplanationscontentsname{your version}|.\end{sloppypar}
%
% \begin{sloppypar} \DescribeMacro{\changepoemindexname} To change the name
% for the index (the default is ``Index of Titles and First Lines'', issue
% |\changepoemindexname{your version}|. To change the running
% header (the default is ``Index of Titles and First Lines'') issue
% |\changepoemindexheader{your version}|. To change the contents
% entry for the index (the default is ``Index of Titles and First Lines'')
% issue
% |\changepoemindexcontentsname{your version}|.\end{sloppypar}
%
%\section{A sample driver file}
%
% If you are compiling a collected poems, you are probably preparing
% your volume from many files. You may (or may not) wish to subdivide
% your edition by the original volumes. Or you may subdivide by year,
% or by the significant phases of the poet's career. One way to keep
% in control of the process is to create a driver file, which calls
% all the appropriate\ .sty files and sets the variables globally, and
% then read in the sections of the edition using |\input|. Here is a
% version of the driver file I used for
% \emph{The Collected Poems of Robert Penn Warren}:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \documentclass[10pt,twoside]{article}
% \usepackage{fancyhdr,kdgreek,makeidx,times,multicol,geometry,}
% \usepackage{keyval,ifthen,mparhack,manyfoot,poemscol}
% \begin{document}
% \leftheader{The Collected Poems of Robert Penn Warren}
% \makeexplanatorynotes
% \makeemendations
% \maketextnotes
% \makepoemcontents
% \makeverselinenumbers
% \global\indexingontrue
% \global\includeaccidentalstrue
% \global\includetypescriptstrue
% \input maintitle.tex
% \input poems1922_1943.tex
% \input thirtysix.tex
% \input eleven.tex
% \input sp43.tex
% \input promises1.tex
% \input promises2.tex
% \input promises3.tex
% \input yeo1.tex
% \input yeo2.tex
% \input yeo3.tex
% \input tale1.tex
% \input tale2.tex
% \input incarnations.tex
% \input audubon.tex
% \input orelse1.tex
% \input orelse2.tex
% \input arcturus.tex
% \input nowthen.tex
% \input beinghere.tex
% \input rumor1.tex
% \input rumor2.tex
% \input cj1.tex
% \input cj2.tex
% \input altitudes.tex
% \input poems1943_1989.tex
% \input introduction.tex
% \finish
% \end{verbatim}
%
% \section{A sample poem markup}
% Here is a poem Robert Penn Warren wrote in his first volume,
% \emph{Thirty-Six Poems} (1935). The poem is the first poem of his
% sequence ``Kentucky Mountain Farm.'' I include the over-title, to
% demonstrate how to mark up such cases.
% \begin{verbatim}
% \sequencetitle{Kentucky Mountain Farm}
% \index{Kentucky Mountain Farm@{\em Kentucky Mountain Farm\/}}
% \sources{Text: TSP. Variants: SP43, SP66 (Deletes ``The Cardinal,'' ``The
% Jay,'' and ``Watershed''), SP75 (Same sections as SP66), SP85 (Restores
% ``Watershed''), {\em Helsinki\/} (includes only ``Rebuke of
% the Rocks'' and
% ``At the Hour of the Breaking of the Rocks'').
% ``The Owl'' (above) was marked as a section of ``Kentucky
% Mountain Farm'' when it first appeared in {\em Poetry,\/} but it was never
% included in any book version of the entire sequence. The sequence in {\em
% Poetry\/} included, in this order, ``The Owl,'' ``The Cardinal,'' and
% ``Watershed.'' TSP uses lower case Roman numerals in the section
% titles. The typescript drafts in the Beinecke Library do not seem to
% be setting copies.}
% \sequencefirstsectiontitle{I. Rebuke of the Rocks}
% \index{Rebuke of the Rocks@{\em Rebuke of the Rocks\/}}
% \sources{Text: TSP. Variants: {\em Nation\/}, 11 Jan.\ 1928,
% p.~47, {\em Literary
% Digest,\/} 28 Jan.\ 1928, p.~32, {\em Vanderbilt Masquerader,\/} 10
% (Dec.\ 1933), p.~16, SP43, SP66, SP75, SP85, {\em Helsinki\/},
% Broadside: The Press at Colorado College, printed on paper handmade by
% Thomas Leech for the American Poetry Society, April~26, 1985. This
% poem was not included in SP85 until the second set of galleys, in
% which a photocopy of the SP75 text is a stapled insert.}
% \begin{poem}
% \begin{stanza}
% Now on you is the hungry equinox,\verseline
% \index{Now on you is the hungry equinox}
% O little stubborn people of the hill,\verseline
% \accidental{hill,] \sameword--- {\em Nation,\/} {\em Literary Digest\/}
% \sameword, {\em Vanderbilt\/} (I include the reading
% from {\em Vanderbilt\/}
% even though it is the same as in TSP, because
% {\em Vanderbilt\/} was published
% after the other magazine versions but before TSP.)}
% The season of the obscene moon whose pull\verseline
% Disturbs the sod, the rabbit, the lank fox,\verseline
% Moving the waters, the boar's dull blood,\verseline
% And the acrid sap of the ironwood.\end{stanza}
%
% \begin{stanza}
% But breed no tender thing among the rocks.\verseline
% Rocks are too old under the mad moon,\verseline
% \accidental{old\missingpunct] \sameword, {\em Vanderbilt\/}}
% Renouncing passion by the strength that locks\verseline
% The eternal agony of fire in stone.\end{stanza}
%
% \begin{stanza}
% Then quit yourselves as stone and cease\verseline
% \accidental{stone\missingpunct] \sameword, {\em Vanderbilt\/}}
% To break the weary stubble-field for seed;\verseline
% Let not the naked cattle bear increase,\verseline
% Let barley wither and the bright milkweed.\verseline
% \accidental{milkweed.] milk-weed. {\em Vanderbilt\/}}
% Instruct the heart, lean men, of a rocky place\verseline
% That even the little flesh and fevered bone\verseline
% May keep the sweet sterility of stone.\end{stanza}
% \end{poem}
% \end{verbatim}
% \goodbreak
% \section{A sample divider page}
% \begin{verbatim}
% \begin{volumetitlepage}
%
% \volumetitle{Being Here}
% \volumeheader{Being Here}
% \volumesubtitle{Poetry 1977--1980}
% \volumededication{To Gabriel Thomas Penn\\
% (1836--1920)}
% \bigskip
%
% \volumeepigraph{OLD MAN: You get old and you can't do anybody
% any good any more.\\
% BOY: You do me some good, Grandpa. You
% tell me things.}
%
%
% \bigskip
%
% \volumeepigraph{There is in short no absolute time standard.}
% \volumeattribution{{\em Van Nostrand's Scientific Encyclopedia,\/}\\
% Fifth Edition, p. 2203}
%
% \bigskip
%
%
% \volumeepigraph{I thirst to know the power and nature of Time\ldots.}
% \volumeattribution{St.\ Augustine: {\em Confessions,\/}\\
% Book {\em XI,\/} Chapter {\em XXIII\/}\\
% Translated by Albert C. Outler}
%
%
% \bigskip
%
% \volumeepigraph{Time is the dimension in which God
% strives to define His own Being.}
%
% \sources{The typescript material in the Beinecke Library
% indicates that this
% book went through many drafts, and some rethinking about what to
% include and how to order the poems. Until a late stage of
% production---very late, since the typescript includes a designed
% mock-up of the proposed title page---the title of this volume was {\em
% Life is a Fable.\/} Indeed, as late as the time the book was set in
% galleys it was called {\em Life is a Fable\/}, although the title was
% corrected on the galleys. Like {\em Now and Then\/}, the typescript
% was assembled from photocopies of re-typed copies of poems made after
% their magazine appearance, with annotations giving the name of the
% magazine in which they occurred. Unlike {\em Now and Then\/}, the
% typescript seems to have been typed in one piece, and the annotations
% added for the convenience of the permissions department at
% Random House. The page numbers have been added---presumably
% later---in blue pen. The copy is marked up in Warren's hand in black
% pencil, and in another hand in red pencil. (Unless marked otherwise,
% all of the mark-up described here is in black pencil.) \tsentry{Like most
% Warren typescripts BHTS is single-spaced. The dedication to Gabriel
% Thomas Penn and the dialogue between the old man and the boy appeared
% on a separate page, and the three epigraphs appeared on another
% separate page. BHTS gives 1838 as the year of Gabriel
% Thomas Penn's
% birth (the error is corrected on the galleys). In the quotation from
% Augustine, the second word is corrected to ``thirst'' from ``yearn,''
% and the translator's name is added in pencil, not in Warren's
% handwriting.} In one of Warren's own
% copies at Western Kentucky University, he has corrected the date of
% Gabriel Thomas Penn's birth to 1837 (copy 310). Some revisions in this book
% may have come very late
% indeed. A letter to Erskine of January 28, 1980, refers to changes
% made in a bound manuscript that Warren kept after returning the
% copy-edited typescripts. There are revisions not only on the galleys,
% but also on the page proofs. There are even some corrections on the
% ``blues'' for this volume, including some new copy on a card referred
% to in a note on the cover of the ``blues'' but now lost. The Secker
% and Warburg London edition is, except for the title page, printed from
% the American plates. There is a copy of this book, marked up by
% Warren with
% proposed revisions for Stuart Wright's use on May 25, 1987, in the
% Special Collections
% Department of the Emory University Library. I quote Warren's
% notes by permission.
% Warren has also marked up, slightly, a copy of this book now in the
% Robert Penn Warren Room of the Library of the Kentucky Museum at
% Western Kentucky University. I quote that volume too by permission.
% The setting typescript for the section of SP85 drawn from this volume
% consisted of taped-in photocopies of passages from BH. Because the
% revisions for SP85 are sometimes a vexed question, I have indicated
% where the SP85 revisions are made on SP85TS.}
%
%
% \sources{Title Page] SP85 omits the dialogue between the old man and
% the young boy. SP85 capitalizes ``time standard'' in the quotation
% from Van Nostrand's Scientific Encyclopedia, and does not capitalize
% ``Time'' in the quotation from Augustine.}
%
%
%
% \end{volumetitlepage}
% \end{verbatim}
%
%
%
%
% \StopEventually{\PrintChanges\PrintIndex}
% \section{Implementation}\label{implementation}
% \subsection{~Page geometry and crop marks}
% \begin{macro}{\tightgeometry} There's no reason why you should use the
% page geometry I used in \emph{The Collected Poems of Robert Penn Warren},
% and there are many reasons not to. But I include it just to show what is possible.
% If you issue |\tightgeometry| in your
% preamble, you will have the geometry I have used. If you issue
% |\tightleading| you will
% redefine |\normalsize| and |\small| to use tighter leading.
% Normal
% 10 point \LaTeX\ uses 12 point leading. Strictly to save money, I
% redefined |\normalsize| to use 11 point leading.
% I use the \textsf{geometry} package,
% since it's simpler to figure out. I give my page geometry here
% chiefly to remind the reader of some important variables that should
% be kept track of, such as marginparsep, which controls the
% separation of the marginal line numbers from the verse line,
% marginparwidth, which controls how wide the block for the marginal
% line numbers will be, headsep, which controls how far the text will
% be from the running headers, and footskip, which controls how far
% the last verse line will be from the marker which tells the reader
% that there is a stanza break at the end of the page (if there is
% one). I've also set the odd side margin and the even side margin
% for two-sided printing. Finally, I have set the default handling
% of page endings to |\raggedbottom|. Verse should always be set with
% a ragged bottom margin, otherwise \LaTeX\ will stretch the spaces
% between stanzas to make the bottom perfectly flush. When you enter
% prose sections, such as the editor's introduction, you should enter
% the command |\flushbottom| to make sure that the prose sections have
% flush page bottoms.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tightgeometry}{\geometry{verbose, tmargin= 33pt,
textwidth=318.21pt,textheight=550pt,
marginparsep=7pt,marginparwidth=10pt,
headheight= 15pt,
headsep=19pt,
footskip=15pt,
lmargin=132pt}
\setlength{\oddsidemargin}{60pt}
\setlength{\evensidemargin}{65.41pt}}
\newcommand{\tightleading}{%
\makeatletter
\renewcommand\normalsize{%
\@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xipt
\abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\let\@listi\@listI}
\makeatother
\normalsize
\makeatletter
\renewcommand\small{%
\@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{10}%
\abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
\abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
\belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
\topsep 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
\parsep 2\p@ \@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
\itemsep \parsep}%
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
}
\makeatother}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Internal font size commands} You will probably never need
% to use these font commands explicitly. I defined these for internal
% use within \textsf{poemscol}, so that a command will always call the
% same fonts. \label{internal font size commands}
%
% As a way of making global changes to repeated features I have
% defined various special fonts for special purposes. For instance,
% in a Collected Poems in which the poems are arranged by volume, with
% divider pages for the beginning of each volume, the first command
% sets the font for the volume title on the divider page, using the
% default font family, setting it in 18 point type on 23 point
% leading. The second command, as the name of the command indicates,
% sets the font for the subtitle of the volume to be 14 point type on
% 18 point leading. You can change these either by changing the
% values in your (renamed) style file, or by using |\renewcommand|.
% For instance, you can change the font parameters for the font for
% setting poem titles from 14 on 18 to 12 on 14 by issuing
% |\renewcommand{\poemtitlefont}{\fontsize{12}{14}\selectfont}| in
% your preamble. Notice that there are special fonts for titles in
% the back matter and in the table of contents as well.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\volumetitlefont}{\fontsize{18}{23}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\volumesubtitlefont}{\fontsize{14}{18}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\poemtitlefont}{\fontsize{14}{18}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\sequencetitlefont}{\fontsize{16}{20}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\subsectiontitlefont}{\fontsize{12}{14.5}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\backmatterheaderfont}{\fontsize{16}{20}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\volumetitlesink}{\leavevmode\vspace{23.5pt}}
\newcommand{\backmattersink}{\leavevmode\vspace{21.5pt}}
\newcommand{\backmatterafterheadersink}{\leavevmode\vspace{11pt}}
\newcommand{\backmattertextfont}{\small}
\newcommand{\backmatterintrofont}{\normalsize}
\newcommand{\backmattervolumefont}{\fontsize{12}{14.5}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\backmattervolumesubtitlefont}{\fontsize{11}{13}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\contentsvolumefont}{\fontsize{14}{20}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\contentsvolumesubtitlefont}{\fontsize{12}{14.5}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\contentssequencetitlefont}{\fontsize{10}{14}\selectfont}
\newcommand{\contentspoemtitlefont}{\fontsize{10}{14}\selectfont}
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{~Miscellaneous dimensions and constants}
% \textsf{poemscol} sets relatively large penalties for widows and
% clubs, both in the main text, and in the notes sections. There are
% also special penalties after volume titles in the notes sections,
% since one does not want to leave a volume title in the notes
% sections stranded at the bottom of a page. (Setting penalties may
% not automatically solve all the problems, however. You can fix an
% intractable widow problem in the contents or in the notes sections
% by issuing |\literalcontents{\pagebreak}| or
% |\literalemend{\pagebreak}| just before you issue the
% |\poemtitle| or |\volumetitle| that resulted in the problematic
% title line.) \textsf{poemscol} also manipulates penalties for places like
% the space between a poem's title and its first line. It defines
% special values for the white space before and after poems and for
% the amount of a stanza break. |\contentsindentone|,
% |\contentsindenttwo|, and so on are amounts to indent different
% hierarchical levels, say of poetic sequences and subsequences, in
% the table of contents.
% \begin{macrocode}
\widowpenalty=300
\clubpenalty=300
\newcommand{\notespoemclubpenalty}{\penalty-300}
\newcommand{\notessequenceclubpenalty}{\penalty-1500}
\newcommand{\notesvolumetitlepenalty}{\penalty-1500}
% \end{macrocode}
% Since the right margin of verse is ragged anyway, I allowed some
% flexibility for slightly longer lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\hfuzz=2pt
% \end{macrocode}
% For explicitly declared indented lines or ranges of lines:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\verseindentamount}
\setlength{\verseindentamount}{2em}
\newcount\l@@pcounter
\newcommand{\repeatedindent}[1]{\l@@pcounter=#1%
\loop%
\ifnum\l@@pcounter>0%
\hspace{\verseindentamount}%
\advance \l@@pcounter -1
\repeat}
\newcommand{\verseindent}[1][]{%
\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\hspace{\verseindentamount}}{\repeatedindent{#1}}}
%\newcommand{\verseindent}{\hspace{\verseindentamount}} %old version
\newlength{\indentedstanzaamount}
\setlength{\indentedstanzaamount}{\verseindentamount}
\newlength{\variablestanzaamount}
\setlength{\variablestanzaamount}{\indentedstanzaamount}
\newcommand{\adjustst@nzaindent}[1]{\l@@pcounter=#1%
\loop%
\addtolength{\variablestanzaamount}{\indentedstanzaamount}%
\advance \l@@pcounter -1%
\ifnum \l@@pcounter>0
\repeat}
\newif\ifinindentedverse
\newenvironment{indentedverse}[1][]{%
\inindentedversetrue%
\ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{}}{\relax}{\adjustst@nzaindent{#1}}%
\let\\=\@centercr%
\list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -\runoverindentvalue\listparindent \itemindent
\rightmargin 0sp\leftmargin 0sp\advance\leftmargin
\variablestanzaamount}\item[]}
{\endlist\inindentedversefalse\setlength{\variablestanzaamount}{\indentedstanzaamount}}
% \end{macrocode}
% For multicolumn notes:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\columnsep}{15pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% A hierarchy of indentations for sequence section titles and
% subsection titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\titleindentamount}
\setlength{\titleindentamount}{1pc}
%\newdimen\titleindentamount \titleindentamount=1pc
%\newdimen\titleindenttwoamount \titleindenttwoamount=2pc
\newlength{\titleindenttwoamount}
\setlength{\titleindenttwoamount}{2pc}
\newlength{\titleindentthreeamount}
\setlength{\titleindentthreeamount}{3pc}
%\newdimen\titleindentthreeamount \titleindentthreeamount=3pc
\newcommand{\titleindent}{\hspace{\titleindentamount}}
\setlength{\parindent}{1pc}
\newlength{\volumetitleindentamount}
\setlength{\volumetitleindentamount}{0pt}
%\newcommand{\volumetitleindent}{\hspace{\volumetitleindentamount}}
\newcommand{\volumetitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\volumetitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\volumetitlesecondlineindentamount}{0pt}
%\newcommand{\volumetitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\volumetitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newcommand{\volumetitlesecondlineindent}{\relax}
% \titleindentamount=1pc
\newlength{\volumesubtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\volumesubtitleindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\volumesubtitleindent}{\hspace{\volumesubtitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\volumesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\volumesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\volumesubtitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\volumesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\volumesectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\volumesectiontitleindentamount}{0pt}
% \newcommand{\volumesectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\volumesectiontitleindentamount}}
\newcommand{\volumesectiontitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\volumesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\volumesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}{0pt}
% \newcommand{\volumesectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\volumesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newcommand{\volumesectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\poemtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\poemtitleindentamount}{0pt}
% \newcommand{\poemtitleindent}{\hspace{\poemtitleindentamount}}
\newcommand{\poemtitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\poemtitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\poemtitlesecondlineindentamount}{0pt}
% \newcommand{\poemtitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\poemtitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newcommand{\poemtitlesecondlineindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\poemsubtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\poemsubtitleindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\poemsubtitleindent}{\hspace{\poemsubtitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\poemsectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\poemsectiontitleindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\poemsectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\poemsectiontitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\poemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\poemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\poemsectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\poemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\poemsubsectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\poemsubsectiontitleindentamount}{\titleindenttwoamount}
\newcommand{\poemsubsectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\poemsectiontitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\sequencetitleindentamount}
\setlength{\sequencetitleindentamount}{0pt}
% \newcommand{\sequencetitleindent}{\hspace{\sequencetitleindentamount}}
\newcommand{\sequencetitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\sequencetitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\sequencetitlesecondlineindentamount}{0pt}
% \newcommand{\sequencetitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\sequencetitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newcommand{\sequencetitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\relax}}
\newlength{\sequencesubtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\sequencesubtitleindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\sequencesubtitleindent}{\hspace{\sequencesubtitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\sequencesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\sequencesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\sequencesubtitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\sequencesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\sequencesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\sequencesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\sequencesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\sequencesectionsubtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\sequencesectionsubtitleindentamount}{\titleindenttwoamount}
\newcommand{\sequencesectionsubtitleindent}{\hspace{\sequencesectionsubtitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\sequencesectionsubtitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\sequencesectionsubtitlesecondlineindentamount}{\titleindenttwoamount}
\newcommand{\sequencesectionsubtitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\sequencesectionsubtitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}{\titleindenttwoamount}
\newcommand{\sequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindentamount}{\titleindentthreeamount}
\newcommand{\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\appendixtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\appendixtitleindentamount}{0pt}
% \newcommand{\appendixtitleindent}{\hspace{\appendixtitleindentamount}}
\newcommand{\appendixtitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\subappendixtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\subappendixtitleindentamount}{0pt}
% \newcommand{\subappendixtitleindent}{\hspace{\subappendixtitleindentamount}}
\newcommand{\subappendixtitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\forewordtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\forewordtitleindentamount}{0pt}
% \newcommand{\forewordtitleindent}{\hspace{\forewordtitleindentamount}}
\newcommand{\forewordtitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\notestitleindentamount}
\setlength{\notestitleindentamount}{0pt}
% \newcommand{\notestitleindent}{\hspace{\notestitleindentamount}}
\newcommand{\notestitleindent}{\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% A hierarchy of indentations for the table of contents: \label{contents indentation hierarchy}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\volumetitleshiftamount \volumetitleshiftamount=1pc
\newcommand{\volumetitleshift}{\hbox{\hspace{\volumetitleshiftamount}}}
\newdimen\voladditionalamount \voladditionalamount=2pc
\newdimen\contentsindentoneamount \contentsindentoneamount=24pt
\newcommand{\contentsindentone}{\hspace{\contentsindentoneamount}}
\newdimen\contentsindenttwoamount \contentsindenttwoamount=42pt
\newcommand{\contentsindenttwo}{\hspace{\contentsindenttwoamount}}
\newdimen\contentsindentthreeamount \contentsindentthreeamount=60pt
\newcommand{\contentsindentthree}{\hspace{\contentsindentthreeamount}}
\newdimen\contentsindentfouramount \contentsindentfouramount=72pt
\newcommand{\contentsindentfour}{\hspace{\contentsindentfouramount}}
\newdimen\contentsindentfiveamount \contentsindentfiveamount=80pt
\newcommand{\contentsindentfive}{\hspace{\contentsindentfiveamount}}
% \end{macrocode}
% A hierarchy of indentations for sequence section titles and
% subsection titles in the table of contents.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\contentsvolumetitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentsvolumetitleindentamount}{0pt}
%\newcommand{\contentsvolumetitleindent}{\hspace{\contentsvolumetitleindentamount}}
\newcommand{\contentsvolumetitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\contentsvolumetitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\contentsvolumetitlesecondlineindentamount}{0pt}
%\newcommand{\contentsvolumetitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\contentsvolumetitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newcommand{\contentsvolumetitlesecondlineindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\contentsvolumesubtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentsvolumesubtitleindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\contentsvolumesubtitleindent}{\hspace{\contentsvolumesubtitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentsvolumesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\contentsvolumesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}{\titleindentamount}
\newcommand{\contentsvolumesubtitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\contentsvolumesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentsvolumesectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentsvolumesectiontitleindentamount}{0pt}
\newcommand{\contentsvolumesectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\contentsvolumesectiontitleindentamount}}
%\newcommand{\contentsvolumesectiontitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\contentsvolumesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\contentsvolumesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}{0pt}
\newcommand{\contentsvolumesectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\contentsvolumesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}{\contentsindentoneamount}
%\setlength{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}{0pt}
\newcommand{\contentspoemtitleindent}{\hspace{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}}
%\newcommand{\contentspoemtitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindentamount}{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}
\newcommand{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindentamount}}
%\newcommand{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\contentspoemsubtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentspoemsubtitleindentamount}{\contentspoemsubtitleindentamount}
\newcommand{\contentspoemsubtitleindent}{\hspace{\contentspoemsubtitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentspoemsectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentspoemsectiontitleindentamount}{\contentsindenttwoamount}
\newcommand{\contentspoemsectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\contentspoemsectiontitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentspoemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\contentspoemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}{\contentspoemsectiontitleindentamount}
\newcommand{\contentspoemsectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\contentspoemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentspoemsubsectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentspoemsubsectiontitleindentamount}{\contentsindentthreeamount}
\newcommand{\contentspoemsubsectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\contentsindentthreeamount}}
\newlength{\contentssequencetitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentssequencetitleindentamount}{\contentsindentoneamount} %313
\newcommand{\contentssequencetitleindent}{\hspace{\contentssequencetitleindentamount}}
%\newcommand{\contentssequencetitleindent}{\relax}
\newlength{\contentssequencetitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\contentssequencetitlesecondlineindentamount}{\contentsindentoneamount} %313
\newcommand{\contentssequencetitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\contentssequencetitlesecondlineindentamount}}
%\newcommand{\contentssequencetitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\relax}}
\newlength{\contentssequencesubtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentssequencesubtitleindentamount}{\contentsindenttwoamount} %313
\newcommand{\contentssequencesubtitleindent}{\hspace{\contentssequencesubtitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentssequencesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\contentssequencesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}{\contentsindenttwoamount} %313
\newcommand{\contentssequencesubtitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\contentssequencesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount}{\contentsindenttwoamount} %313
\newcommand{\contentssequencesectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentssequencesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\contentssequencesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}{\contentsindenttwoamount} %313
\newcommand{\contentssequencesectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\contentssequencesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentssequencesectionsubtitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentssequencesectionsubtitleindentamount}{\contentsindentthreeamount} %313
\newcommand{\contentssequencesectionsubtitleindent}{\hspace{\contentssequencesectionsubtitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentssequencesectionsubtitlesecondlineindentamount}
\setlength{\contentssequencesectionsubtitlesecondlineindentamount}{\contentsindentthreeamount}%313
\newcommand{\contentssequencesectionsubtitlesecondlineindent}{\hspace{\contentssequencesectionsubtitlesecondlineindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}{\contentsindentthreeamount}
\newcommand{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}}
\newlength{\contentssequencesubsubsectiontitleindentamount}
\setlength{\contentssequencesubsubsectiontitleindentamount}{\contentsindentfouramount}
\newcommand{\contentssequencesubsubsectiontitleindent}{\hspace{\contentssequencesubsubsectiontitleindentamount}}
% \end{macrocode}
% White space after poem titles, after poems, and after sequence
% titles. \label{skiplist}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\afterpoemtitleskip}{\smallskip}
\newcommand{\afterpoemskip}{\bigskip}
\newcommand{\aftersequencetitleskip}{\medskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% A little extra white space between stanzas.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stanzaskip}{\medskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% Penalties to encourage page breaks before poem titles, before
% multi-line poem titles, and before sequence titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtitlepenalty}{\penalty-1000}
\newcommand{\multilinetitlepenalty}{\penalty-3000}
\newcommand{\sequencetitlepenalty}{\penalty-3000}
\newcommand{\multilinesequencepenalty}{\penalty-3500}
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{~Title Schemes} Ways of controlling the placement of titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\poemtitlewidth}
\newif\iftitlescenteredonleftverseblock
\newif\iftitlesatleftmarginofcenteredblock
\newif\iftitlesatleftversemargin
\newif\ifnormaltitleindentation
%
\newcommand{\normaltitleindentationscheme}{%
\normaltitleindentationtrue%
\titlesatleftversemarginfalse%
\titlescenteredonleftverseblockfalse%
\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblockfalse%
\centertitlesonfalse%
}
\newcommand{\titlesatleftversemarginscheme}{%
\normaltitleindentationfalse%
\titlesatleftversemargintrue%
\titlescenteredonleftverseblockfalse%
\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblockfalse%
\centertitlesonfalse%
}
\newcommand{\titlescenteredonleftverseblockscheme}{%
\normaltitleindentationfalse%
\titlesatleftversemarginfalse%
\titlescenteredonleftverseblocktrue%
\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblockfalse%
\centertitlesonfalse%
}
\newcommand{\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblockscheme}{%
\normaltitleindentationfalse%
\titlesatleftversemarginfalse%
\titlescenteredonleftverseblockfalse%
\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblocktrue%
\centertitlesonfalse%
}
\newcommand{\centertitlesscheme}{%
\normaltitleindentationfalse%
\titlesatleftversemarginfalse%
\titlescenteredonleftverseblockfalse%
\titlesatleftmarginofcenteredblockfalse%
\centertitlesontrue%
\centerepigraphsontrue%
}
\newlength{\lefttitleaddition}
\setlength{\lefttitleaddition}{0pt}
\newcommand{\l@ftc@ntertitleblock}{\rightmargin \z@%%
\setlength{\lefttitleaddition}{\versewidth}%
\addtolength{\lefttitleaddition}{-\poemtitlewidth}%
\addtolength{\lefttitleaddition}{-0.5\lefttitleaddition}%
\setlength{\lefttitlemargin}{\lefttitleaddition}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{~Verse} The verse environment here is taken from \LaTeX,
% slightly modified to indent run over lines more. The idea is to
% distinguish the automatic indentation of run over lines from the
% explicitly declared indentation of indented lines. You can change
% the amount of indentation of runover lines with |\runoverindent|.
% \label{versedefine}
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\makeatletter{\catcode`\@=11}
\def\makeatother{\catcode`\@=12 }
\newcommand{\runoverindent}[1]{\global\edef\runoverindentvalue{#1}
}
\runoverindent{6em}
% pmclverse (runover indented more than it is in the normal verse
% environment)
% \newenvironment{pmclverse}{%
% \let\\=\@centercr%
% \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -\runoverindentvalue\listparindent \itemindent
% \rightmargin 1sp\leftmargin 1sp\advance\leftmargin
% \runoverindentvalue}\item[]}
% {\endlist}
\newif\iflinenumberscenteredwithverse
\linenumberscenteredwithversetrue
%
\newlength{\marginparsepmin}
\setlength{\marginparsepmin}{2em}
%
\newlength{\versemarginadjust}
\setlength{\versemarginadjust}{0pt}
%
\newif\iftextcenteringturnedon
\textcenteringturnedontrue
%
\newcommand{\v@riablemarginpar}{\setlength{\marginparsep}{-\leftmargin}%
\addtolength{\marginparsep}{\marginparsepmin}}
%
\newcommand{\c@nterverseblock}[1]{\rightmargin \z@%
\setlength{\leftmargin}{\linewidth}%
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{-#1}%
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{-0.5\leftmargin}%
\iflinenumberscenteredwithverse\v@riablemarginpar\fi}
\newif\iflastpoemcentered
\newenvironment{pmclverse}[1][\linewidth]{%
\global\lastpoemcenteredfalse
\let\\=\@centercr%
\list{}{\itemsep\z@
\itemindent -\runoverindentvalue
\listparindent \itemindent
\ifdim #1 < \linewidth
\iftextcenteringturnedon
\c@nterverseblock{#1}%
\global\lastpoemcenteredtrue
\else
\rightmargin \leftmargin
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\versemarginadjust}\fi
\else
\rightmargin \leftmargin
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\versemarginadjust}
\fi
\advance\leftmargin\runoverindentvalue}
\item[]}
{\endlist}
% next is from 2.88
%\newenvironment{pmclverse}[1][\linewidth]{%
%\let\\=\@centercr%
%\list{}{\itemsep\z@
%\itemindent -\runoverindentvalue
%\listparindent \itemindent
% \ifdim #1 < \linewidth
% \iftextcenteringturnedon
% \c@nterverseblock{#1}%
% \else
% \rightmargin \leftmargin
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\versemarginadjust}\fi
% \else
% \rightmargin \leftmargin
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\versemarginadjust}
% \fi
%\advance\leftmargin\runoverindentvalue}
%\item[]}
%{\endlist}% from 2.72 with additions
% \newenvironment{pmclverse}[1][\linewidth]{%
% \let\\=\@centercr%
% \list{}{\itemsep\z@
% \itemindent -\runoverindentvalue
% \listparindent \itemindent
% \ifdim #1 < \linewidth
% \rightmargin \z@
% \setlength{\leftmargin}{\linewidth}%
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-#1}%
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-0.5\leftmargin}%
% \iflinenumberscenteredwithverse
% \setlength{\marginparsep}{-\leftmargin+\marginparsepmin}
% \fi
% \else
% \rightmargin \leftmargin
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\versemarginadjust}
% \fi
% \advance\leftmargin\runoverindentvalue}
% \item[]}
% {\endlist\setlength{\marginparsep}{0pt}} % from email
% \newenvironment{pmclverse}[1][\linewidth]{%
% \let\\=\@centercr%
% \list{}{\itemsep\z@
% \itemindent -\runoverindentvalue
% \listparindent \itemindent
% \iftextcenteringturnedon
% \ifdim #1 < \linewidth
% \rightmargin \z@
% \setlength{\leftmargin}{\linewidth}%
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-#1}%
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-0.5\leftmargin}%
% \iflinenumberscenteredwithverse\setlength{\marginparsep}{-\leftmargin+\marginparsepmin}\fi
% \else
% \rightmargin \leftmargin
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\versemarginadjust}
% \fi % linewidth
% \else
% \rightmargin \leftmargin
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\versemarginadjust}
%
% \fi% textcentering
% \advance\leftmargin\runoverindentvalue}
% \item[]}
% {\endlist\setlength{\marginparsep}{0pt}}% % draft
% \let\\=\@centercr%
% \list{}{\itemsep\z@
% \itemindent -\runoverindentvalue
% \listparindent \itemindent
% \ifdim #1 < \linewidth
% \rightmargin \z@
% \setlength{\leftmargin}{\linewidth}%
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-#1}%
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-0.5\leftmargin}%
% \else
% \rightmargin \leftmargin
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\versemarginadjust}
% \fi
% \advance\leftmargin\runoverindentvalue}
% \item[]}
% {\endlist} % first version from 2.81
% \newenvironment{pmclverse}[1][\linewidth]{%
% \let\\=\@centercr%
% \list{}{\itemsep\z@
% \itemindent -\runoverindentvalue
% \listparindent \itemindent
% \ifdim #1 < \linewidth
% \rightmargin \z@
% \setlength{\leftmargin}{\linewidth}%
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-#1}%
% \addtolength{\leftmargin}{-0.5\leftmargin}%
% \else
% \rightmargin \leftmargin
% \fi
% \advance\leftmargin\runoverindentvalue}
% \item[]}
% {\endlist}% from 2.72
\newif\ifinquotedverse
\newenvironment{quotedverse}{%
\inquotedversetrue
\let\\=\@centercr%
\list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -\runoverindentvalue\listparindent \itemindent
\rightmargin 0sp\leftmargin 0sp\advance\leftmargin
\runoverindentvalue}\item[]}
{\endlist\inquotedversefalse}
% rfoverse (flushes runover to right) (Just a placeholder now.)
% \newif\ifrfv
% \rfvfalse
% \newcommand{\rightflushrunoververse}{\global\rfvtrue}
% \newcommand{\indentrunoververse}{\global\rfvfalse}
% \newenvironment{rfoverse}{\begin{pmclverse}}{\end{pmclverse}}
% % verse environment with a switch
% \renewenvironment{verse}{\ifrfv\begin{rfoverse}\else\begin{pmclverse}\fi}
% {\ifrfv\end{rfoverse}\else\end{pmclverse}\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{~Miscellaneous internal counters}
% |\verselinenumber| is the line number, obviously. |\printlineindex|
% records how many lines have passed since the last marginal line
% number was output. |\lineindexrepeat| governs how often the marginal
% line numbers appear. |\lemmalines| and |\lemmaend| are for setting
% number ranges for multiline lemmas.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{verselinenumber}
\newcounter{printlineindex}
\newcounter{verselinenumberscratch}
\newcounter{printlineindexscratch}
\newcounter{lineindexrepeat} \setcounter{lineindexrepeat}{9}
\newcounter{lemmalines}
\setcounter{lemmalines}{0}
\newcounter{lemmaend}
\setcounter{lemmaend}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% This next counter is used to make labels for each poem for the contents and notes sections.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{poemnumber}
\setcounter{poemnumber}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% These next two are used to set the page numbers in the running
% headers of the various notes sections, which are of the form
% ``Textual notes to pp.~xx--yy.''
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{notepageholdertitle} \setcounter{notepageholdertitle}{1}
\newcounter{notepageholdernote} \setcounter{notepageholdernote}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{~Miscellaneous token lists}
% Since the explanatory notes section and the emendations section should
% only open an entry for poems for which there actually are explanatory notes or
% emendations, the current are held in token lists in case they are needed.|\titlesofar|
% and |\titleincrement| are used to concatenate multi-line titles.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks{\fulltitleholder}
\newtoks{\titlesofar}
\newtoks{\titleincrement}
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{~Miscellaneous booleans}
% Most of these have self-explanatory names.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifinstanza
\newif\ifinpoem
\newif\ifpoemcontentson
\newif\iftextnoteson
\newif\ifverselinenumbers
\newif\ifexplanon
\newif\ifemendationson
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\newif\ifindexingon
\global\indexingontrue
\ifindexingon
\makeindex
\fi
\newif\ifincludeaccidentals
\global\includeaccidentalstrue
\newif\ifincludetypescripts
\global\includetypescriptstrue
\newif\ifredundantemendations
\global\redundantemendationsfalse
\newif\ifnoemendyet
\newif\ifnoexplainyet
\global\noemendyettrue
\global\noexplainyettrue
\newif{\ifmiddlecontentsline}
\middlecontentslinefalse
\newif{\iflastcontentsline}
\lastcontentslinefalse
\newif{\ifputpagenumberincontents}
\putpagenumberincontentstrue
\newif{\ifputpagenumberinnotes}
\putpagenumberinnotestrue
\newif{\ifsinglelinetitle}
\singlelinetitletrue
\newif{\iftitlefirstline}
\titlefirstlinefalse
\newif{\iftitlemiddleline}
\titlemiddlelinefalse
\newif{\iftitlelastline}
\titlelastlinefalse
\newif{\ifverserightflush}
\verserightflushfalse
\newif\ifrangelemma
\rangelemmafalse
\newcommand{\makeverselinenumbers}{\global\verselinenumberstrue}
\let\makelinenumbers=\makeverselinenumbers% for compatibility
\newif\iftextnotesatend
\textnotesatendtrue
\newif\ifemendationsatend
\emendationsatendtrue
\newif\ifexplanatend
\explanatendtrue
\newif\iftextfootnotespara
\textfootnotesparatrue
\newif\ifsourcesfootnotespara
\sourcesfootnotesparafalse
\newif\ifemendationfootnotespara
\emendationfootnotesparatrue
\newif\ifexplanfootnotespara
\explanfootnotesparafalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{~Defining page styles} \label{pagestyledefs} These define several special page styles.
% To use them you must have the \textsf{fancyhdr} package installed.
% First, the default running headers: the right side (|\volumeheader|)
% is the title of the volume in a multivolume edition, and the left
% (|\leftheader|) is the title of the general collection.
% \begin{macro}{\volumeheader}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\volumeheader}[1]{\global\edef\volumeheadervalue{#1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\leftheader}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\leftheader}[1]{\global\edef\leftheadervalue{#1}
}
\leftheader{\relax}
\volumeheader{\relax}
\newcommand{\rightheader}[1]{\volumeheader{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% The default page style. Note the use of the mark mechanism to keep
% track of cases where the stanza breaks and page breaks overlap.
% \begin{macro}{\pagestyle{fancy}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\headoffsetlength}
\setlength{\headoffsetlength}{-1sp}
%\addtolength{\headoffsetlength}{\parindent}
\raggedbottom
\pagestyle{fancy}
\fancyhead{}
\fancyfoot{}
\fancyhfoffset[RO,LE]{\headoffsetlength}
\fancyhead[RO]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{\hfil{\small{\em \volumeheadervalue}}\hfil}
\fancyhead[CE]{\hfil{\small{\em \leftheadervalue}}\hfil}
\fancyfoot[CE]{{\small \botmark}\hfil}
\fancyfoot[CO]{\hfil{\small \botmark}}
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt}
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pagestyle{main}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\fancypagestyle{main}{%
\fancyhead{}
\fancyfoot{}
\fancyhfoffset[RO,LE]{\headoffsetlength}
\fancyhead[RO]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{\hfil{\small{\em \volumeheadervalue}}\hfil}
\fancyhead[CE]{\hfil{\small{\em \leftheadervalue}}\hfil}
\fancyfoot[CE]{{\small \botmark}\hfil}
\fancyfoot[CO]{\hfil{\small \botmark}}
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt}
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Style for the first page of every volume in a Collected Poems. You
% don't have to call this style explicitly. It is called by the |\volumetitlepage|
% environment. But of course if you want to change the style of those
% pages, you should do it here.
% \begin{macro}{volumefirststyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\fancypagestyle{volumefirststyle}{%
\fancyhf{}
\fancyfoot[C]{\hfil{\small \botmark}\hfil}
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt}
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Style for plain pages.
% \begin{macro}{plain}
% \begin{macrocode}
\fancypagestyle{plain}{%
\fancyhf{}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt}
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Style for long poems.
% \begin{macro}{\myversemarks}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks{\singlelineabbrev}
\singlelineabbrev={l.\ }
\newcommand{\changesinglelineabbrev}[1]{\singlelineabbrev={#1}}
\newtoks{\multiplelineabbrev}
\newcommand{\changemultiplelineabbrev}[1]{\multiplelineabbrev={#1}}
\multiplelineabbrev{ll.\ }
\newcommand{\myversemarks}{%
\ifthenelse{\equal{\thefirstmarks{verselinemark}}{\thebotmarks{verselinemark}}}%
{\unskip ~\the\singlelineabbrev~\thefirstmarks{verselinemark}}% if equal
{\unskip ~\the\multiplelineabbrev\thefirstmarks{verselinemark}--\thebotmarks{verselinemark}}} % if not equal
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{longpoem}
% \begin{macrocode}
\fancypagestyle{longpoem}{%
\fancyhead{}
\fancyfoot{}
\fancyhfoffset[RO,LE]{\headoffsetlength}
\fancyhead[RO]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{\hfil{\small{\em \volumeheadervalue ~\myversemarks}}\hfil}
\fancyhead[CE]{\hfil{\small{\em \leftheadervalue~\myversemarks}}\hfil}
\fancyfoot[CE]{{\small \botmark}\hfil}
\fancyfoot[CO]{\hfil{\small \botmark}}
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt}
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Style for divider pages between volumes
% \begin{macro}{volumetitlestyle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\fancypagestyle{volumetitlestyle}{%
\fancyhf{}
\renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt}
\renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\resetpagestyle}
% |\resetpagestyle| restores the fancy page style of the main sections of the
% book. |\putpoemcontents| changes the fancy page style, and |\resetpagestyle|,
% which is called by |\putpoemcontents| as it finishes, restores the original
% style
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\resetpagestyle}{\pagestyle{main}
% \fancyhead{}
% \fancyfoot{}
% \fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
% \fancyhead[CO]{\hfil{\small{\em \volumeheadervalue}}}
% \fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \leftheadervalue}\hfil}}
% \fancyfoot[CE]{{\small \botmark}\hfil}
% \fancyfoot[CO]{\hfil{\small \botmark}}
% \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0pt}
% \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\clearemptydoublepage}
% This macro is useful for making sure that the verso of a title
% page is blank.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{\newpage{\pagestyle{empty}\cleardoublepage}}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\mymarks}
% Here the marks mechanism keeps track of pages from which notes
% come. Marks are used different in the notes sections and in the body
% of the volume. In the body, they are used to keep track of cases
% where a stanza break falls on a page break. In the notes sections,
% they set the running headers.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks{\singlepageabbrev}
\singlepageabbrev={p.}
\newcommand{\changesinglepageabbrev}[1]{\singlepageabbrev={#1}}
\newtoks{\multiplepageabbrev}
\newcommand{\changemultiplepageabbrev}[1]{\multiplepageabbrev={#1}}
\multiplepageabbrev{pp.}
\newcommand{\mymarks}{%
\ifthenelse{\equal{\firstmark}{\botmark}}%
{\unskip ~\the\singlepageabbrev~\firstmark}% if equal
{\unskip ~\the\multiplepageabbrev~\firstmark--\botmark}}%if not equal
\newcommand{\poemdotfill}{\dotfill}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Environments: poem, and stanza} Here are definitions
% of the poem and stanza environments, and of the |\verseline| and
% |\stanzalinestraddle| macros.
% \begin{macro}{stanza} \label{stanzadefine}
% Page breaks are slightly encouraged in stanza breaks. Notice that
% entering a stanza sets the mark to |\relax| and leaving it sets the
% mark to * (the default value of |\stanzaatbottom|). If you want to
% use some other symbol for this purpose, use |\stanzaatbottom| or
% |\nostanzaatbottom| (if you also want to mark cases where there
% is \emph{no} stanza break at the bottom of the page) to change it.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{stanza}{\penalty-100\instanzatrue\mark{\nostanzaatbottomvalue\ }}
{\nobreak\mark{\stanzaatbottomvalue\ }\nobreak\ifspeciallinelock%
\relax\else%
\nolinebreak\incrementverselinenumber%
\fi%
\speciallinelockfalse%
\nobreak
\instanzafalse
\stanzaskip
}
\newenvironment{marginenvironment}{}{}
\newcommand{\stanzalinestraddle}
{\begin{stanza}\addtocounter{verselinenumber}{-1}%
\addtocounter{printlineindex}{-1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% The next two environments are for contents entries and titles. The
% idea is to handle overrun titles the way overrun lines are handled
% in verse. Contents entries indent the overrun slightly. Titles do
% not indent the overrun relative to the first line, but preserve the
% indentation of that line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\contentsentryoverrun}
\setlength{\contentsentryoverrun}{\contentsindentoneamount}
\newenvironment{contentsentryenvironment}{%
\language=255%no hyphenation in contents
\let\\=\@centercr%
\list{}{\topsep\z@%
\partopsep\z@%
\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -\contentsentryoverrun\listparindent \itemindent
\rightmargin 1sp\leftmargin 1sp\advance\leftmargin
\contentsentryoverrun}\item[]}{\endlist}
\newlength{\titleentryoverrun}
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{\z@}
\newenvironment{titleentryenvironment}{%
\language=255%no hyphenation in poem titles
\let\\=\@centercr%
\list{}{\topsep\z@%
\partopsep\z@%
\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -\titleentryoverrun%
\listparindent \itemindent %
\iftitlesatleftmarginofcenteredblock%
\left@ligntitleblock%
\rightmargin \z@\leftmargin \lefttitlemargin%
\else%
\iftitlescenteredonleftverseblock
\l@ftc@ntertitleblock
\rightmargin \z@\leftmargin \lefttitlemargin
\else
\rightmargin \z@\leftmargin \z@%
\fi\fi%
\advance\leftmargin \titleentryoverrun}\item[]}{\endlist}
% older version:
%\newenvironment{titleentryenvironment}{%
%\language=255%no hyphenation in poem titles
%\let\\=\@centercr%
%\list{}{\topsep\z@%
%\partopsep\z@%
%\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -\titleentryoverrun%
%\listparindent \itemindent %
%\ifleftaligntitles
%\left@ligntitleblock
%\rightmargin 1sp\leftmargin \lefttitlemargin%
%\else
%\rightmargin 1sp\leftmargin 1sp%
%\fi
%\advance\leftmargin \titleentryoverrun}\item[]}{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% The poem environment. The little trick about setting the language
% number is designed to suppress automatic hyphenation in the poem
% environment. The booleans tell the |\emendation| and
% |\explanatory| macros that there have not yet been emendations or
% explanatory notes for this poem. The little trick with |\mark| sets
% the value of |\mark| to the current value of |\stanzaatbottom| (by
% default *) if the current location is in a poem but not in a stanza
% (which is to say, in a stanza break). The |\pagestyle| for poetry
% sets the value of |\mark| in the footer, which is * if the page break
% happens at a stanza break, and |\relax| if the page break happens
% anywhere else. \label{poemdef}
% \begin{macro}{poem}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\versewidth}
\setlength{\versewidth}{\linewidth}% default length for \versewidth
\newenvironment{poem}[1][\linewidth]
{\raggedright%
\language=255%no hyphenation in verse
\noemendyettrue%
\noexplainyettrue%
\setcounter{verselinenumber}{0}\setcounter{printlineindex}{0}%
\nobreak\begin{pmclverse}[#1]%
\inpoemtrue\nobreak\mark{\relax}%
}{\end{pmclverse}%
\inpoemfalse\mark{\relax}%
\goodbreak\afterpoemskip%\bigskip
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{rightflushverse}
% Sets verse with the runover portions of long lines flushed to the right. Each line
% must begin with |\rightversebegin|.This code was suggested to me by Mark Wooding
% on comp.text.tex, who describes the code as ``very unpleasant.''
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{rightflushverse}{\let\oldleftskip=\leftskip%
\leftskip=1 \leftskip\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill}%
{\let\leftskip=\oldleftskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Environments: main title page, divider pages}
% Environments for the main title page, and for the divider pages for
% individual volumes in a Collected Poems.
% \begin{macro}{volumetitlepage}
% \begin{macro}{maintitlepage}
% \begin{macro}{booksectionpage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{volumetitlepage}
{\par\clearpage{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
{\newpage\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}
\cleardoublepage\thispagestyle{volumefirststyle}}
\newenvironment{maintitlepage}
{\par\cleardoublepage\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}
}{\newpage\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\newenvironment{booksectionpage}
{\par\newpage\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}{\newpage}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Marginal line numbers, verse lines, line cross
% references, etc.}\label{marginalgeometry} The default is that the
% line numbers are on the left side, and that the |\marginparsep| is
% 18pt. If you use |\pmclleftsidepar| the placement of the number is
% controlled by |\marginparsep| and |\marginparwidth|. You should
% experiment with different values until you find a set that suits
% you. A rule of thumb for me is that the |\marginparsep| if the
% numbers is on the right should be the negative of the value if it is
% on the left. First, some lengths and ifs:
% \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\marginparsep}{18pt}
\setlength{\marginparwidth}{18pt}
\newif\ifnumbersswitch \numbersswitchfalse
\newif\ifnumbersright \numbersrightfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% Next, code for |\pmclsidepar|, taken from the memoir class, by
% Peter Wilson. Modified by Dan Luecking.
% \begin{macro}{\pmclsidepar}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmclsidepar}{\@dblarg{\@pmclsidepar}}
%\long\def\@pmclsidepar[#1]#2{\@bsphack\leavevmode\vadjust{%
\long\def\@pmclsidepar[#1]#2{\@bsphack\strut\vadjust{% added
\checkoddpage
\ifpmclsideparswitch
\ifpmclreversesidepar
\ifoddpage
\oddpagefalse
\else
\oddpagetrue
\fi
\fi
\else
\oddpagetrue
\ifpmclreversesidepar
\oddpagefalse
\fi
\fi
\rlap{\kern-\parindent
\if@twocolumn
\if@firstcolumn % put at left
\kern -\marginparsep \kern -\marginparwidth % at left
\else % put at right
\kern \columnwidth \kern \marginparsep % at right
\fi
\else
\ifoddpage % put at right
\kern \textwidth \kern \marginparsep % at right
\else % put at left
\kern -\marginparsep \kern -\marginparwidth % at left
\fi
\fi
% \vbox to 0pt{%
% \kern \pmclsideparvshift% % vertical shift to align top text lines
% \begin{minipage}{\marginparwidth}%
\setbox0=\vtop to 0pt{% added
\begin{minipage}[t]{\marginparwidth}% added
\ifoddpage #2\else #1\fi%
\end{minipage}%
% \vss}}}\@esphack}
\vss}% added
\vtop to 0pt{\kern\pmclsideparvshift % default should be 0pt
\kern-\dp\strutbox \kern-\ht0 \box0 \vss}}}\@esphack}% added
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\thepmemc@@page}
% The value of the page counter.
% \begin{macrocode}
\gdef\thepmemc@@page{\the\c@page}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmemlabel}
% A version of |\label| that uses |\pmemprotected@write|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\pmemlabel}[1]{\@bsphack
\pmemprotected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\newpmemlabel{#1}{\thepmemc@@page}}%
\@esphack}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmemprotected@write}
% |\pmemprotected@write| is a modified version of the kernel's
% |\protected@write|.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\pmemprotected@write#1#2#3{%
\begingroup
\let\thepmemc@@page\relax
#2%
\let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
\edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}%
\reserved@a
\endgroup
\if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\newpmemlabel}
% \begin{macro}{\pmemlabelref}
% We have to be able to cope with a particular label
% not (yet) being in the the aux file when we come to check
% the page number.
% \begin{macrocode}
\providecommand{\newpmemlabel}[2]{{\global\@namedef{m@#1}{#2}}}
\providecommand{\pmemlabelref}[1]{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname m@#1\endcsname\relax
0%
\else
\csname m@#1\endcsname
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\@memcnta}
% We need a scratch count register.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcount\@memcnta
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\checkoddpage}
% This is the user level command to check for odd/even page. It does
% a robust check for |\strictpagecheck| otherwise the simple minded
% check. It sets |\ifoddpage| to TRUE if the page is odd, otherwise
% it sets it to FALSE.
%
% This is now fixed so that it should work for non-arabic page numbering.
% It uses a new label/pageref variant based on the page counter value, not
% its printed representation. This also gets rid of worrying about hyperref!!
% The problem was discovered by Bastiaan Niels Veelo
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareRobustCommand{\checkoddpage}{%
\oddpagefalse%
\ifstrictpagecheck%
\stepcounter{cp@cntr}\pmemlabel{\cplabel\thecp@cntr}%
\@memcnta=\pmemlabelref{\cplabel\thecp@cntr}\relax
\ifodd\@memcnta\oddpagetrue\fi
\else
\ifodd\c@page\oddpagetrue\fi
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ifpmclreversesidepar}
% \begin{macro}{\ifpmclsideparswitch}
% Analogues of |\marginpar| controls.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpmclreversesidepar
% \pmclreversesideparfalse
\pmclreversesidepartrue
\newif\ifpmclsideparswitch
\pmclsideparswitchfalse
\if@twoside \pmclsideparswitchtrue \fi
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\ifoddpage}
% \begin{macro}{\ifstrictpagecheck}
% \begin{macro}{\c@cp@cntr}
% \begin{macro}{\cplabel}
% The boolean |\ifoddpage| is TRUE if the checked page is odd. The
% boolean |\ifstrictpagecheck| is for turning on (TRUE) and off (FALSE)
% the strictest method of page checking. The counter |cp@cntr| is used
% to make unique labels, which start with |\cplabel|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifoddpage
\newif\ifstrictpagecheck
\strictpagecheckfalse
\newcounter{cp@cntr}
\newcommand{\cplabel}{^_}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% Two-column and one-column printing is again realized via a switch
% which is defined in the kernel. The default is single column printing.
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\pmclsideparvshift}
% Vertical shift for sidepar to align with text line
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\pmclsideparvshift}
% \setlength{\pmclsideparvshift}{-2.08ex}% seems to work for all font sizes
%\setlength{\pmclsideparvshift}{-2.58ex}
\setlength{\pmclsideparvshift}{0ex}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% My code resumes here
% \begin{macro}{\verselinenumberstoleft}
% \begin{macro}{\verselinenumberstoright}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verselinenumberstoleft}{%
% \setlength{\marginparsep}{18pt}%
% \setlength{\marginparwidth}{10pt}%
\numbersswitchfalse\numbersrightfalse}
\newcommand{\verselinenumberstoright}{%
% \setlength{\marginparsep}{18pt}%
% \setlength{\marginparwidth}{10pt}%
\numbersswitchfalse\numbersrighttrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\verselinenumbersswitch}
% \begin{macro}{\verselinenumbersgutter}
% \begin{macro}{\verselinenumbersouter}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\verselinenumbersswitch}{%
\strictpagechecktrue%
% \setlength{\marginparsep}{18pt}%
% \setlength{\marginparwidth}{10pt}%
\numbersswitchtrue\numbersrightfalse\pmclsideparswitchtrue}
\newif\ifnumbersgutter \numbersgutterfalse%
\newcommand{\verselinenumbersgutter}{\verselinenumbersswitch%
\pmclreversesideparfalse%
\numbersguttertrue%
}
\newcommand{\verselinenumbersouter}{\verselinenumbersswitch%
\pmclreversesidepartrue%
\numbersgutterfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putverselinenumber}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putverselinenumber}{\nolinebreak\begin{marginenvironment}%
\nolinebreak%
% \ifnumbersswitch\marginpar{\hfil\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}}%
% \else%
% \ifnumbersright\marginpar{\hfil\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}}%
% \else%
% \marginpar{\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}\hfil}%
% \fi%
% \fi
\ifnumbersswitch\pmclsidepar{\hfil\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}}%
\else%
\ifnumbersright\pmclrightsidepar{\hfil\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}}%
\else%
\pmclleftsidepar
{\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}\hfil}%
\fi%
\fi%
% \marn{\hfil\textrm{\theverselinenumber}}
% \marginpar{\hfil\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}}
% \linenumberside{\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}\hfil}
% \pmclrightsidepar{\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}}
\nolinebreak%
\end{marginenvironment}%
\nolinebreak%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\verseline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifspeciallinelock
\speciallinelockfalse
\newcommand{\verseline}{\ifspeciallinelock%
\relax\else%
\nolinebreak\incrementverselinenumber%
\fi%
\speciallinelockfalse%
\nolinebreak\\%
}
% \newif\iflongpoemon
% \longpoemonfalse
\newcommand{\incrementverselinenumber}{%
\nolinebreak\addtocounter{verselinenumber}{1}%
%\iflongpoemon\marksthe{verselinemark}{\theverselinenumber}\fi%
%\makeatletter
\@ifundefined{marksthe}{\relax}{\marksthe{verselinemark}{\theverselinenumber}}%
%\makeatother
\addtocounter{printlineindex}{1}%
\ifnum\theprintlineindex>\thelineindexrepeat%
\ifverselinenumbers\nobreak%
\putverselinenumber\nobreak%
\fi\nobreak%
\setcounter{printlineindex}{0}%
\fi%
}
\newcommand{\setverselinemodulo}[1]{%
\setcounter{lineindexrepeat}{#1}%
\addtocounter{lineindexrepeat}{-1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\linebend}
% A linebend is a a normal linebreak from \LaTeX, with no incrementing
% of the line number counter, but the indentation makes the line look
% like a run over line. If you change the value of the run over in the
% definition of the |\verse| environment, be sure to change it here
% too. |\linebend| should be used for tweaking how \textsf{poemscol}
% runs over long lines.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\linebend}{\\
\hspace{\runoverindentvalue}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% |\saveverselinenumber| and |\restoreverselinenumber| are useful for setting
% prose interjections in the midst of poems.
% \begin{macro}{\saveverselinenumber}
% \begin{macro}{\restoreverselinenumber}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\saveverselinenumber}{\setcounter{verselinenumberscratch}%
{\value{verselinenumber}}%
\setcounter{printlineindexscratch}{\value{printlineindex}}}
\newcommand{\restoreverselinenumber}{\setcounter{verselinenumber}%
{\value{verselinenumberscratch}}%
\setcounter{printlineindex}{\value{printlineindexscratch}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rightversebegin}
% By default, \textsf{poemscol} indents the runover portion of long lines by the
% amount |\runoverindent| (by default 6 em). It is possible to set verse so that
% the runover portion is flushed to the right margin. To do this, you should
% enclose the |\poem| environment in the |\rightflushverse| environment. And you
% must mark the beginning of each verse line with |\rightversebegin|
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\rightversebegin}
{\leavevmode\nobreak\hskip0pt plus -1fill\ignorespaces}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\hour}
% |\hour| is useful for typesetting the AM and the PM in the time.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hour}[1]{{{\textsc{#1}}\ $\!\!\!$}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\brokenline}
% \begin{macro}{\versephantom}
% |\brokenline| and |\versephantom{}| are a pair, useful for setting
% cases where there is a line break in the midst of a single metrical
% line. |\tweakbrokenline| ensures that the line number will mark
% the first partial line if the line numbers are on the left, the
% last partial line if the line numbers are on the right. If you
% have issued |\tweakbrokenline| in your preamble, the setting of
% runover lines may not be consistent with the setting of broken
% lines, because the line number will be set on the level of the end
% of the line. This is not a problem if the line numbers are set on
% the right, but it may look odd if the numbers are set on the left.
% |\startverseline| will ensure that the line number marks the
% beginning of any line it begins. If you put |\startverseline| at
% the beginning of the runover lines, it will ensure that the line
% number marks the beginning, not the end, of the line. If you wish
% |\startverseline| to align the number with the beginning of
% runover lines when the line number is on the left, and with the
% end of runover lines when the line number is on the right, issue
% |\tweakstartverseline| in your preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\brokenline}{\\}
\newcommand{\versephantom}[1]{\leavevmode\phantom{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tweakbrokenline}
% Causes |\brokenline| to set the line number level with the
% beginning of the line if the number is on the left, level with the
% end of the line if the number is on the right. Issue it in the
% preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tweakbrokenline}{%
\renewcommand{\brokenline}{\ifnumbersswitch\relax%
\ifnumbersgutter% shift on odd pages for gutter numbers
\ifodd\c@page \relax \else \speciallinelocktrue\incrementverselinenumber\fi
\else % shift on even pages for outer numbers
\ifodd\c@page \speciallinelocktrue\incrementverselinenumber \fi
\fi
\else \ifnumbersright \relax%
\else \speciallinelocktrue\incrementverselinenumber%
\fi%
\fi%
\\}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\brokenlineatbeginning}
% Issue |\brokenlineatbeginning| if you want broken line to set the
% line number level with the beginning of the line, regardless of
% whether the line number is at the right or at the left
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\brokenlineatbeginning}{%
\renewcommand{\brokenline}{%
\speciallinelocktrue\incrementverselinenumber%
\\
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\startverseline}
% Put |\startverseline| at the beginning of every line where you wish
% to ensure that the line number is level with the beginning of the
% line. This is particularly useful for overrun lines when
% |\tweakbrokenline| or |\brokenlineatbeginning| is in effect.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\startverseline}{%
\speciallinelocktrue%
\leavevmode%
%\kern-3pt
\incrementverselinenumber%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tweakstartverseline}
% You may want |\startverseline| to align the line number with the
% beginning of the line if the line number is on the left, and with
% the end of the line if the line number is on the right. To do this,
% issue |\tweakstartline| in your preamble.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tweakstartverseline}{%
\renewcommand{\startverseline}{%
\leavevmode%
\ifnumbersswitch%
% gutter case: shift on odd pages to top of runover line
\ifnumbersgutter%
\ifodd\c@page \relax \else \speciallinelocktrue\incrementverselinenumber\fi
% outer case: shift on even pages to top of runover line
\else
\ifodd\c@page \speciallinelocktrue\incrementverselinenumber \fi
\fi% end of ifnumbersgutter
\else \ifnumbersright \relax% numbers don't switch. Are they to the right?
\else \speciallinelocktrue\incrementverselinenumber% or to the left?
\fi% end of ifnumbersright
\fi% end of ifnumbersswitch
}% end of renewcommand
}% end of tweakverseline
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\poemlinelabel}
% |\poemlinelabel| is a hacked version of |\label| for crossreferences by
% line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\poemlinelabel#1{\@bsphack
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\newlabel{#1}{{\theverselinenumber}{\thepage}}}%
\@esphack
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Setup for contents, textual notes, emendations, and explanatory notes}
% First, the table of contents:
% \begin{macro}{\makepoemcontents}
% An external file is created with the extension .ctn, and the
% filename of your driver file. The
% channel to that file is called |\poemcontents|. The rest of the
% command is the page style for the contents section. You will notice
% the running head Contents, and the title of the Contents section. I am
% assuming that the table of contents starts on page 5, but it may be
% different in different books.
% If you want to change that page
% number (say, to page 3) without messing with this file, issue
% |\literalcontents{\setcounter{page}{3}}| just after you issue
% |\makepoemcontents| Alternatively, you can issue |\makepoemcontents{}| with its
% optional argument, putting the page number in the argument.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks{\pmclcontentsname}
\pmclcontentsname={CONTENTS}
\newtoks{\pmclcontentsheader}
\pmclcontentsheader={Contents}
\newcommand{\changecontentsname}[1]{%
\pmclcontentsname={#1}}
\newcommand{\changecontentsheader}[1]{%
\pmclcontentsheader={#1}}
\newcommand{\makepoemcontents}[1][5]{\global\poemcontentsontrue
\newwrite\poemcontents
\immediate\openout\poemcontents=\jobname.ctn
\literalcontents{\flushbottom\normalfont
{\par\clearpage{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\pagestyle{fancy}\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\pagenumbering{roman}
\setcounter{page}{#1}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\pmclcontentsheader}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\pmclcontentsheader}}}
\fancyfoot{}
\backmattersink
\begin{center}{\normalfont \backmatterheaderfont
\the\pmclcontentsname}\end{center}
\lefthyphenmin=2\backmatterafterheadersink\tolerance=500\language=0}
\literalcontents{ \relax}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Next, the textual collations:
% \begin{macro}{\maketextnotes} Like the |\makecontents| macro,
% |\maketextnotes| opens an external file using |\jobname|, this time with the extension .ent. It
% makes sure that line numbering is on (since it makes no sense to make
% notes without numbering the lines, particularly since the
% |\textnote{}| macro uses the line number). And it makes sure that the
% notes section is set with a flush bottom line, rather than with the
% ragged bottom line used for the verse sections. Also, it sets a
% label for sending the page number of the textual notes to the table of
% contents.
%
% First, a few commands for use by all of the endnotes
% sections. |\setendnotessectiontitledefaults| sets the title of the endnotes section
% at the top of the first page of that species of note, and takes six arguments,
% which are, in order, (1) the title of the endnote section, (2)
% commands to be issued before setting the
% title (minimally, a penalty, such as |\poemtitlepenalty|), (3) the
% font size in which the title is to be set in the text (such as
% |\poemtitlefont| or |\large|), (4) any indentation of the title
% (|\relax| to put the title where |\poemtitle| puts it, or |\titleindent| to put it where
% |\sequencesectiontitle| puts it), (5) commands to be issued after the
% title is set (such as |\afterpoemtitleskip|) and (6) the label to
% be used for this section, to be used to set the page number in the
% table of contents.
%
% |\setendnotessectiontitle| is a simpler version of |\setendnotessectiontitledefaults|
% with all the defaults filled in, leaving only two arguments, the
% title of the section, and the label for use by the table of
% contents.
%
% |\contentsendnotesdefaults| sets the defaults for the table of
% contents entries for endnotes sections. It takes four arguments
% which are, in order, (1) the title of the endnote section, (2) the
% indentation of the title in the table of contents (such as
% |\contentsindentone|), (3), the font size in which the title
% should be set (such as |\contentspoemtitlefont|) and (4) the amount
% overrun lines in the table of contents should be indented (such as
% |\contentsindenttwoamount|).
%
% |\contentsendnotesindent| sets the default indent for table of
% contents entries for endnotes sections, and |\contentsendnotesfont|
% sets the default font for the.
%
% |\contentsendnotestitle| is a simpler command for sending
% information about endnote sections to the table of contents, taking
% only two arguments, the title and the label used for page reference
% purposes.
% \begin{macrocode}
% Generic command for titles of endnote sections
\newcommand{\setendnotessectiontitledefaults}[6]{%
#2%
#3 \begin{titleentryenvironment}%
{\ifcentertitleson\begin{center}#1\end{center}\else #4 #1\fi}%
\end{titleentryenvironment}%
#5%
\label{#6}
}
% Simpler version with only two parameters, the title and the label
% for page references
\newcommand{\setendnotessectiontitle}[2]{%
\setendnotessectiontitledefaults{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty\backmattersink}{\backmatterheaderfont}
{\notestitleindent}{\lefthyphenmin=2\backmatterafterheadersink}{#2}}
% Generic command for sending info about endnotes sections to table
% of contents
\newcommand{\contentsendnotesdefaults}[4]{\ifpoemcontentson
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\begin\string{contentsentryenvironment\string}}%
\literalcontents{#2{#3#1}}%
\ifputpagenumberincontents
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\contentsleaders}%
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\pageref
\string{#4\string}}%
\else
\literalcontents{\relax}%
\fi
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\end\string{contentsentryenvironment\string}}%
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\par}%
\fi
}
% default styles for contents entries for endnotes sections
\newcommand{\contentsendnotesindent}{\contentsindentone}
\newcommand{\contentsendnotesfont}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
% simpler command to set up contents entry with only two parameters,
% the title and the label for page references
\newcommand{\contentsendnotestitle}[2]{%
\contentsendnotesdefaults{#1}{\contentsendnotesindent}{\contentsendnotesfont}{#2}%
}
% command for paragraph breaks within notes
\newlength{\noteindentation}
\setlength{\noteindentation}{1em}
\newcommand{\noteparbreak}{\\
\hspace*{\noteindentation}}
% tokens to use to change the names of the sections
\newtoks{\pmclnotesname}
\pmclnotesname={TEXTUAL NOTES}
\newcommand{\changenotesname}[1]{\pmclnotesname={#1}}
\newtoks{\notesheadername}
\notesheadername={Textual Notes to}
\newcommand{\changenotesheader}[1]{\notesheadername={#1}}
\newtoks{\textnotescontentsname}
\textnotescontentsname={Textual Notes}
\newcommand{\changetextnotescontentsname}[1]{\textnotescontentsname={#1}}
% A boolean to change to two column notes.
\newif\iftextnotestwocol
\textnotestwocolfalse
% Setup for textual notes
\newcommand{\maketextnotes}{\global\textnotesontrue
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\newwrite\textnotes
\immediate\openout\textnotes=\jobname.ent
\literaltextnote{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead{}
\fancyfoot{}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\notesheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\notesheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyfoot[C]{}
\mark{3}
\setendnotessectiontitle{\the\pmclnotesname}{textualnotes}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\iftextnotestwocol
\begin{multicols}{2}
\fi
\setlength{\parindent}{-10pt}
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\makeemendations}
% Next, the emendations section:
% \begin{macrocode}
% tokens for changing the names of these notes
\newtoks{\emendationsname}
\emendationsname={EMENDATIONS}
\newcommand{\changeemendationsname}[1]{\emendationsname={#1}}
\newtoks{\emendationsheadername}
\emendationsheadername={Emendations to}
\newcommand{\changeemendationsheader}[1]{\emendationsheadername={#1}}
\newtoks{\emendationscontentsname}
\emendationscontentsname={Emendations}
\newcommand{\changeemendationscontentsname}[1]{%
\emendationscontentsname={#1}}
% two column notes
\newif\ifemendationstwocol
\emendationstwocolfalse
% Emendations section setup
\newcommand{\makeemendations}{\global\emendationsontrue
\newwrite\emendations
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\immediate\openout\emendations=\jobname.emd
\literalemend{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead{}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\emendationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\emendationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyfoot{}
\mark{3}
\setendnotessectiontitle{\the\emendationsname}{emendationnotes}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\ifemendationstwocol
\begin{multicols}{2}
\fi
\setlength{\parindent}{-10pt}
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\makeexplanatorynotes}
% And the explanatory notes:
% \begin{macrocode}
% Tokens to change names of these notes
\newtoks{\explanationsname}
\explanationsname={EXPLANATORY NOTES}
\newcommand{\changeexplanationsname}[1]{\explanationsname={#1}}
\newtoks{\explanationsheadername}
\explanationsheadername={Explanatory Notes to}
\newcommand{\changeexplanationsheader}[1]{\explanationsheadername={#1}}
\newtoks{\explanationscontentsname}
\explanationscontentsname={Explanatory Notes}
\newcommand{\changeexplanationscontentsname}[1]{%
\explanationscontentsname={#1}}
% Two column notes
\newif\ifexplanationstwocol
\explanationstwocolfalse
% Explanatory notes setup
\newcommand{\makeexplanatorynotes}{\global\explanontrue
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\newwrite\explanations
\immediate\openout\explanations=\jobname.enx
\literalexplain{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\explanationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\explanationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyfoot{}
\mark{3}
\setendnotessectiontitle{\the\explanationsname}{explanatorynotes}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\ifexplanationstwocol
\begin{multicols}{2}
\fi
\setlength{\parindent}{-10pt}
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% Auxiliary commands for note and title sections
% \begin{macrocode}
%
\newcommand{\@pagemarktotextnotes}[1]{%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\setcounterfrompageref\string{notepageholdertitle\string}%
\string{#1\string}\string\unskip}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\mark%
\string{\string\thenotepageholdertitle\string}}%
}
\newcommand{\@poempagetotextnotes}[1]{%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par\string\argpageref\string{#1\string}\string\unskip}%
\@pagemarktotextnotes{#1}}
\newcommand{\@poemtitletotextnotes}[1]{%
\ifputpagenumberinnotes%
\literaltextnote{\textbf{#1}}%
\else%
\literaltextnote{\par}\literaltextnote{\textbf{#1}}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{~Appendices, Forewords, Contents Entries}
% \begin{macro}{\makeappendix}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifappendixincontents
\appendixincontentstrue
\newif\ifforewordincontents
\forewordincontentstrue
%
\newcommand{\appendixdividerpage}[1]{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead{}
\fancyfoot{}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{\small\textrm{\thepage}}
\fancyhead[CO]{\small{\em #1}}
\fancyhead[CE]{#1}
\fancyfoot[C]{}}
%
\newcommand{\appendixtitle}[1]{
\setendnotessectiontitledefaults{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty\backmattersink}{\backmatterheaderfont}
{\appendixtitleindent}{\lefthyphenmin=2\backmatterafterheadersink}{appdx#1}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\setlength{\parindent}{\noteindentation}
\ifappendixincontents\contentsendnotestitle{#1}{appdx#1}\fi
}
%
\newcommand{\makeappendix}[1]{%
\appendixdividerpage{#1}
\appendixtitle{#1}
}
%
\newcommand{\contentsendnotessubtitle}[2]{
\contentsendnotesdefaults{#1}{\contentsindenttwo}{\contentsendnotesfont}{#2}
}
%
\newcommand{\subappendixtitle}[1]{%
\setendnotessectiontitledefaults{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty\backmattersink}{\backmatterheaderfont}
{\subappendixtitleindent}{\lefthyphenmin=2\backmatterafterheadersink}{appdx#1}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\setlength{\parindent}{\noteindentation}
\ifappendixincontents\contentsendnotessubtitle{#1}{appdx#1}\fi
}
%
\newcommand{\makesubappendix}[1]{%
\appendixdividerpage{#1}
\subappendixtitle{#1}
}
\newcommand{\foreworddividerpage}[1]{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead{}
\fancyfoot{}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{\small\textrm{\thepage}}
\fancyhead[CO]{\small{\em #1}}
\fancyhead[CE]{#1}
\fancyfoot[C]{}}
%
\newcommand{\forewordtitle}[1]{
\setendnotessectiontitledefaults{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty\backmattersink}{\backmatterheaderfont}
{\forewordtitleindent}{\lefthyphenmin=2\backmatterafterheadersink}{foreword#1}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\setlength{\parindent}{\noteindentation}
\ifforewordincontents\contentsendnotestitle{#1}{foreword#1}\fi
}
%
\newcommand{\makeforeword}[1]{%
\foreworddividerpage{#1}
\forewordtitle{#1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmclcontentsentry}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmclcontentsentrydefaults}[4]{
\ifpoemcontentson
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\begin\string{contentsentryenvironment\string}}%
\literalcontents{#2{#3#1}}%
\ifputpagenumberincontents
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\contentsleaders}%
\literalcontents{#4}
\else
\literalcontents{\relax}%
\fi
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\end\string{contentsentryenvironment\string}}%
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\par}%
\fi
}
%
\newcommand{\pmclcontentsentry}[3]{%
\pmclcontentsentrydefaults{#1}{#2}{\contentsendnotesfont}{#3}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Book, volume, and volume section titles}
% \begin{macro}{\wholebooktitle}
% \begin{macro}{\booksection}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\wholebooktitle}[1]{{\Huge\begin{center}
\hbox{#1}\end{center}}
}
\newcommand{\booksection}[1]{\volumesection{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\volumetitle{}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\volumetitle}[1]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\volumetitlesink\par}{\volumetitlefont}
{\volumetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\z@}
\putpagenumberincontentsfalse
\putpagenumberinnotesfalse
\literalcontents{\par\goodbreak\bigskip}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsvolumetitleindent}{\contentsvolumefont}
{\contentsvolumetitleindentamount}
\literalcontents{\par\goodbreak\medskip}
\literaltextnote{\notesvolumetitlepenalty\bigskip\goodbreak\par}
\t@xtnotesinfo{\backmattervolumefont #1 \backmattertextfont\nobreak}
\putpagenumberincontentstrue
\putpagenumberinnotestrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\volumetitlefirstline}
% \begin{macro}{\volumetitlelastline}
% \begin{macro}{\volumesubtitle}
% \begin{macro}{\volumesectiontitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\volumetitlefirstline}[1]{\firstlinesettings%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\volumetitlesink\par}
{\volumetitlefont}
{\volumetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\z@}
\putpagenumberincontentsfalse
\putpagenumberinnotesfalse
\literalcontents{\par\goodbreak\bigskip}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsvolumetitleindent}{\contentsvolumefont}
{\contentsvolumetitleindentamount}
\literalcontents{\medskip\par\nobreak}
% \literaltextnote{\notesvolumetitlepenalty\bigskip\par}
\t@xtnotesinfo{\backmattervolumefont #1 \backmattertextfont\nobreak}
\putpagenumberincontentstrue
\putpagenumberinnotestrue}
\newcommand{\volumetitlemiddleline}[1]{\middlelinesettings%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\relax}
{\volumetitlefont}
{\volumetitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\z@}
\putpagenumberincontentsfalse
\putpagenumberinnotesfalse
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsvolumetitleindent}{\contentsvolumefont}
{\contentsvolumetitleindentamount}
\literalcontents{\medskip\par\nobreak}
\t@xtnotesinfo{\backmattervolumefont #1 \backmattertextfont\nobreak}
\putpagenumberincontentstrue
\putpagenumberinnotestrue}
\newcommand{\volumetitlelastline}[1]{\lastlinesettings%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\relax}
{\volumetitlefont}
{\volumetitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\z@}
\putpagenumberincontentsfalse
\putpagenumberinnotesfalse
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsvolumetitleindent}{\contentsvolumefont}
{\contentsvolumetitleindentamount}
\literalcontents{\medskip\par\nobreak}
\t@xtnotesinfo{\backmattervolumefont #1 \backmattertextfont\nobreak}
\putpagenumberincontentstrue
\putpagenumberinnotestrue}
\newcommand{\volumesubtitle}[1]{{\volumesubtitlefont
\volumetitleshift \volumesubtitleindent #1 \par}
\ifpoemcontentson
\literalcontents{{\contentsvolumesubtitlefont\contentsvolumesubtitleindent
#1\par\medskip\nobreak}}
\fi
\iftextnoteson\iftextnotesatend
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\backmattervolumesubtitlefont\ #1}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par \string\backmattertextfont}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\volumesubtitlefirstline}[1]{{\firstlinesettings\volumesubtitlefont
\volumetitleshift \volumesubtitlesecondlineindent #1 \par}
\ifpoemcontentson
\literalcontents{{\contentsvolumesubtitlefont\contentsvolumesubtitleindent
#1\par\nobreak}}
\fi
\iftextnoteson\iftextnotesatend
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\backmattervolumesubtitlefont\ #1}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par \string\backmattertextfont}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\volumesubtitlemiddleline}[1]{{\middlelinesettings\volumesubtitlefont
%\volumetitleshift
\volumesubtitlesecondlineindent #1 \par}
\ifpoemcontentson
\literalcontents{{\contentsvolumesubtitlefont\contentsvolumesubtitleindent
#1\par\nobreak}}
\fi
\iftextnoteson\iftextnotesatend
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\backmattervolumesubtitlefont\ #1}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par \string\backmattertextfont}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\volumesubtitlelastline}[1]{{\lastlinesettings\volumesubtitlefont
%\volumetitleshift
\volumesubtitlesecondlineindent #1 \par}
\ifpoemcontentson
\literalcontents{{\contentsvolumesubtitlefont\contentsvolumesubtitleindent
#1\par\medskip\nobreak}}
\fi
\iftextnoteson\iftextnotesatend
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\backmattervolumesubtitlefont\ #1}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par \string\backmattertextfont}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\volumesectiontitle}[1]{\clearpage\thispagestyle{volumefirststyle}
\ifcentertitleson\begin{center} {\volumesubtitlefont\textbf{#1}}
\end{center}
\else \volumesectiontitleindent {\volumesubtitlefont\textbf{#1}}
\fi\bigskip\bigskip
\ifpoemcontentson
\literalcontents{\goodbreak{\ifcentertitleson\contentsvolumesubtitlefont #1\par\nobreak\else
\contentsvolumesectiontitleindent #1 \par\nobreak\fi}}
\fi
\iftextnoteson\iftextnotesatend
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\notesvolumetitlepenalty}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par \string\begin{bf}}
\immediate\write\textnotes{#1 \string\end{bf}}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\volumesectiontitlefirstline}[1]{\firstlinesettings\clearpage\thispagestyle{volumefirststyle}
\ifcentertitleson\begin{center} {\volumesubtitlefont\textbf{#1}}
\end{center}
\else \volumesectiontitleindent {\volumesubtitlefont\textbf{#1}\par}
\fi% \bigskip\bigskip
\ifpoemcontentson
\literalcontents{\goodbreak{\ifcentertitleson\contentsvolumesubtitlefont #1\par\nobreak\else
\contentsvolumesectiontitleindent #1 \par\nobreak\fi}}
\fi
\iftextnoteson\iftextnotesatend
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\notesvolumetitlepenalty}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par \string\begin{bf}}
\immediate\write\textnotes{#1 \string\end{bf}}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\volumesectiontitlemiddleline}[1]{\middlelinesettings
%\clearpage\thispagestyle{volumefirststyle}
\ifcentertitleson\begin{center} {\volumesubtitlefont\textbf{#1}}
\end{center}
\else \volumesectiontitleindent {\volumesubtitlefont\textbf{#1}\par}
\fi% \bigskip\bigskip
\ifpoemcontentson
\literalcontents{\goodbreak{\ifcentertitleson\contentsvolumesubtitlefont #1\par\nobreak\else
\contentsvolumesectiontitleindent #1 \par\nobreak\fi}}
\fi
\iftextnoteson\iftextnotesatend
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\notesvolumetitlepenalty}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par \string\begin{bf}}
\immediate\write\textnotes{#1 \string\end{bf}}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\volumesectiontitlelastline}[1]{\lastlinesettings
%\clearpage\thispagestyle{volumefirststyle}
\ifcentertitleson\begin{center} {\volumesubtitlefont\textbf{#1}}
\end{center}
\else \volumesectiontitleindent {\volumesubtitlefont\textbf{#1}}
\fi\bigskip\bigskip
\ifpoemcontentson
\literalcontents{\goodbreak{\ifcentertitleson\contentsvolumesubtitlefont #1\par\nobreak\else
\contentsvolumesectiontitleindent #1 \par\nobreak\fi}}
\fi
\iftextnoteson\iftextnotesatend
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\notesvolumetitlepenalty}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par \string\begin{bf}}
\immediate\write\textnotes{#1 \string\end{bf}}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\par}
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}
\fi\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Commands for setting titles of poems and sequences}
% First, commands for sending labels to the table of contents and to
% the notes sections. Since these are internal commands, not intended
% to be issued in the body of the text, they might have been marked out
% with ``at'' signs to prevent accidental redefinition. But since they
% are repeatedly written out to the external files, it seemed more
% economical to run the risk of redefinition than to write out
% |\makeatletter| and |\makeatother| with every note.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\makepoemlabel}[1]{\label{#1}}
\newcommand{\argpageref}[1]{\pageref{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsubsection{Poem Titles}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitle}\label{poemtitlecode}
% All of the other commands in this section are variations on this
% one, changing the penalties, the skips, the indentations, and the
% fonts. The command breaks into three sections. First, the title
% is set in the text. |\poemtitlepenalty| tests whether there is
% room for the title and the first couple of lines. |\poemtitlefont|
% globally sets the fonts for all poem titles. You can put the
% argument in an |\hbox{}| to make sure that the poem title is not
% broken across two lines, and the |\label| records the page for the
% contents and notes sections. |\afterpoemtitleskip| is the amount
% of white space after a poem title. |\fulltitleholder| and
% |\@compoundlabelscratch| record the title for concatenation later.
% All of these commands can manage titles with control sequences in
% them, such as for italics or international characters. In an
% earlier version there were special commands for such titles, using
% two arguments (one with the control sequence, one without it).
% Those commands are no longer necessary, but have been retained for
% backward compatibility with earlier versions.
%
% Second, the poem is entered in the external file for the table of
% contents. |\contentsindentone| sets it in one level in the hierarchy
% of indentations, and |\contentspoemtitlefont| is the type size used
% for poems in the table of contents. The |\pageref{}| holds the page
% number of the poem.
%
% Third, a new paragraph is opened in the textual notes for textual
% collations. |\@poempagetotextnotes{}| sends the page number to the
% textual notes. |\@poemtitletotextnotes{}| sends the title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\m@kep@emlabel}{\ifsinglelinetitle%
\addtocounter{poemnumber}{1}%
\makepoemlabel{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else\iftitlefirstline%
\addtocounter{poemnumber}{1}%
\makepoemlabel{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else \relax
\fi
\fi
}
\newcommand{\m@ken@teholder}[1]{%
\ifsinglelinetitle
\fulltitleholder={#1}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else\iftitlefirstline
\fulltitleholder={#1}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else\iftitlemiddleline
\titlesofar=\fulltitleholder
\titleincrement={~#1}%
\global\edef\titleconcat{\the\titlesofar \the\titleincrement}%
\fulltitleholder=\expandafter{\titleconcat}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else
\titlesofar=\fulltitleholder
\titleincrement={~#1}%
\global\edef\titleconcat{\the\titlesofar \the\titleincrement}%
\fulltitleholder=\expandafter{\titleconcat}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
}
\newif\ifcentertitleson
\newcommand{\centertitles}{\centertitlesontrue\centerepigraphsontrue}
\makeatletter
\newcommand{\set@p@emtitle}[6]{\iftitlesatleftversemargin%
{\begin{pmclverse}\addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\leftmargini}{#2 #3 #4 #1 #5} \end{pmclverse}}%
\else%
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{#6}%
{#2}%
{#3 \begin{titleentryenvironment}%
{{\ifnormaltitleindentation #4 #1%
\else \ifcentertitleson \begin{center} #1 \end{center} \else #1\fi\fi}}%
\end{titleentryenvironment}}%
{#5}%
\m@kep@emlabel
\m@ken@teholder{#1}%
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{\z@}\fi}
%\newcommand{\set@p@emtitle}[6]{\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{#6}%
%{#2}%
%{#3 \begin{titleentryenvironment}%
%{\ifcentertitleson\begin{center}#1\end{center}\else #4 #1\fi}%
%\end{titleentryenvironment}}%
%{#5}%
%\m@kep@emlabel
%\m@ken@teholder{#1}%
%\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{\z@}}
%
%%% special version for subtitles
\newcommand{\set@p@emsubtitle}[6]{\iftitlesatleftversemargin%
{\begin{pmclverse}\addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\leftmargini}{#2 #3 #4 #1 #5} \end{pmclverse}}%
\else%
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{#6}%
{#2}%
{#3 \begin{titleentryenvironment}%
{{\ifnormaltitleindentation #4 #1%
\else \ifcentertitleson \begin{center} #1 \end{center} \else #1\fi\fi}}%
\end{titleentryenvironment}}%
{#5}%
%\m@kep@emlabel
%\m@ken@teholder{#1}%
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{\z@}\fi}
\newcommand{\setcontentsleaders}[1]{%
\def\contentsleaders{#1\nobreak%
}}
\setcontentsleaders{~/~}
\newcommand{\c@ntentsinfo}[4]{\ifpoemcontentson
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\setlength\string\contentsentryoverrun\string{#4\string}}%
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\begin\string{contentsentryenvironment\string}}%
\literalcontents{#2{#3#1}}%
\ifputpagenumberincontents
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\contentsleaders}%
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\pageref
\string{poem\thepoemnumber\string}}%
\else
\literalcontents{\relax}%
\fi
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\end\string{contentsentryenvironment\string}}%
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\par}%
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\setlength\string\contentsentryoverrun
\string{\string\contentsindentoneamount\string}}%
\fi
}
\newif\ifputtitleinnotes
\puttitleinnotestrue
\newcommand{\t@xtnotesinfo}[1]{\iftextnoteson
\iftextnotesatend
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\notespoemclubpenalty}%
\ifputpagenumberinnotes
\@poempagetotextnotes{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\fi
\ifputtitleinnotes
\@poemtitletotextnotes{#1}%
\fi
% \else
% \relax
\fi\fi
}
\newlength{\lefttitlemargin}
\newcommand{\leftaligntitlespace}{\hspace{\lefttitlemargin}}
\newif\ifleftaligntitles % title flush with left margin of centered poem
\leftaligntitlesfalse % default value
\newcommand{\left@ligntitleblock}{\rightmargin \z@%%
\setlength{\lefttitlemargin}{\linewidth}%
\addtolength{\lefttitlemargin}{-\versewidth}%
\addtolength{\lefttitlemargin}{-0.5\lefttitlemargin}
}
%
\newcommand{\poemtitle}[1]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
}
\newcommand{\poemtitlenocontents}[1]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
}
\newcommand{\poemtitlebaretitle}[1]{%
\set@p@emsubtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
}
\newcommand{\poemtitleonlycontents}[1]{%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}%
}
\newcommand{\poemtitleonlynotes}[1]{%
\m@kep@emlabel
\m@ken@teholder{#1}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
}
\newcommand{\poemtitlenonotes}[1]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitleitalic} Poems with italic titles or other
% formatting (such as |\hour{}|) take two arguments. The second
% argument is discarded. This command is to maintain backward compatibility
% with earlier versions.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtitleitalic}[2]{%
\poemtitle{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% For poem subtitles, see the entry on |\sequencesectionsubtitle{}|.
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlefirstline}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlemiddleline}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlelastline}
% Next, macros for setting multiline poem titles. Notice the special larger
% penalty for page breaks in the middle of multiple line title.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\firstlinesettings}{\singlelinetitlefalse
\titlefirstlinetrue
\putpagenumberincontentsfalse
\putpagenumberinnotestrue}
\newcommand{\middlelinesettings}{\singlelinetitlefalse
\titlemiddlelinetrue
\putpagenumberincontentsfalse
\putpagenumberinnotesfalse}
\newcommand{\lastlinesettings}{\singlelinetitlefalse
\titlelastlinetrue
\putpagenumberincontentstrue
\putpagenumberinnotesfalse}
\newcommand{\restoresinglelinesettings}{\putpagenumberinnotestrue
\putpagenumberincontentstrue
\titlefirstlinefalse
\titlemiddlelinefalse
\titlelastlinefalse
\singlelinetitletrue}
\newcommand{\poemtitlefirstline}[1]{
\firstlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\multilinetitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
% \end{macrocode}
% Notice the use of token registers and |\edef| here to concatenate the first and second
% lines.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemtitlemiddleline}[1]{%
\middlelinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\poemtitlelastline}[1]{%
\lastlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% Titles for sections of poems, and multi-line titles of sections
% of poems
% \begin{macro}{\poemsectiontitle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemsectiontitlefirstline}
% \begin{macro}{\poemsectiontitlemiddleline}
% \begin{macro}{\poemsectiontitlelastline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemsectiontitle}[1]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\poemsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\titleindentamount}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemsectiontitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
}
\newcommand{\poemsectiontitlefirstline}[1]{%
\firstlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\multilinetitlepenalty}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\poemsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\poemsectiontitleindentamount}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemsectiontitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\poemsectiontitlemiddleline}[1]{%
\middlelinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\relax}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\poemsectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\poemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemsectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\poemsectiontitlelastline}[1]{%
\lastlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\poemsectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\poemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemsectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\poemsectiontitlenocontents}
% \begin{macro}{\poemsectionbaretitle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemsubsectiontitle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlenotitle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemtitlenotitleitalic}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\poemsectiontitlenocontents}[1]{%
\sequencesubsectiontitlenocontents{#1}}%
\newcommand{\poemfirstsectiontitle}[1]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\poemsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\poemsectiontitleindentamount}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemsectiontitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
}
\newcommand{\poemfirstsectiontitlebaretitle}[1]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\poemsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\poemsectiontitleindentamount}}
\newcommand{\poemsectiontitlebaretitle}[1]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\titleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\titleindentamount}%
}
\newcommand{\poemsubsectiontitle}[1]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\poemsubsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\poemsubsectiontitleindentamount}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemsubsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemsubsectiontitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
}
\newcommand{\poemtitlenotitle}[1]{%
\m@kep@emlabel
\m@ken@teholder{#1}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentsindenttwoamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
}
\newcommand{\poemtitlenotitleitalic}[2]{%
\poemtitlenotitle{1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsubsection{Poetic Sequences: Setting the Main Title}
% \begin{macro}{\sequencetitle}
% Variants here for multiple line titles and titles with font
% commands. Also some all-purpose kludges to work around other problems.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencetitle}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\sequencetitlepenalty}{\sequencetitlefont}
{\sequencetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\aftersequencetitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}
\putpagenumberincontentsfalse
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencetitleindent}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
{\contentssequencetitleindentamount}
\putpagenumberincontentstrue
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\sequencetitlefirstline}
% \begin{macro}{\sequencetitlemiddleline}
% \begin{macro}{\sequencetitlelastline}
% To set the title of a poetic sequence if it requires several lines
% to do so.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencetitlefirstline}[1]{
\firstlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\multilinesequencepenalty}{\sequencetitlefont}
{\sequencetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\z@}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencetitleindent}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
{\contentssequencetitleindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencetitlemiddleline}[1]{
\middlelinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\sequencetitlefont}
{\sequencetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\z@}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencetitlesecondlineindent}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
{\contentssequencetitlesecondlineindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencetitlelastline}[1]{
\lastlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\sequencetitlefont}
{\sequencetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\aftersequencetitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencetitlesecondlineindent}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
{\contentssequencetitlesecondlineindent}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencesubtitle}[1]{
\set@p@emsubtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\sequencetitlefont}
{\sequencesubtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\aftersequencetitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesubtitleindent}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
{\contentssequencesubtitleindentamount}
%\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
\newcommand{\sequencesubtitlefirstline}[1]{\firstlinesettings
\set@p@emsubtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\sequencetitlefont}
{\sequencesubtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\aftersequencetitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindenttwo}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
{\contentsindentthreeamount}
%\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencesubtitlemiddleline}[1]{\middlelinesettings
\set@p@emsubtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\sequencetitlefont}
{\sequencesubtitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\aftersequencetitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesubtitlesecondlineindent}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
{\contentssequencesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}
%\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencesubtitlelastline}[1]{\lastlinesettings
\set@p@emsubtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\sequencetitlefont}
{\sequencesubtitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\aftersequencetitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesubtitlesecondlineindent}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
{\contentssequencesubtitlesecondlineindentamount}
%\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \subsubsection{Sections of poetic sequences}
% \begin{macro}{\sequencesectiontitle}
% First, the easy case: a simple section of a poetic sequence.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitle}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\sequencefirstsectiontitle}
% The first poem in a sequence is a special case.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsectiontitle}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip}{\poemtitlefont}
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\sequencesectiontitlenonotes}
% If you don't have any notes on a sequence section, it seems a shame
% to open an entry in the textual notes for that section:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencetitlenonotes}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\sequencetitlefont}
{\sequencetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\aftersequencetitleskip\nobreak}{\sequencetitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencetitleindent}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
{\contentssequencetitleindentamount}
%\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitlenonotes}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount}
%\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% For multiple line titles of sequence sections
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitlefirstline}[1]{
\firstlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\multilinetitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitlemiddleline}[1]{
\middlelinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\poemtitlefont}
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitlelastline}[1]{
\lastlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\poemtitlefont}
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
% \end{macrocode}
% The following macros are
% to kludge around situations where the section title is just a number. This
% macro has two arguments. Originally, the first was the title of the section.
% The second is the title of the sequence as a whole. I've retained
% the second argument for backward compatibility with earlier versions, but
% you can set it to anything, since it's discarded now.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsectiontitlenocontents}[2]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip}{\poemtitlefont}
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
%\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindenttwo}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitlenocontents}[2]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
%\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindenttwo}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% If the first section of a sequence is a multiple line title, the
% following macros can handle the special problems that situation poses.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsectiontitlefirstline}[1]{
\firstlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip}{\poemtitlefont}
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsectiontitlemiddleline}[1]{
\sequencesectiontitlemiddleline{#1}}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsectiontitlelastline}[1]
{\sequencesectiontitlelastline{#1}}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsectiontitlenonotes}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip}{\poemtitlefont}
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount}
%\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\sequencesectionsubtitle}
% \begin{macro}{\poemsubtitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newcommand{\sequencesectionsubtitle}[1]{{\subsectiontitlefont \hbox{\titleindent #1}}
% \nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak
% }
\newcommand{\sequencesectionsubtitle}[1]{\set@p@emsubtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip}
{\subsectiontitlefont}{\sequencesectionsubtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\sequencesectionsubtitleindentamount}
}
\newcommand{\sequencesectionsubtitlefirstline}[1]{\firstlinesettings
\set@p@emsubtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip}
{\subsectiontitlefont}{\sequencesectionsubtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\sequencesectionsubtitleindentamount}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencesectionsubtitlemiddleline}[1]{\middlelinesettings
\set@p@emsubtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip}
{\subsectiontitlefont}{\sequencesectionsubtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\sequencesectionsubtitleindentamount}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencesectionsubtitlelastline}[1]{\lastlinesettings
\set@p@emsubtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip}
{\subsectiontitlefont}{\sequencesectionsubtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\sequencesectionsubtitleindentamount}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\poemsubtitle}[1]{\set@p@emsubtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip}
{\subsectiontitlefont}{\poemsubtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\titleindentamount}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% Another (former) kludge for special situations:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitleitalicnonotes}[2]
{\sequencesectiontitlenonotes{#1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% Italic titles used to require two arguments. These commands
% are retained only for backward compatibility.
%
% \begin{macro}{\sequencesectiontitleitalic}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitleitalic}[2]{
\sequencesectiontitle{#1}}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitlefirstlineitalic}[2]
{\sequencesectiontitlefirstline{#1}}
\newcommand{\sequencesectiontitlebaretitle}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}
{\titleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\titleindentamount}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsubsection{Subsections of sequences}
% \begin{macro}{\sequencesubsectiontitle}
% Continuing several levels down: macros for setting subsections and
% subsubsections of sequences.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sequencesubsectiontitle}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
\newcommand{\sequencesubsectiontitlenocontents}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
%\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentthree}{\contentspoemtitlefont}{\contentsindentfouramount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsubsectiontitle}[1]
{\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsubsectiontitlenocontents}[1]
{\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
%\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentthree}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
%{\contentsindentfouramount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
\newcommand{\sequencesubsectiontitlefirstline}[1]{
\firstlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\multilinetitlepenalty}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencesubsectiontitlemiddleline}[1]{
\middlelinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\sequencesubsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesubsectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesubsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencesubsectiontitlelastline}[1]{
\lastlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesubsectiontitlesecondlineindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesubsectiontitlesecondlineindentamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencesubsubsectiontitle}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindent}
{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindentamount}
%\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesubsubsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
%{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindentmount} % 313
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
\newcommand{\sequencesubsubsectiontitlenocontents}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindentamount}
%\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentfour}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
%{\contentsindentfiveamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsubsubsectiontitlenocontents}[1]{
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}
{\sequencesubsubsectiontitleindentamount}
%\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentfour}{\contentspoemtitlefont}{\contentsindentfiveamount}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsubsectiontitlefirstline}[1]{
\firstlinesettings
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}
{\sequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\sequencesubsectiontitleindentamount}
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}
{\contentssequencesubsectiontitleindent}
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
\restoresinglelinesettings
}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsubsectiontitlemiddleline}[1]{
\sequencesubsectiontitlemiddleline{#1}}
\newcommand{\sequencefirstsubsectiontitlelastline}[1]{
\sequencesubsectiontitlelastline{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Interjections in sequences, as in Robert Penn Warren's \emph{Or Else}.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\interjectiontitlefirstline}[1]{
\sequencefirstsubsectiontitlefirstline{#1}}
\newcommand{\interjectiontitlelastline}[1]{
\sequencefirstsubsectiontitlelastline{#1}
}
\newcommand{\interjectiontitlemiddleline}[1]{
\sequencefirstsubsectionmiddleline{#1}
}
% \subsubsection{Titles and Notes with marginal marks}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\setmargpoemtitle}
% Titles with a marginal reference to the notes giving the page in
% the notes where a comment on the poem appears, as in Altenberg's
% Heredia edition.\label{JHpoemtitle} |\setmargpoemtitle| takes as
% its second argument anything you want to add to the line while the
% title is being processed. |\JHpoemtitle| is just
% |\setmargpoemtitle| with the second argument passed to |\JHlabel|,
% which actually makes the marginal mark.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\JHtextwidth}
\setlength{\JHtextwidth}{\textwidth}
\newlength{\JHmarginparsep}
\setlength{\JHmarginparsep}{0pt}
\newlength{\JHmarginparvshift}
\setlength{\JHmarginparvshift}{0pt}
\newlength{\JHmarginparwidth}
\setlength{\JHmarginparwidth}{\marginparwidth}
\newlength{\JHmarginparsepmin}
\setlength{\JHmarginparsepmin}{\marginparsepmin}
\newlength{\JHtitlemarginparsep}%
\setlength{\JHtitlemarginparsep}{\JHmarginparsep}%
\newif{\ifJHmarkstoleft}
\JHmarkstolefttrue
\newif{\ifJHmarkstoright}
\JHmarkstorightfalse
\newif{\ifJHmarkstoouter}
\JHmarkstoouterfalse
\newif{\ifJHmarkstogutter}
\JHmarkstogutterfalse
\newif{\ifJHmarginparswitch}
\JHmarginparswitchfalse
\newif{\ifJHreversemarginpar}
\JHreversemarginparfalse
\newcommand{\JHmarksleft}{%
\JHmarkstolefttrue%
\JHmarkstorightfalse%
\JHmarkstoouterfalse%
\JHmarkstogutterfalse%
\JHmarginparswitchfalse%
\JHreversemarginparfalse%
\reversemarginpar
}
\newcommand{\JHmarksright}{%
\JHmarkstoleftfalse%
\JHmarkstorighttrue%
\JHmarkstoouterfalse%
\JHmarkstogutterfalse%
\JHmarginparswitchfalse%
\JHreversemarginparfalse%
\normalmarginpar
}
% JHmarksright is the default
\JHmarksright
\newcommand{\JHmarksouter}{%
\JHmarkstoleftfalse%
\JHmarkstorightfalse%
\JHmarkstooutertrue%
\JHmarkstogutterfalse%
\JHmarginparswitchtrue%
\JHreversemarginparfalse%
\@mparswitchtrue
}
\newcommand{\JHmarksgutter}{%
\JHmarkstoleftfalse%
\JHmarkstorightfalse%
\JHmarkstoouterfalse%
\JHmarkstoguttertrue%
\JHmarginparswitchtrue%
\JHreversemarginpartrue%
\@mparswitchtrue
\reversemarginpar
}
% jhrightmarginpar command for notes % right side
\newcommand{\JHrightmarginpar}[1]{%
\pmclbsphack\strut\vadjust{%
\rlap{\kern-\parindent%
\kern\JHtextwidth\kern\JHmarginparsep% at right
\setbox0=\vtop to 0pt{% added
\begin{minipage}[t]{\JHmarginparwidth}% added
#1%
\end{minipage}%
\vss}%
\vtop to 0pt{\kern\JHmarginparvshift% default should be 0pt
\kern-\dp\strutbox \kern-\ht0 \box0 \vss}}}\pmclesphack}%
% jhleftmarginpar command for notes % left side
\newcommand{\JHleftmarginpar}[1]{%
\pmclbsphack\strut\vadjust{% changed
\rlap{\kern-\parindent%
\kern -\JHmarginparsep \kern -\JHmarginparwidth% at left
\setbox0=\vtop to 0pt{
\begin{minipage}[t]{\JHmarginparwidth}% added
#1%
\end{minipage}%
\vss}% changed
\vtop to 0pt{\kern\JHmarginparvshift % default should be 0pt
\kern-\dp\strutbox \kern-\ht0 \box0 \vss}}}\pmclesphack}% changed
%
%\newcommand{\JHoutermarginpar}{%
%%\marginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}
%\checkoddpage%
%\ifoddpage%
%\JHrightmarginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}%
%\else% below is for even pages
%\JHleftmarginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}%
%\fi%
%}
\newcommand{\JHoutermarginpar}{%
%\marginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}
\strictpagechecktrue%
\checkoddpage%
\ifoddpage%
\JHswitchmarginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}%
\else% below is for even pages
\JHswitchmarginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}%
\fi%
}
%
%\newcommand{\JHguttermarginpar}{%
%%\marginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}
%\checkoddpage%
%\ifoddpage%
% \JHleftmarginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}%
%\else% below is for even pages
% \JHrightmarginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}%
%\fi%
%}
%
\newcommand{\JHguttermarginpar}{%
\strictpagechecktrue
\checkoddpage%
\ifoddpage%
\JHswitchmarginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}%
\else% below is for even pages
\JHswitchmarginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}%
\fi%
}
%
% jhswitchmarginpar command for notes in gutter and outer
%
\newcommand{\JHswitchmarginpar}{\@dblarg{\@JHswitchmarginpar}}
%\long\def\@pmclsidepar[#1]#2{\@bsphack\leavevmode\vadjust{%
\long\def\@JHswitchmarginpar[#1]#2{\@bsphack\strut\vadjust{% added
\checkoddpage
\ifJHmarginparswitch
\ifJHreversemarginpar
\ifoddpage
\oddpagefalse
\else
\oddpagetrue
\fi
\fi
\else
\oddpagetrue
\ifJHreversemarginpar
\oddpagefalse
\fi
\fi
\rlap{\kern-\parindent
\if@twocolumn
\if@firstcolumn % put at left
\kern -\JHmarginparsep \kern -\JHmarginparwidth % at left
\else % put at right
\kern \columnwidth \kern \JHmarginparsep % at right
\fi
\else
\ifoddpage % put at right
\kern \textwidth \kern \JHmarginparsep % at right
\else % put at left
\kern -\JHmarginparsep \kern -\JHmarginparwidth % at left
\fi
\fi
% \vbox to 0pt{%
% \kern \JHmarginparvshift% % vertical shift to align top text lines
% \begin{minipage}{\JHmarginparwidth}%
\setbox0=\vtop to 0pt{% added
\begin{minipage}[t]{\JHmarginparwidth}% added
\ifoddpage #2\else #1\fi%
\end{minipage}%
% \vss}}}\@esphack}
\vss}% added
\vtop to 0pt{\kern\JHmarginparvshift % default should be 0pt
\kern-\dp\strutbox \kern-\ht0 \box0 \vss}}}\@esphack}% added
%
% commands for placing the marginal marks for titles
% right side
\newcommand{\JHrighttitlemarginpar}[1]{%
\pmclbsphack\strut\vadjust{%
\rlap{\kern-\parindent%
\kern\textwidth\kern\JHtitlemarginparsep% at right
\ifcentertitleson%
\kern-.5\JHtextwidth\kern\marginparsepmin%
\fi%
\setbox0=\vtop to 0pt{% added
\begin{minipage}[t]{\JHmarginparwidth}% added
#1%
\end{minipage}%
\vss}%
\vtop to 0pt{\kern\JHmarginparvshift% default should be 0pt
\kern-\dp\strutbox \kern-\ht0 \box0 \vss}}}\pmclesphack}%
%
% commands for placing the marginal marks for titles
% left side
\newcommand{\JHlefttitlemarginpar}[1]{%
\pmclbsphack\strut\vadjust{% changed
\rlap{\kern-\parindent%
\kern -\JHtitlemarginparsep \kern -\JHmarginparwidth% at left
\ifcentertitleson%
\kern-.5\JHtextwidth\kern\marginparsepmin%
\fi%
\setbox0=\vtop to 0pt{%
\begin{minipage}[t]{\JHmarginparwidth}% added
#1%
\end{minipage}%
\vss}% changed
\vtop to 0pt{\kern\JHmarginparvshift % default should be 0pt
\kern-\dp\strutbox \kern-\ht0 \box0 \vss}}}\pmclesphack}% changed
%
% command for JHtitlemarks in title in outer margin or in gutter
\newcommand{\JHswitchtitlemarginpar}{\@dblarg{\@JHswitchtitlemarginpar}}
%\long\def\@pmclsidepar[#1]#2{\@bsphack\leavevmode\vadjust{%
\long\def\@JHswitchtitlemarginpar[#1]#2{\@bsphack\strut\vadjust{% added
\checkoddpage%
\ifJHmarginparswitch%
\ifJHreversemarginpar%
\ifoddpage%
\oddpagefalse%
\else%
\oddpagetrue%
\fi%
\fi%
\else%
\oddpagetrue%
\ifJHreversemarginpar%
\oddpagefalse%
\fi%
\fi%
\rlap{\kern-\parindent%
\if@twocolumn%
\if@firstcolumn % put at left
\kern -\JHtitlemarginparsep \kern -\marginparwidth % at left
\kern-.5\JHtextwidth\kern\marginparsepmin%
\else % put at right
\kern \columnwidth \kern \JHtitlemarginparsep % at right
\fi%
\else%
\ifoddpage % put at right
\kern \textwidth \kern \JHtitlemarginparsep % at right
\ifcentertitleson%
\kern-.5\JHtextwidth\kern\marginparsepmin%
\fi%
\else % put at left
\kern -\JHtitlemarginparsep \kern -\marginparwidth % at left
\ifcentertitleson%
\kern-.5\JHtextwidth\kern\marginparsepmin%
\fi%
\fi%
\fi%
% \vbox to 0pt{%
% \kern \pmclsideparvshift% % vertical shift to align top text lines
% \begin{minipage}{\marginparwidth}%
\setbox0=\vtop to 0pt{% added
\begin{minipage}[t]{\marginparwidth}% added
\ifoddpage #2\else #1\fi%
\end{minipage}%
% \vss}}}\@esphack}
\vss}% added
\vtop to 0pt{\kern\JHmarginparvshift % default should be 0pt
\kern-\dp\strutbox \kern-\ht0 \box0 \vss}}}\@esphack}% added
%
\newcommand{\set@margp@emtitle}[7]{\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{#6}%
{#2}%
{#3 \begin{titleentryenvironment}%
{\ifcentertitleson\begin{center}#4 #1 #7\end{center}\else #4 #1
#7\fi}\end{titleentryenvironment}}%
{#5}%
\m@kep@emlabel%
\m@ken@teholder{#1}%
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{\z@}}
%% subtitle version
\newcommand{\set@margp@emsubtitle}[7]{\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{#6}%
{#2}%
{#3 \begin{titleentryenvironment}%
{\ifcentertitleson\begin{center}#4 #1 #7\end{center}\else #4 #1
#7\fi}\end{titleentryenvironment}}%
{#5}%
%\m@kep@emlabel%
%\m@ken@teholder{#1}%
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{\z@}}
% user version
\newcommand{\setmargpoemtitle}[2]{%
\set@margp@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\sequencetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}{#2}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentone}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentsindenttwoamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\sources{\label{#2}}%
}
%\newcommand{\set@margp@emtitle}[7]{\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{#6}%
%{#2}%
%{#3 \begin{titleentryenvironment}%
%{#4 #1 #7}\end{titleentryenvironment}}%
%{#5}%
%\m@kep@emlabel%
%\m@ken@teholder{#1}%
%\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{\z@}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\JHpoemtitle} Macros to set marginal line
% references.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newcommand{\JHpoemtitle}[2]{%
% \setmargpoemtitle{#1}{\JHlabel{#2}}%
% }
\@mparswitchfalse % so the title marker won't switch sides on alternate pages
\newcommand{\JHpoemtitle}[2]{%
\set@margp@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\sequencetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
{\JHlabel{#2}}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencetitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentssequencetitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\sources{\label{#2}}%
}
\newcommand{\JHprosesectiontitle}[2]{%
\set@margp@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\sequencetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
{\JHlabel{#2}}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencetitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentssequencetitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\sources{\label{#2}}%
}
%\newcommand{\JHlabel}[1]{%
%\marginpar{{\scriptsize{\the\titlemargrefmarker~p.~\pageref{#1}}}}}
\newcommand{\JHlabel}[1]{%
\ifJHmarkstoright\JHrighttitlemarginpar
{{\scriptsize{\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{#1}}}}
\fi
\ifJHmarkstoleft
\JHlefttitlemarginpar{{\scriptsize{\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{#1}}}}
\fi
\ifJHmarkstoouter
\JHswitchtitlemarginpar{{\scriptsize{\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{#1}}}}
\fi
\ifJHmarkstogutter
\JHswitchtitlemarginpar{{\scriptsize{\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{#1}}}}
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\JHsequencetitle} Macros to set marginal page
% references for sequences, sequence sections, poem sections, poem
% subtitles, dedications, and epigraphs.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\JHsequencetitle}[2]{%
\set@margp@emtitle{#1}{\sequencetitlepenalty}{\sequencetitlefont}%
{\sequencetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\aftersequencetitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
{\JHlabel{#2}}%
\putpagenumberincontentsfalse%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentone}{\contentssequencetitlefont}%
{\contentsindenttwoamount}%
\putpagenumberincontentstrue%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\sources{\label{#2}}%
}
\newcommand{\JHsequencesectiontitle}[2]{%
\set@margp@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\sequencesectiontitleindentamount}{\JHlabel{#2}}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentsindentthreeamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\sources{\label{#2}}%
}
\newcommand{\JHsequencefirstsectiontitle}[2]{%
\set@margp@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\sequencesectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\titleindentamount}{\JHlabel{#2}}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentssequencesectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentssequencesectiontitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\sources{\label{#2}}%
}
\newcommand{\JHpoemsectiontitle}[2]{%
\set@margp@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\poemsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\poemsectiontitleindentamount}{\JHlabel{#2}}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemsectiontitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\sources{\label{#2}}%
}
\newcommand{\JHpoemfirstsectiontitle}[2]{%
\set@margp@emtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\poemsectiontitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\\poemsectiontitleindentamount}{\JHlabel{#2}}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsi\poemsectiontitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contents\poemsectiontitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\sources{\label{#2}}%
}
\newcommand{\JHsequencesectionsubtitle}[2]{%
\set@margp@emsubtitle{#1}{\par\nobreak}{\subsectiontitlefont}%
{\titleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}%
{\titleindentamount}{\JHlabel{#2}}%
\sources{\label{#2}}%
}
\newcommand{\JHpoemsubtitle}[2]{\JHsequencesectionsubtitle{#1}{#2}
}
\newcommand{\JHdedication}[2]{\nopagebreak\afterpoemtitleskip\testforcenterepigraph%
\begin{epigraphquote}%
\emph{#1}\JHlabel{#2}\end{epigraphquote}%
\sources{\label{#2}}\afterpoemtitleskip\nopagebreak}
\newcommand{\JHepigraph}[2]{\nopagebreak\afterpoemtitleskip\testforcenterepigraph%
\begin{epigraphquote}%
\emph{#1}\JHlabel{#2}\end{epigraphquote}%
\sources{\label{#2}}\afterpoemtitleskip\nopagebreak}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\backmattersectiontitle} Macros to set the titles of back matter sections
% such as textual notes.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\backmattersectiontitle}[1]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\volumetitlefont}%
{\relax}{\backmattersink}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{contentsindentone}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentsindenttwoamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\margreftextnote} Macros to set marginal page
% references showing where in the apparatus a comment upon the
% marked line is to be found. |\margrefspecial{}| is for occasions
% when you might need to set the label by hand. For instance, suppose
% you have several textnotes on a line, and the note you wish to draw
% attention to is on a different page from the other notes.
% |\margreftextnote| under those circumstances will point only to the
% first note. Use |\margrefspecial| to point to the other note,
% giving |\margrefspecial| a unique argument, and opening that note
% with a \label{} command using the same argument.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{margrefnumber}
\setcounter{margrefnumber}{1}
\newtoks{\margrefmarker}
\margrefmarker={\dag}
\newcommand{\setmargrefmarker}[1]{\margrefmarker={#1}}
\providecommand{\settitlemargrefmarker}[1]{\titlemargrefmarker={#1}}
\newtoks{\titlemargrefmarker}
\titlemargrefmarker={\dag}
\newcommand{\makemargreflabel}{\string\label\string{margref\themargrefnumber\string}}
\newif{\ifmargrefstomargin}
\margrefstomargintrue
\newcommand{\setmargref}{\nolinebreak\begin{marginenvironment}%
\nolinebreak%
\ifJHmarkstoright%
\JHrightmarginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}%
\fi%
\ifJHmarkstoleft%
\JHleftmarginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}%
\fi%
\ifJHmarkstoouter%
\JHoutermarginpar%
\fi%
\ifJHmarkstogutter%
\JHguttermarginpar%
\fi%
\end{marginenvironment}%
\nolinebreak%
}
%\newcommand{\setmargref}
%{\marginpar{\ifmargrefstomargin\hspace*{.5\leftmargin}\fi%
%\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}
%}
% \newcommand{\setmargref}
% {\marginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{margref\themargrefnumber}}}
% }
\newcommand{\margreftextnote}{%
\iftextnoteson\addtocounter{margrefnumber}{1}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\makemargreflabel}%
\setmargref\else\relax\fi%
}
\newcommand{\margrefexplanatory}{%
\ifexplanon\addtocounter{margrefnumber}{1}%
\immediate\write\explanations{\makemargreflabel}%
\setmargref\else\relax\fi%
}
\newcommand{\margrefemendation}{%
\ifemendationson\addtocounter{margrefnumber}{1}%
\immediate\write\emendations{\makemargreflabel}%
\setmargref\else\relax\fi%
}
\newcommand{\margrefspecial}[1]{%
\marginpar{\scriptsize {\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{#1}}}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% To change other title making commands to produce titles which add
% something while processing the title, you should: 1. add one to
% the number of arguments it uses 2. replace the use of
% |\set@p@emtitle| with |\set@margp@emtitle| 3. add |{#2}| or
% |\JHlabel{#2}| or whatever as the
% last (seventh) argument to |\set@margp@emtitle|. So, to change
% |\sequencetitle{}| to |\JHsequencetitle{}{}| start with:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \newcommand{\sequencetitle}[1]{
% \set@p@emtitle{#1}{\sequencetitlepenalty}{\sequencetitlefont}
% {\sequencetitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\aftersequencetitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}
% \putpagenumberincontentsfalse
% \c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentone}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
% {\contentsindenttwoamount}
% \putpagenumberincontentstrue
% \t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
% }
% \end{verbatim}
% and change it to
% \begin{verbatim}
% \catcode`\@=11
% \newcommand{\JHsequencetitle}[2]{
% \set@margp@emtitle{#1}{\sequencetitlepenalty}{\sequencetitlefont}
% {\relax}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\aftersequencetitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}
% {\JHlabel{#2}}\putpagenumberincontentsfalse
% \c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentone}{\contentssequencetitlefont}
% {\contentsindenttwoamount}
% \putpagenumberincontentstrue
% \t@xtnotesinfo{#1}
% }
% \catcode`\@=12
% \end{verbatim}
% \subsection{~Titles with footnotes}
% \label{footnotetitles}
% \begin{macro}{\footnotepoemtitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\iftitlefootnotesatpoemend%
\titlefootnotesatpoemendfalse%
\newif\iftitlefootnotesplain%
\titlefootnotesplaintrue%
\newif\iftitlefootnoteslayered%
\titlefootnoteslayeredfalse%
%
\newcommand{\maketitlefootnoteslayered}{%
\DeclareNewFootnote[plain]{H}%
\titlefootnoteslayeredtrue%
\titlefootnotesplainfalse%
\titlefootnotesatpoemendfalse%
}
%
\newcommand{\maketitlefootnotesatpoemend}{
\titlefootnoteslayeredfalse%
\titlefootnotesplainfalse%
\titlefootnotesatpoemendtrue%
}
%
\newcommand{\maketitlefootnotesplain}{
\titlefootnoteslayeredfalse%
\titlefootnotesplaintrue%
\titlefootnotesatpoemendfalse%
}
%
\newcommand{\placetitlefootnote}[1]{\iftitlefootnoteslayered%
\footnoteH{#1}%
\fi%
\iftitlefootnotesatpoemend%
\footnotemark%
\immediate\write\poemendnotes{\string\makeatletter}%
\immediate\write\poemendnotes{\string\footnotemark\string[\the\c@footnote \string]}%
\immediate\write\poemendnotes{\string\makeatother}%
\literalpoemendnote{#1}%
\fi%
\iftitlefootnotesplain%
\footnote{#1}%
\fi%
}
%
\newcommand{\footnotepoemtitle}[2]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1\placetitlefootnote{#2}}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
}
%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\footnotepoemtitlefirstline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footnotepoemtitlefirstline}[2]{%
\firstlinesettings%
\set@p@emtitle{#1\placetitlefootnote{#2}}{\multilinetitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\restoresinglelinesettings%
}
%
\newcommand{\footnotepoemtitlemiddleline}[2]{%
\middlelinesettings%
\set@p@emtitle{#1\placetitlefootnote{#2}}{\par\nobreak}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\restoresinglelinesettings%
}
%
\newcommand{\footnotepoemtitlelastline}[2]{%
\lastlinesettings%
\set@p@emtitle{#1\placetitlefootnote{#2}}{\par\nobreak}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitlesecondlineindent}{\nobreak\par\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitlesecondlineindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
\restoresinglelinesettings%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\footnotesplitpoemtitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\footnotesplitpoemtitle}[3]{%
\set@p@emtitle{#1\placetitlefootnote{#2} #3}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1 #3}{\contentspoemtitleindent}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentspoemtitleindentamount}%
\t@xtnotesinfo{#1 #3}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Epigraphs, headnotes, attributions, dedications}
% Notice that epigraphs to volumes are handled differently from
% epigraphs to poems. Notice also the ``short'' commands, which
% are placed on the page according to the same booleans
% that control how titles are placed.
% \begin{macro}{\epigraph}
% \begin{macro}{\headnote}
% \begin{macro}{\attribution}
% \begin{macro}{\poemdedication}
% \begin{macro}{\volumededication}
% \begin{macro}{\volumeepigraph}
% \begin{macro}{\volumeattribution}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifcenterepigraphson
\centerepigraphsonfalse
\newlength{\centerepigraphindentation}
\setlength{\centerepigraphindentation}{6em}
\newlength{\normalepigraphindentation}
\setlength{\normalepigraphindentation}{1.5em}
\newcommand{\centerepigraphquote}{%
\setlength{\epigraphquoteleftmargin}{\centerepigraphindentation}
\setlength{\epigraphquoterightmargin}{\centerepigraphindentation}
}
\newcommand{\normalepigraphquote}{%
\setlength{\epigraphquoteleftmargin}{\normalepigraphindentation}
\setlength{\epigraphquoterightmargin}{\normalepigraphindentation}
}
\newcommand{\testforcenterepigraph}{\ifcenterepigraphson%
\centerepigraphquote
\else
\normalepigraphquote
\fi}
\newcommand{\epigraph}[1]{\nopagebreak\afterpoemtitleskip\testforcenterepigraph%
\begin{epigraphquote}%
\emph{#1}\end{epigraphquote}\afterpoemtitleskip\nopagebreak}
\newcommand{\headnote}[1]{\epigraph{#1}}
\newcommand{\attribution}[1]{\nopagebreak\afterpoemtitleskip\testforcenterepigraph%
\begin{epigraphquote}%
{\small\emph{#1}}\end{epigraphquote}\afterpoemtitleskip\nopagebreak}
\newcommand{\poemdedication}[1]{\nopagebreak\afterpoemtitleskip\testforcenterepigraph%
\begin{epigraphquote}%
\emph{#1}\end{epigraphquote}\afterpoemtitleskip\nopagebreak}
\providecommand{\dedication}[1]{\poemdedication{#1}}
\newcommand{\volumededication}[1]{\par\bigskip\begin{volumetitlepagequote}
\emph{#1}\end{volumetitlepagequote}}
\newcommand{\volumeepigraph}[1]{\par\bigskip\begin{volumetitlepagequote}
\emph{#1}\end{volumetitlepagequote}}
\newcommand{\volumeattribution}[1]{\par\smallskip\begin{volumetitlepagequote}
{\small \emph{#1}}\end{volumetitlepagequote}}
\newenvironment{epigraphenvironment}{\nopagebreak\afterpoemtitleskip\testforcenterepigraph%
\begin{epigraphquote}\em}{\end{epigraphquote}\afterpoemtitleskip\nopagebreak}
\newcommand{\set@short@pigraph}[1]{\iftitlesatleftversemargin%
{\begin{pmclverse}\addtolength{\leftmargin}{-\leftmargini}{\nobreak \emph{#1} \afterpoemtitleskip} \end{pmclverse}}%
\else%\iftitlesatleftversemargin
{\nobreak}%
\begin{titleentryenvironment}%
\ifnormaltitleindentation
\hspace{\normalepigraphindentation}\emph{#1}%
\else % for the \ifnormaltitleindentation
\ifcenterepigraphson
\begin{center} \emph{#1}\end{center}
\else \emph{#1}\fi % for ifcenterepigraphson
\fi %\ifnormaltitleindentation
\end{titleentryenvironment}
{\afterpoemtitleskip}%
\fi}% for the \iftitlesatleftversemargin
\newcommand{\shortpoemepigraph}[1]{\nopagebreak\afterpoemtitleskip%
\set@short@pigraph{#1}
}
\newcommand{\shortpoemdedication}[1]{\nopagebreak\afterpoemtitleskip%
\set@short@pigraph{#1}
}
\newcommand{\shortpoemattribution}[1]{\nopagebreak\afterpoemtitleskip%
\set@short@pigraph{{\small #1}}
}
\newcommand{\JHshortepigraph}[2]{\nopagebreak\afterpoemtitleskip%
\set@short@pigraph{#1}\marginpar{{\scriptsize{\the\margrefmarker~p.~\pageref{#2}}}}
\sources{\label{#2}}
}
\newcommand{\JHshortdedication}[2]{\JHshortepigraph{#1}{#2}}
\newlength{\dateindent}%
\setlength{\dateindent}{\leftmargin}%
\newcommand{\variabledateindent}{%
\setlength{\dateindent}{\linewidth}%
\addtolength{\dateindent}{-\versewidth}%
\addtolength{\dateindent}{-.5\dateindent}}
%\newcommand{\poemdate}[1]{\bigskip\begin{raggedleft}\hspace{\dateindent}#1\end{raggedleft}\bigskip}%
\newcommand{\poemdate}[1]{\iflastpoemcentered\variabledateindent%
\else\setlength{\dateindent}{\leftmargin}%
\fi%
\bigskip\begin{raggedleft}\hspace{\dateindent}#1\end{raggedleft}\bigskip}%
%
\newlength{\poemattributionindent}%
\setlength{\poemattributionindent}{\leftmargin}%
\newcommand{\variablepoemattributionindent}{%
\setlength{\poemattributionindent}{\linewidth}%
\addtolength{\poemattributionindent}{-\versewidth}%
\addtolength{\poemattributionindent}{-.5\poemattributionindent}}%
\newcommand{\poemattribution}[1]{\iflastpoemcentered\variablepoemattributionindent%
\else\setlength{\poemattributionindent}{\leftmargin}%
\fi%
\bigskip\begin{raggedleft}\hspace{\poemattributionindent}#1\end{raggedleft}\bigskip}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Tools used for making note sections} \label{notetools} The main tool is
% a dirty trick borrowed from John Lavagnino's package for endnotes,
% \textsf{endnotes}, which allows for writing out literal characters to an
% external file. The trick involves redefining the space character as
% the newline character and treating the text of the note as the body of
% a macro that |\meaning| specifies. The result is that the text is
% written to the external file in a long ribbon one word wide.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\strip#1>{}
\newcommand{\literaltextnote}[1]{\iftextnotesatend
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\textnotes{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup\fi
}
\newcommand{\literalemend}[1]{\ifemendationsatend
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\emendations{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup\fi
}
\newcommand{\literalexplain}[1]{\ifexplanatend
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\explanations{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup\fi
}
\newcommand{\literalcontents}[1]{\ifpoemcontentson
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup\fi
}
\newcommand{\literaltextnoteshort}[1]{
\iftextnotesatend
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup\fi}
\newcommand{\literalemendshort}[1]{\ifemendationsatend
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\immediate\write\emendations{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup\fi}
\newcommand{\literalexplainshort}[1]{\ifexplanatend
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\immediate\write\explanations{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup\fi}
\newcommand{\literalcontentsshort}[1]{\ifpoemcontentson
\begingroup
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup\fi}
\newcommand{\sameword}{$\sim$}
\newcommand{\missingpunct}{${}_{\wedge}$}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pmccheckifinteger}
% |\pmccheckifinteger{|\meta{num}|}| checks if \meta{num} is an integer.
% If it is, then |\ifinteger| is set TRUE, otherwise it is set FALSE.
% (Code taken from memoir class, and based on Donald Arseneau's
% |\Lpack{cite}| package).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmccheckifinteger}[1]{%
\protected@edef\@vsa{#1}%
\ifcat _\ifnum9<1\pmcgobm{#1} _\else A\fi
\integertrue%
\else
\integerfalse%
\fi%
}
\newif\ifinteger
% \begin{macro}{\pmcgobm}
% |\pmcgobm{|\meta{num}|}| is defined as \meta{num}. It could be defined as: \\
% |\newcommand{\pmcgobm}[1]{\ifx-#1\expandafter\gobm\else#1\fi}| \\
% which would remove a leading minus sign (hyphen) from its argument
% (|gobm| = gobble minus sign).
% (Code from memoir class and a posting to comp.text.tex by Donald Arseneau on 1997/07/21).
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmcgobm}[1]{#1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Commands to make notes and send info to contents}
% \begin{macro}{\setlemmarange}
% |\setlemmarange| calculates the range of line numbers for multi-line
% lemmas.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newcommand{\setlemmarange}[1]{
% \setcounter{lemmalines}{#1}
% \ifthenelse{\equal{\value{lemmalines}}{0}}{\rangelemmafalse}{\rangelemmatrue}
% \setcounter{lemmaend}{\theverselinenumber}
% \addtocounter{lemmaend}{\thelemmalines}
% }
\newcommand{\setlemmarange}[1]{%
\pmccheckifinteger{#1}%
\ifinteger
\setcounter{lemmalines}{#1}%
\ifthenelse{\equal{\value{lemmalines}}{0}}{\rangelemmafalse}{\rangelemmatrue}%
\setcounter{lemmaend}{\theverselinenumber}%
\addtocounter{lemmaend}{\thelemmalines}%
\else
\setcounterfromref{lemmaend}{#1}\rangelemmatrue
\fi
\makeatother}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\citerange}
% |\citerange| sets the range of line numbers for multi-line lemmas
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\citerange}{%
\ifrangelemma
\theverselinenumber --\thelemmaend
\else
\theverselinenumber
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\resetlemmacounters}
% |\resetlemmacounters| resets the counts for multiline lemmas.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\resetlemmacounters}{\rangelemmafalse
\setcounter{lemmalines}{0}%
\setcounter{lemmaend}{0}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\checknoteheaders}
% |\checknoteheaders| Checks and corrects the values in the running
% headers of notes sections. The running headers are of the form
% ``Notes to pages xx--yy.'' Every title and every note checks
% whether the values in the running header should be changed. This
% command essentially gives a list of strings to be written on the
% external file for the note section. When these strings are read
% back in when the file is set, they make a little program that
% recalculates the values in the headers during the processing of
% every note. Also typesets the line number or line number range in
% notes sections.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checknoteheaders}{\string\setcounter\string{notepageholdernote\string}%
\string{\thepage\string}\string\ifhmode\string\unskip\string\fi%
\string\ifthenelse\string{\string\value\string{notepageholdernote\string}>%
\string\value\string{notepageholdertitle\string}\string}%
\string{\string\mark\string{\string\thenotepageholdernote\string}\string}%
\string{\string\mark\string{\string\thenotepageholdertitle\string}\string}\string\unskip
\string\unskip\string\relax\ \citerange :\string~\string\nolinebreak}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\textnote}
% The
% basic |\textnote{}| command, on which everything else is based, has
% several parts. First, it writes out a little program
% on the external endnotes file which, when it is read back in when
% the endnotes are typeset, sets a variable with the value of
% the page of the line the note is commenting upon and checks to see
% whether that value is equal to or greater than that of previous notes
% on that page of notes. Depending upon the outcome of that test, it
% sets the value of |\mark| with the correct numbers to print the proper
% running header of the form ``Textual Notes to pp.xx--yy.'' Second, it
% sends the line number of the line it is a comment upon and the text of
% the note to the notes section. The optional first argument is the
% number of lines covered by a multiline lemma. If there is no
% optional first argument specified, the default is 0. The second
% argument is the text of the note, which includes the rest of the
% lemma, other than the line number. It is up to you to suitably
% abbreviate long lemmas.
%
%
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\iftextnotessinglepar
\newcommand{\textnote}[2][0]{%
\iftextnoteson
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\checknoteheaders}%
\literaltextnote{#2}%
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi
\resetlemmacounters
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\accidental}
% Accidentals: As it is, the command just tests to see whether
% accidentals are being included or not, and sets the accidental as a
% textnote if accidentals are being included. It would not be hard to
% divert accidentals to another external file in order to compile a
% separate list of accidentals. Accidentals, by their nature, cannot have multiline
% lemmas.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\accidental}[1]{%
\iftextnoteson%
\ifincludeaccidentals%
\iftextnotesatend\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}\fi%
\textnote{#1}%
\iftextnotesatend\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}\fi%
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tsvariant}
% \begin{macro}{\tsaccidental}
% Typescript variants. Treated like accidentals. If they are being
% collected, they are sent to the textual notes. Again, it would not be
% hard to collect them separately. Typescript variants can have
% multiline lemmas.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tsvariant}[2][0]{%
\iftextnoteson
\ifincludetypescripts%
\iftextnotesatend\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}\fi%
\textnote[#1]{#2}%
\iftextnotesatend\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}\fi%
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\tsaccidental}[1]{\iftextnoteson\ifincludetypescripts\accidental{#1}\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\tsentry}
% Typescript entries. Allows one to to selectively include or exclude
% typescript entries from lists of variants. If an entry begins with
% a comma (as it commonly will, since it will typically be a member
% of a list of entries, you need not put |\unskip| before the comma,
% since \textsf{poemscol} will do it for you. Thanks to Donald
% Arseneau for suggesting how to do this.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\tsentry}[1]{\iftextnoteson\ifincludetypescripts{\@ifnextchar,{\unskip}{%
��\@ifnextchar;{\unskip}{}%
}#1}\fi\fi\unskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\sources}
% |\sources{}| is essentially a |\textnote{}| with no line number
% and no page checking. Useful for typesetting the sources of the text
% (hence the name) and for sending literal characters to the endnotes
% file for other purposes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\sources}[1]{%
\iftextnoteson
\begingroup
\newlinechar='40
\def\next{#1}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{~Emendations and explanatory notes}
% The difference between these kinds of notes and ordinary
% |\textnotes{}| is that they must first test to see whether there have
% been any emendations or explanatory notes for the poem in question.
% If there have not been prior notes, then a new paragraph must be
% opened and the page number and title of the poem set in the note
% section.
% \begin{macro}{\titletoothernotes}
% |\titletoothernotes| sends the page and title information to the
% Emendations or Explanatory Notes sections. It is called only for
% the first emendation or explanatory note for a poem. It is designed
% so that if the user wishes to define another category of notes in
% which might not apply to all of the poems to be set --- not all
% poems, for instance, have emendations --- this command can be used
% for those notes as well.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\titletoothernotes}{\string\par
\ifputpagenumberinnotes%
\string\argpageref\string{\@compoundlabelscratch\string}%
\string\setcounterfrompageref\string{notepageholdertitle\string}%
\string{\@compoundlabelscratch\string}%
\fi%
\string\textbf\string{\ \the\fulltitleholder\string}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\emendation}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifemendationssinglepar
\newcommand{\emendation}[2][0]{
\ifemendationson
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\ifredundantemendations
\iftextnoteson
\ifrangelemma
\textnote[#1]{#2}%
\else
\textnote{#2}%
\fi % ifrangelemma}
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi% iftextnotesinglepar
\fi %iftextnoteson
\fi % ifredundantemendations
\ifnoemendyet % firstemendation
\firstemendation
\fi %noemendyet
\global\noemendyetfalse
\immediate\write\emendations{\checknoteheaders}%
\literalemend{#2}%
\ifemendationssinglepar%
\literalemend{\par}%
\fi% ifemendationssinglepar
\fi % ifemendationson
\resetlemmacounters
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% This next is an internal command,
% called by |\emendation|. There's no need to use it explicitly.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\firstemendation}{\ifemendationsatend
\immediate\write\emendations{\titletoothernotes}\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\explanatory}
% Again, |\firstexplanatory| is internal, called by |\explanatory|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifexplanationssinglepar
\newcommand{\explanatory}[2][0]{%
\ifexplanon
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\ifnoexplainyet % first explanation
\firstexplanatory
\fi %noexplainyet
\global\noexplainyetfalse
\immediate\write\explanations{\checknoteheaders}%
\literalexplain{#2}%
\ifexplanationssinglepar%
\literalexplain{\par}%
\fi%
\fi % ifexplanon
\resetlemmacounters
}
\newcommand{\firstexplanatory}{\ifexplanatend
\immediate\write\explanations{\titletoothernotes}\fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{~Making new notes sections}
%
% \begin{macro}{\definenewnotetype} This monster macro has nine
% sections, and does all of the things required to set up a new end
% notes section. If you decide to mark a new kind of note in your
% text with, say |\mynote|, but decide at the last moment against
% including those notes in your edition, simply don't issue |\putmynotes| at
% the point it might have appeared, and neither the notes section nor
% the contents entry for it will be included.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeatletter
\long\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
\begingroup
\toks@\expandafter{#1#2}%
\xdef#1{\the\toks@}%
\endgroup}
\makeatother
\newcommand{\definenewnotetype}[5]{%
% 1. make an if for this kind of note and set it to true by default;
% make an if for the first instance of the command per poem and set it
% to false; make an if for setting the notes in single note
% paragraphs and set it to false; make an if for setting
% these notes in two column mode and set it to false
%
% Thanks to Igor Pechtchanski and Ulrich Schwarz.
\expandafter\newif\csname if#1son\endcsname
\global\csname #1sontrue\endcsname
\expandafter\newif\csname ifno#1yet\endcsname
\csname no#1yettrue\endcsname
\expandafter\newif\csname if#1ssinglepar\endcsname
\csname #1singleparfalse\endcsname
\expandafter\newif\csname if#1stwocol\endcsname
\csname #1stwocolfalse\endcsname
% 2. open a new output stream
\expandafter\newwrite\csname #1s\endcsname
% 3. open a file to associate with the stream
\immediate\expandafter\openout\csname #1s\endcsname=\expandafter\jobname .#2
% 4. set up a literalwrite command
\expandafter\newcommand\csname literal#1\endcsname[1]{
\begingroup
\def\next{##1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\expandafter\csname #1s\endcsname{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup}
% 5. send heading information to output file
% first, use literaltext to send commands without parameters
\csname literal#1\endcsname{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead{}
\fancyfoot{}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}}
% then immediate write to send the parameter for the marks in the
% headers
\immediate\write\csname #1s\endcsname{\string\fancyhead[CO]\string{\string{\string\small
\string{\string\em\ #3\string~\string\mymarks\string}\string}\string}}
\immediate\write\csname #1s\endcsname{\string\fancyhead[CE]\string{\string{\string\small
\string{\string\em\ #3\string~\string\mymarks\string}\string}\string}}
% then literal to finish the headers
\csname literal#1\endcsname{\fancyfoot[C]{}
\mark{3}
\backmattersink}
% then immediate write to send the title of the section to print at
% the top of the page
\immediate\write\csname #1s\endcsname{
\string\setendnotessectiontitle\string{#4\string}\string{#1notes\string}}
% literal write to turn hyphenation on, set the font for the note
% section, and turn on two column mode (if the boolean is set)
\csname literal#1\endcsname{\lefthyphenmin=2\backmatterafterheadersink
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont}
\immediate\write\csname #1s\endcsname{\string\if#1stwocol}
\csname
literal#1\endcsname{\begin{multicols}{2}\fi\setlength{\parindent}{-10pt}}%
% \csname literal#1\endcsname{\setlength}{\parindent}{2}}% problem here
% 6. set up a command to write the page and title of the poem for the first
% instance of this kind of note in a poem
\expandafter\newcommand\csname first#1\endcsname{%
\immediate\write\expandafter\csname #1s\endcsname{\titletoothernotes}%
\immediate\write\csname #1s\endcsname{\string\if#1ssinglepar}%
\immediate\write\csname #1s\endcsname{\string\par}%
\immediate\write\csname #1s\endcsname{\string\fi}%
}
% 7. set up a command to write a note, complete with line numbers
\expandafter\newcommand\csname #1\endcsname[2][0]{%
\setlemmarange{##1}%
\csname ifno#1yet\endcsname%
\csname first#1\endcsname%
\fi%
\global\csname no#1yetfalse\endcsname%
\immediate\write\expandafter\csname
#1s\endcsname{\string\nobreak\string\nobreak\checknoteheaders}%
\csname literal#1\endcsname{##2}%
\csname if#1ssinglepar\endcsname%
\csname literal#1\endcsname{\par}%
\fi%
\resetlemmacounters%
}
% prose version
\expandafter\newcommand\csname prose#1\endcsname[3][0]{%
\unskip\proselinelabel{##2}%
\setproselemmarange{##2}{##1}%
\csname ifno#1yet\endcsname%
\csname first#1\endcsname%
\fi%
\global\csname no#1yetfalse\endcsname%
\immediate\write\expandafter\csname #1s\endcsname{\checkprosenoteheaders}%
\csname literal#1\endcsname{##3}%
\csname if#1ssinglepar\endcsname%
\csname literal#1\endcsname{\par}%
\unskip%
\fi%
\resetlemmacounters\unskip%
}
% pm version
\expandafter\newcommand\csname pm#1\endcsname[2][0]{%
\setpmlemmarange{##1}%
\csname ifno#1yet\endcsname%
\csname first#1\endcsname%
\fi%
\global\csname no#1yetfalse\endcsname%
\immediate\write\expandafter\csname #1s\endcsname{\pmchecknoteheaders\string~}%
\immediate\write\expandafter\csname #1s\endcsname{\pmciterange}%
\csname literal#1\endcsname{##2}%
\csname if#1ssinglepar\endcsname%
\csname literal#1\endcsname{\par}%
\fi%
\pmresetlemmacounters\unskip%
}
% 8. modify the end of the poem environment to reset the first
% command per poem boolean (so that the page and title will be set in
% the notes section when the first note is called for a poem)
% thanks to Heiko Oberdiek
\makeatletter
\appendtomacro{\endpoem}{\global\expandafter\csname no#1yettrue\endcsname}
\makeatother
\makeatletter
\appendtomacro{\endprosesection}{\global\expandafter\csname no#1yettrue\endcsname}
\makeatother
\makeatletter
\appendtomacro{\endpmsection}{\global\expandafter\csname no#1yettrue\endcsname}
\makeatother
% 9. command for closing the output file
% command for reading in and printing the output file
\expandafter\newcommand\csname put#1s\endcsname{
\newpage\hyphenationforsmall
\csname if#1stwocol\endcsname%
\csname literal#1\endcsname{\end{multicols}}%
\fi %\iftwocol
\immediate\expandafter\closeout\csname #1s\endcsname
\expandafter\input \jobname.#2
\ifpoemcontentson
\contentsendnotestitle{#5}{#1notes}
\fi
}
% 10. command for making a marginal mark at a line, giving the page
% number in the apparatus where a note is to be found
\expandafter\newcommand\csname margref#1\endcsname{%
\addtocounter{margrefnumber}{1}
\immediate\write\expandafter\csname #1s\endcsname{\makemargreflabel}%
\setmargref
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Prose sections}\textsf{poemscol} calls on
% \textsf{lineno} to do all the heavy lifting for making line numbers
% in prose sections and for making endnotes of various kinds for prose
% sections. First, set up a counter for the line number and for the
% modulo line number for prose sections, and set it to equal that used
% in verse sections. Then set the font for marginal line numbers to
% the size used in marginal line numbers in verse sections.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{proselinenumber}
\setcounter{proselinenumber}{1}
\newcounter{prosemodulo}
\setcounter{prosemodulo}{\value{lineindexrepeat}}
\addtocounter{prosemodulo}{1}
\newcommand{\setprosemodulo}[1]{\modulolinenumbers[#1]}
% \end{macrocode}
% Then commands for setting titles of prose sections. These are just
% versions of |\poemtitle|. Fancier versions will follow if there is
% need.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\prosesectiontitle}[1]{\poemtitle{#1}}
\newcommand{\prosesectiontitlenotitle}[1]{\poemtitlenotitle{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% Next, environments for prose sections. The environment resets (or
% doesn't, in the second case) the marginal line number. The
% default modulo line number is that prevailing in verse sections,
% but you can change it at will.
% \begin{macrocode}
\setcounter{prosemodulo}{\value{lineindexrepeat}}%
\addtocounter{prosemodulo}{1}%
\ifx\modulolinenumbers\undefined%
\relax\else
\modulolinenumbers[\value{prosemodulo}]% if lineno is called
\fi
\newif\ifinprosesection
\newenvironment{prosesection}
{\inprosesectiontrue\resetlinenumber\begin{linenumbers}%
\renewcommand{\linenumberfont}{\scriptsize}%
\ifnumbersright\rightlinenumbers*\setlength{\linenumbersep}{-\marginparsep}%
%\else\ifnumbersswitch\switchlinenumbers\setlength{\linenumbersep}{\marginparsep}%
\else\ifnumbersswitch\rightlinenumbers*\setlength{\linenumbersep}{-\marginparsep}%
\else\leftlinenumbers*\setlength{\linenumbersep}{\marginparsep}%
\addtolength{\linenumbersep}{5pt}% seems about right
\fi\fi
\noemendyettrue%
\noexplainyettrue%
}
{\end{linenumbers}\inprosesectionfalse}
\newenvironment{prosesectionnoreset}
{\begin{linenumbers}%
\renewcommand{\linenumberfont}{\scriptsize}
\ifnumbersright\rightlinenumbers*\setlength{\linenumbersep}{-\marginparsep}%
%\else\ifnumbersswitch\switchlinenumbers\setlength{\linenumbersep}{\marginparsep}%
\else\ifnumbersswitch\rightlinenumbers*\setlength{\linenumbersep}{-\marginparsep}%
\else\leftlinenumbers*\setlength{\linenumbersep}{\marginparsep}%
\addtolength{\linenumbersep}{5pt}% seems about right
\fi\fi
% \noemendyettrue%
% \noexplainyettrue%
}{\end{linenumbers}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% Set up commands for notes sections.
% \begin{macro}{\setproselemmastart}
% Finds the line number at the beginning of a lemma. Thanks to Robin
% Fairbairns and Heiko Oberdiek for |\ifrefundefined|.
% Fairbairns version
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newcommand*\ifrefundefined[1] {%
% �� ��\expandafter\ifx\csname r@#1\endcsname\relax
% }
% Oberdiek version
\makeatletter
\newcommand*{\ifrefundefined}[1]{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname r@#1\endcsname\relax
\expandafter\@firstoftwo
\else
\expandafter\@secondoftwo
\fi
}
\newcommand*{\@extract@ref}[2]{%
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#1\csname
r@#2\endcsname{}{}\@nil
}
\newcommand*{\@extractref}{%
\@extract@ref\@car
}
\newcommand*{\@extractpageref}{%
\@extract@ref\@secondcar
}
\long\def\@secondcar#1#2#3\@nil{#2}
\newcommand*{\setcounterfromref}[2]{%
\ifrefundefined{#2}{%
\protect\G@refundefinedtrue
\@latex@warning{Reference `#2' on page \thepage \space
undefined}%
\setcounter{#1}{0}%
}{%
\setcounter{#1}{\@extractref{#2}}%
}%
}
\newcommand*{\setcounterfrompageref}[2]{%
\ifrefundefined{#2}{%
\protect\G@refundefinedtrue
\@latex@warning{Reference `#2' on page \thepage \space
undefined}%
\setcounter{#1}{0}%
}{%
\setcounter{#1}{\@extractpageref{#2}}%
}%
}
%
\makeatother
\newcommand{\setproselemmastart}[1]{%
\unskip
\setcounterfromref{proselinenumber}{#1}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\setproselemmarange}
% Finds the end of a multi-line lemma.
% \begin{macrocode}
% \newcommand{\setproselemmarange}[2]{%
% \setproselemmastart{#1}%
% \setcounter{lemmalines}{#2}%
% \ifthenelse{\equal{\value{lemmalines}}{0}}{\rangelemmafalse}{\rangelemmatrue}%
% \setcounter{lemmaend}{\theproselinenumber}%
% \addtocounter{lemmaend}{\thelemmalines}\unskip%
% }
\newcommand{\setproselemmarange}[2]{%
\setproselemmastart{#1}%
\pmccheckifinteger{#2}%
\ifinteger
\setcounter{lemmalines}{#2}%
\ifthenelse{\equal{\value{lemmalines}}{0}}{\rangelemmafalse}{\rangelemmatrue}%
\setcounter{lemmaend}{\theproselinenumber}%
\addtocounter{lemmaend}{\thelemmalines}\unskip%
\else
% \ref{#2}
\setcounterfromref{lemmaend}{#2}\rangelemmatrue
\fi\unskip
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\proseciterange}
% Sets the range note for in a multi-line lemma.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\proseciterange}{%
\ifrangelemma%
\theproselinenumber --\thelemmaend%
\else%
\theproselinenumber%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\checkprosenoteheaders}
% Updates running header for note sections. Typesets line number in
% notes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\checkprosenoteheaders}{\string\setcounter\string{notepageholdernote\string}%
\string{\thepage\string}\string\ifhmode\string\unskip\string\fi
\string\ifthenelse\string{\string\value\string{notepageholdernote\string}>
\string\value\string{notepageholdertitle\string}\string}%
\string{\string\mark\string{\string\thenotepageholdernote\string}\string}%
\string{\string\mark\string{\string\thenotepageholdertitle\string}\string}\string\unskip
\string\unskip\string\relax\ \proseciterange :\string~\string\nolinebreak}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\prosetextnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\proselinelabel}[1]{\ifhmode\unskip\fi\linelabel{#1}}
\newcommand{\prosetextnote}[3][0]{%
\iftextnoteson%
\unskip\proselinelabel{#2}%
\setproselemmarange{#2}{#1}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\checkprosenoteheaders}%
\literaltextnote{#3}%
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\resetlemmacounters%
\fi\unskip%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\proseemendation}
% Notice that it calls |\firstemendation| as usual.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\proseemendation}[3][0]{%
\ifemendationson%
\unskip\proselinelabel{#2}%
\setproselemmarange{#2}{#1}%
\ifredundantemendations
\iftextnoteson
\ifrangelemma
\prosetextnote[#1]{#2}{#3}%
\else
\prosetextnote{#2}{#3}%
\fi % ifrangelemma}
\fi %iftextnoteson
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi% iftextnotessinglepar
\fi % ifredundantemendations
\ifnoemendyet % firstemendation
\firstemendation
\fi%noemendyet
\global\noemendyetfalse
\immediate\write\emendations{\checkprosenoteheaders}%
\literalemend{#3}%
\ifemendationssinglepar%
\literalemend{\par}%
\fi% ifemendationssinglep
\resetlemmacounters%
\fi\unskip%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\proseexplanatory}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\proseexplanatory}[3][0]{%
\ifexplanon%
\unskip\proselinelabel{#2}%
\setproselemmarange{#2}{#1}%
\ifnoexplainyet% firstexplanation
\firstexplanatory%
\fi%noexplainyet
\global\noexplainyetfalse%
\immediate\write\explanations{\checkprosenoteheaders}%
\literalexplain{#3}%
\ifexplanationssinglepar%
\literalexplain{\par}%
\fi% ifexplanationssinglepar
\resetlemmacounters%
\fi\unskip%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\proseaccidental}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\proseaccidental}[2]{
\iftextnoteson
\ifincludeaccidentals
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}%
\prosetextnote{#1}{#2}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}%
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\prosetsvariant}[3][0]{\iftextnoteson
\ifincludetypescripts
\immediate\write
\textnotes{\string\nobreak}%
\prosetextnote[#1]{#2}{#3}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}%
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\prosetsaccidental}[2]{\iftextnoteson
\ifincludetypescripts\proseaccidental{#1}{#2}\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Annotation by Sentence and Paragraph Number}
% Marking sentences. First, some |\if|s, token lists, and counters.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif{\ifprosebysentence}
\newif{\ifrunningsentencenumbers}\runningsentencenumberstrue
\newif{\ifmarginsentencenumbers}\marginsentencenumberstrue
\newif{\ifsuppressfirstpara}\suppressfirstparafalse
\newif{\ifsuppressfirstsentence}\suppressfirstsentencefalse
\newtoks{\pmnoteheader}
\newcounter{pmsentencenumber}\setcounter{pmsentencenumber}{0}
\newcounter{pmmodulo}\setcounter{pmmodulo}{3}
\newcounter{pmindexcount}\setcounter{pmindexcount}{0}
% \end{macrocode}
% A starter. Mostly a placeholder. For changes to a whole section.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\setprosebysentence}{\prosebysentencetrue%
}
\newenvironment{pmsection}{
\noemendyettrue%
\noexplainyettrue%
}{}
% \end{macrocode}
% Formatting for sentence numbers in the running text and in the
% margin. \label{runningsentencenumberformat}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\runningsentencenumberformat}[1]{\nobreak%
\ifsuppressfirstsentence%
\ifthenelse{\thepmsentencenumber=1}{\relax}{%
\unskip\textsuperscript{\scriptsize{#1}}}%
\unskip\nobreak%
\else%
\textsuperscript{\scriptsize{#1}}%\fi
\unskip\nobreak}
\newcommand{\marginsentencenumberformat}[1]{\scriptsize{#1}}
\newcommand{\setpmmodulo}[1]{\setcounter{pmmodulo}{#1}%
\addtocounter{pmmodulo}{-1}%
}
\newcommand{\pmnumberstoleft}{%\catcode`\@=11%
\numbersswitchfalse\numbersrightfalse%
\setlength{\marginparsep}{18pt}%
}
\newcommand{\pmnumberstoright}{%\catcode`\@=11%
\numbersswitchfalse\numbersrighttrue%
\setlength{\marginparsep}{-18pt}
% \setlength{\marginparsep}{18pt}
}
\newcommand{\pmnumbersswitch}{\strictpagechecktrue\numbersswitchtrue\numbersrightfalse%
\setlength{\marginparsep}{18pt}%
}
\newcommand{\pmnumbersgutter}{%\catcode`\@=11%
\pmnumbersswitch%
\pmclreversesideparfalse\numbersguttertrue%
\setlength{\marginparsep}{18pt}%
}
\newcommand{\pmnumbersouter}{%\catcode`\@=11%
\pmnumbersswitch%
\pmclreversesidepartrue\numbersgutterfalse%
\setlength{\marginparsep}{18pt}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% Macros for actually writing the numbers in the margin.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putpmsentencenumber}{%
\ifsuppressfirstsentence%
\ifthenelse{\thepmsentencenumber=1}{\relax}{\putpmmarginnumber{\thepmsentencenumber}%
{\marginsentencenumberformat}}%
\else%
\putpmmarginnumber{\thepmsentencenumber}%
{\marginsentencenumberformat}%
\fi}
\newcommand{\putpmmarginnumber}[2]{%
\nolinebreak\begin{marginenvironment}%
\nolinebreak%
\ifnumbersswitch%\marginpar{\hfil #2{#1}}
\pmclsidepar{\hfil #2{#1}}%
\else%
\ifnumbersright%\marginpar{\hfil #2{#1}}
\pmclrightsidepar{\hfil #2{#1}}%
\else% \marginpar{#2{#1}\hfil}
\pmclleftsidepar
{#2{#1}\hfil}%
\fi%
\fi%
\nolinebreak%
\end{marginenvironment}\nolinebreak%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pmsentence}
% Put this before every sentence. (This is the opposite of the
% convention in verse sections, where |\verseline| is at the end of
% each line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmsentence}{%
% increment sentence number at beginning of sentence
\addtocounter{pmsentencenumber}{1}%
\ifrunningsentencenumbers% add running number
\runningsentencenumberformat{\thepmsentencenumber}%
\fi%
\ifmarginsentencenumbers% add marginal number
\addtocounter{pmindexcount}{1}%
\leavevmode%
\ifthenelse{\value{pmindexcount}>\value{pmmodulo}}%
{\putpmsentencenumber\nobreak%
\setcounter{pmindexcount}{0}%
}{\relax}%
\fi%
% create header for notes if any are to occur
\ifpmparas%
\global\edef\noteheaderconcat{\thepmparagraph:\thepmsentencenumber}%
\pmnoteheader=\expandafter{\noteheaderconcat}%
\else%
%\global\edef\noteheaderconcat{\thepmsentencenumber:}%
\global\edef\noteheaderconcat{\thepmsentencenumber}
\pmnoteheader=\expandafter{\noteheaderconcat}%
\fi%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmsentencetwo}
% Kludge for the second sentence in a line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmsentencetwo}{%
% increment sentence number at beginning of sentence
\addtocounter{pmsentencenumber}{1}%
\ifrunningsentencenumbers% add running number
\runningsentencenumberformat{\thepmsentencenumber}%
\fi%
\ifmarginsentencenumbers% add marginal number
\addtocounter{pmindexcount}{1}%
\leavevmode%
\ifthenelse{\value{pmindexcount}>\value{pmmodulo}}%
{ \putpmsentencenumbertwo\nobreak%
\setcounter{pmindexcount}{0}%
}{\relax}%
% \ifnum\thepmindexcount>\thepmmodulo%
% \putpmsentencenumbertwo\nobreak%
% \setcounter{pmindexcount}{0}%
% \fi%
\fi%
% create header for notes if any are to occur
\ifpmparas%
\global\edef\noteheaderconcat{\thepmparagraph:\thepmsentencenumber}%
\pmnoteheader=\expandafter{\noteheaderconcat}%
\else%
\global\edef\noteheaderconcat{\thepmsentencenumber}%
\pmnoteheader=\expandafter{\noteheaderconcat}%
\fi%
}
\newcommand{\putpmsentencenumbertwo}{%
\putpmmarginnumber{\rlap{\phantom{1},~\thepmsentencenumber}}%
{\marginsentencenumberformat}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmsentencethree}
% Kludge for the third sentence in a line.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmsentencethree}{%
% increment sentence number at beginning of sentence
\addtocounter{pmsentencenumber}{1}%
\ifrunningsentencenumbers% add running number
\runningsentencenumberformat{\thepmsentencenumber}%
\fi%
\ifmarginsentencenumbers% add marginal number
\addtocounter{pmindexcount}{1}%
\leavevmode%
\ifthenelse{\value{pmindexcount}>\value{pmmodulo}}%
{ \putpmsentencenumberthree\nobreak%
\setcounter{pmindexcount}{0}%
}{\relax}%
% \ifnum\thepmindexcount>\thepmmodulo%
% \putpmsentencenumberthree\nobreak%
% \setcounter{pmindexcount}{0}%
% \fi%
\fi%
% create header for notes if any are to occur
\ifpmparas%
\global\edef\noteheaderconcat{\thepmparagraph:\thepmsentencenumber}%
\pmnoteheader=\expandafter{\noteheaderconcat}%
\else%
\global\edef\noteheaderconcat{\thepmsentencenumber}%
\pmnoteheader=\expandafter{\noteheaderconcat}%
\fi%
}
\newcommand{\putpmsentencenumberthree}{%
\putpmmarginnumber{\rlap{\phantom{1,~2},~\thepmsentencenumber}}%
{\marginsentencenumberformat}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmsentencefour}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmsentencefour}{%
% increment sentence number at beginning of sentence
\addtocounter{pmsentencenumber}{1}%
\ifrunningsentencenumbers% add running number
\runningsentencenumberformat{\thepmsentencenumber}%
\fi%
\ifmarginsentencenumbers% add marginal number
\addtocounter{pmindexcount}{1}%
\leavevmode%
\ifthenelse{\value{pmindexcount}>\value{pmmodulo}}%
{ \putpmsentencenumberfour\nobreak%
\setcounter{pmindexcount}{0}%
}{\relax}%
\fi%
% create header for notes if any are to occur
\ifpmparas%
\global\edef\noteheaderconcat{\thepmparagraph:\thepmsentencenumber}%
\pmnoteheader=\expandafter{\noteheaderconcat}%
\else%
\global\edef\noteheaderconcat{\thepmsentencenumber}%
\pmnoteheader=\expandafter{\noteheaderconcat}%
\fi%
}
\newcommand{\putpmsentencenumberfour}{%
\putpmmarginnumber{\rlap{\phantom{1,~2,~3},~\thepmsentencenumber}}%
{\marginsentencenumberformat}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Macros for numbering paragraphs
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{pmparagraph}
\setcounter{pmparagraph}{0}
\newif{\ifpmparas}\pmparasfalse
\newif{\ifpmparainmar}\pmparainmartrue
\newif{\ifpmpararunning}\pmpararunningfalse
\newif{\ifpmsentencebypara}% reset sentence counter every paragraph
\pmsentencebyparatrue
% \end{macrocode}
% Formatting marginal and running paragraph numbers, printing them. \label{pmparrunningformat}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmparmarformat}[1]{\textbf{{\small #1}}}
\newcommand{\pmpararunningformat}[1]{%
\ifsuppressfirstpara%
\ifthenelse{\thepmparagraph=1}{\relax}{\textbf{\small #1}~}%
\else%
\textbf{\small #1}~%
\fi}
\newcommand{\putpmmarparanumber}{%
\ifsuppressfirstpara%
\ifthenelse{\thepmparagraph=1}{\relax}{\putpmmarginnumber{\llap{\thepmparagraph~~}}
{\pmparmarformat}}%
\else%
\putpmmarginnumber{\llap{\thepmparagraph~~}}{\pmparmarformat}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pmpara}
% Mark the beginning of each paragraph with |\pmpara|
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmpara}{\leavevmode%
\pmparastrue\addtocounter{pmparagraph}{1}%
\ifpmparainmar% put in marginal paragraph number
\putpmmarparanumber
\fi
\ifpmpararunning% put in running number
\pmpararunningformat{\thepmparagraph}%
\fi
\ifpmsentencebypara% reset sentence counter
\setcounter{pmsentencenumber}{0}%
\setcounter{pmindexcount}{0}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\sentencelabel}
% Makes a label either by sentence number or by paragraph and
% sentence number, for use by |\ref| and by the various notes commands.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeatletter
\def\sentencelabel#1{\@bsphack%
\ifpmparas%
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\newlabel{#1}{{\thepmparagraph :\thepmsentencenumber}{\thepage}}}%
\else%
\protected@write\@auxout{}%
{\string\newlabel{#1}{{\thepmsentencenumber}{\thepage}}}%
\fi%
\@esphack%
}
\makeatother
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Macros to set up endnote commands for paragraph and sentence
% annotation.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks{\pmrangeend} % for notes that refer to ranges
% setting the range for the lemma:
\newcommand{\setpmlemmarange}[1]{%
\pmccheckifinteger{#1}%
\ifinteger%
\setcounter{lemmalines}{#1}%
\ifthenelse{\equal{\value{lemmalines}}{0}}{\rangelemmafalse}{\rangelemmatrue}%
\setcounter{lemmaend}{\thepmsentencenumber}%
\addtocounter{lemmaend}{\thelemmalines}%
\pmrangeend={\thelemmaend}%
\else%
\pmrangeend={\ref{#1}}\rangelemmatrue%
\fi%
}
% Setting the string to include ranges in notes:
\newcommand{\pmciterange}{%
\ifrangelemma{\the\pmnoteheader --\the\pmrangeend:}%
\else%
\the\pmnoteheader:%
\fi}
% For running headers
\newcommand{\pmchecknoteheaders}{\string\setcounter\string{notepageholdernote\string}%
\string{\thepage\string}\string\ifhmode\string\unskip\string\fi
\string\ifthenelse\string{\string\value\string{notepageholdernote\string}>
\string\value\string{notepageholdertitle\string}\string}%
\string{\string\mark\string{\string\thenotepageholdernote\string}\string}%
\string{\string\mark\string{\string\thenotepageholdertitle\string}\string}\string\unskip}
% to reset lemma counters at end of note
\newcommand{\pmresetlemmacounters}{\rangelemmafalse%
\setcounter{lemmalines}{0}%
\setcounter{lemmaend}{0}%
\pmrangeend={\relax}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\pmtextnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmtextnote}[2][0]{%
\iftextnoteson%
\setpmlemmarange{#1}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\pmchecknoteheaders\string~}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\pmciterange}%
\literaltextnote{#2}%
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi%
\pmresetlemmacounters%
\unskip}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmexplanatory}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmexplanatory}[2][0]{%
\ifexplanon%
\setpmlemmarange{#1}%
\ifnoexplainyet % first explanation
\firstexplanatory%
\fi %noexplainyet
\global\noexplainyetfalse%
\immediate\write\explanations{\pmchecknoteheaders\string~}%
\immediate\write\explanations{\pmciterange}%
\literalexplain{#2}%
\ifexplanationssinglepar%
\literalexplain{\par}%
\fi %ifexplanationssinglepar
\fi % ifexplanon
\pmresetlemmacounters%
\unskip%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmemendation}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmemendation}[2][0]{%
\ifemendationson%
\setpmlemmarange{#1}%
\ifredundantemendations%
\iftextnoteson%
\ifrangelemma%
\pmtextnote[#1]{#2}%
\else%
\pmtextnote{#2}%
\fi % ifrangelemma}
\fi %iftextnoteson
\fi % ifredundantemendations
\ifnoemendyet % firstemendation
\firstemendation%
\fi %noemendyet
\global\noemendyetfalse%
\immediate\write\emendations{\pmchecknoteheaders\string~}%
\immediate\write\emendations{\pmciterange}%
\literalemend{#2}%
\ifemendationssinglepar%
\literalemend{\par}%
\fi% ifemendationssinglepar
\fi % ifemendationson
\pmresetlemmacounters%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmaccidental}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmaccidental}[1]{%
\iftextnoteson%
\ifincludeaccidentals%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}%
\pmtextnote{#1}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}%
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi\fi%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmtsvariant}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmtsvariant}[2][0]{\iftextnoteson%
\ifincludetypescripts%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}%
\pmtextnote[#1]{#2}%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\nobreak}%
\iftextnotessinglepar%
\literaltextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi\fi%
}
\newcommand{\pmtsaccidental}[1]{\iftextnoteson\ifincludetypescripts\pmaccidental{#1}\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%\subsection{~Using Footnotes} |\texnotesatfoot| has to redefine
% |\sources| and a few others as well.
% \begin{macro}{\textnotesatfoot}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\textnotesatfoot}{% first redefine textnotes
\global\textnotesontrue%
\global\textnotesatendfalse%
\ifsourcesfootnotespara%
\DeclareNewFootnote[para]{A}%
\else%
\DeclareNewFootnote[plain]{A}%
\fi%
\iftextfootnotespara%
\DeclareNewFootnote[para]{B}%
\else%
\DeclareNewFootnote[plain]{B}%
\fi%
\renewcommand{\textnote}[2][0]{\setlemmarange{##1}%
\FootnotetextB{\relax}{\citerange:~##2}%
\resetlemmacounters}%
% then redefine sources
\renewcommand{\sources}[1]{\FootnotetextA{\relax}{##1}}%
% then prose textnote
\renewcommand{\prosetextnote}[3][0]{%
\unskip\proselinelabel{##2}%
\setproselemmarange{##2}{##1}%
\FootnotetextB{\relax}{\proseciterange:~##3}\resetlemmacounters}%
% then pmtextnote
\renewcommand{\pmtextnote}[2][0]{\setpmlemmarange{##1}%
\FootnotetextB{\relax}{\pmciterange~##2}\pmresetlemmacounters}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\emendationsatfoot}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\emendationsatfoot}{%
\global\emendationsontrue%
\global\emendationsatendfalse%
\ifemendationfootnotespara%
\DeclareNewFootnote[para]{C}%
\else%
\DeclareNewFootnote[plain]{C}%
\fi%
\renewcommand{\emendation}[2][0]{\setlemmarange{##1}%
\FootnotetextC{\relax}{\citerange:~##2}%
\resetlemmacounters}%
\renewcommand{\proseemendation}[3][0]{\unskip\proselinelabel{##2}%
\setproselemmarange{##2}{##1}%
\FootnotetextC{\relax}{\proseciterange:~##3}\resetlemmacounters}%
\renewcommand{\pmemendation}[2][0]{\setpmlemmarange{##1}%
\FootnotetextC{\relax}{\pmciterange~##2}\pmresetlemmacounters}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\explanationsatfoot}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\explanationsatfoot}{%
\global\explanontrue%
\global\explanatendfalse%
\ifexplanfootnotespara%
\DeclareNewFootnote[para]{D}%
\else%
\DeclareNewFootnote[plain]{D}%
\fi%
\renewcommand{\explanatory}[2][0]{\setlemmarange{##1}%
\FootnotetextD{\relax}{\citerange:~##2}%
\resetlemmacounters}%
\renewcommand{\proseexplanatory}[3][0]{\unskip\proselinelabel{##2}%
\setproselemmarange{##2}{##1}%
\FootnotetextD{\relax}{\proseciterange:~##3}}
\renewcommand{\pmexplanatory}[2][0]{\setpmlemmarange{##1}%
\FootnotetextD{\relax}{\pmciterange~##2}\pmresetlemmacounters}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\bibleverse}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\bibleverse}{\pmsentence}
\newcommand{\biblechapter}{\pmpara}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \subsection{~Notes at the foot of individual poems}
%
% \begin{macro}{\poemendnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpoemendnoteson
\poemendnotesontrue
\newif\ifpoemendnotessinglepar
\poemendnotessinglepartrue
\newcommand{\makepoemendnotes}{
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\newwrite\poemendnotes
\immediate\openout\poemendnotes=\jobname.pnd
\literalpoemendnote{\bigskip}
}
\newcommand{\poemendnote}[2][0]{%
\ifpoemendnoteson
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\immediate\write\poemendnotes{\checknoteheaders}
\literalpoemendnote{#2}%
\ifpoemendnotessinglepar%
\literalpoemendnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi
\resetlemmacounters
}
\newcommand{\literalpoemendnote}[1]{%
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\poemendnotes{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
}
\newcommand{\putpoemendnotes}{
\ifpoemendnoteson
\immediate\closeout\poemendnotes
\input \jobname.pnd
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \begin{macro}{\poemendemendationnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpoemendemendationnoteson
\poemendemendationnotesontrue
\newif\ifpoemendemendationnotessinglepar
\poemendemendationnotessinglepartrue
\newcommand{\makepoemendemendationnotes}{
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\newwrite\poemendemendationnotes
\immediate\openout\poemendemendationnotes=\jobname.pmd
\literalpoemendemendationnote{\bigskip}
}
\newcommand{\poemendemendationnote}[2][0]{%
\ifpoemendemendationnoteson
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\immediate\write\poemendemendationnotes{\checknoteheaders}
\literalpoemendemendationnote{#2}%
\ifpoemendemendationnotessinglepar%
\literalpoemendemendationnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi
\resetlemmacounters
}
\newcommand{\literalpoemendemendationnote}[1]{%
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\poemendemendationnotes{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
}
\newcommand{\putpoemendemendationnotes}{
\ifpoemendemendationnoteson
\immediate\closeout\poemendemendationnotes
\input \jobname.pmd
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\poemendexplanatorynote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpoemendexplanatorynoteson
\poemendexplanatorynotesontrue
\newif\ifpoemendexplanatorynotessinglepar
\poemendexplanatorynotessinglepartrue
\newcommand{\makepoemendexplanatorynotes}{
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\newwrite\poemendexplanatorynotes
\immediate\openout\poemendexplanatorynotes=\jobname.pxd
\literalpoemendexplanatorynote{\bigskip}
}
\newcommand{\poemendexplanatorynote}[2][0]{%
\ifpoemendexplanatorynoteson
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\immediate\write\poemendexplanatorynotes{\checknoteheaders}
\literalpoemendexplanatorynote{#2}%
\ifpoemendexplanatorynotessinglepar%
\literalpoemendexplanatorynote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi
\resetlemmacounters
}
\newcommand{\literalpoemendexplanatorynote}[1]{%
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\poemendexplanatorynotes{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
}
\newcommand{\putpoemendexplanatorynotes}{
\ifpoemendexplanatorynoteson
\immediate\closeout\poemendexplanatorynotes
\input \jobname.pxd
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\poemendtextnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifpoemendtextnoteson
\poemendtextnotesontrue
\newif\ifpoemendtextnotessinglepar
\poemendtextnotessinglepartrue
\newcommand{\makepoemendtextnotes}{
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\newwrite\poemendtextnotes
\immediate\openout\poemendtextnotes=\jobname.pmd
\literalpoemendtextnote{\bigskip}
}
\newcommand{\poemendtextnote}[2][0]{%
\ifpoemendtextnoteson
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\immediate\write\poemendtextnotes{\checknoteheaders}
\literalpoemendtextnote{#2}%
\ifpoemendtextnotessinglepar%
\literalpoemendtextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\fi
\resetlemmacounters
}
\newcommand{\literalpoemendtextnote}[1]{%
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\poemendtextnotes{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
}
\newcommand{\putpoemendtextnotes}{
\ifpoemendtextnoteson
\immediate\closeout\poemendtextnotes
\input \jobname.pmd
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Embarrassing kludges} Because the dirty trick
% mentioned above writes out textnotes as a ribbon one word wide,
% quoted poetry in the notes sections will leave a blank line at the
% end, which will be interpreted as a paragraph break when the file is
% read back in by \LaTeX. These kludges correct that problem.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\quotedversecorrectiontextnote}[1][0pt]
{\iftextnoteson%
\immediate\write\textnotes{\string\noindent\string\kern-#1}%
\fi}
\newcommand{\quotedversecorrectionemendation}[1][0pt]
{\ifemendationson%
\immediate\write\emendations{\string\noindent\string\kern-#1}%
\fi}
\newcommand{\quotedversecorrectionexplanatory}[1][0pt]
{\ifexplanon%
\immediate\write\explanations{\string\noindent\string\kern-#1}%
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{~Marking stanza breaks on page turns} Use the macro
% below to change the symbol used to mark cases in which there is or is
% not a stanza break at a page turn.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\stanzaatbottom}[1]{\global\edef\stanzaatbottomvalue{#1}}
\stanzaatbottom{*}
\newcommand{\nostanzaatbottom}[1]{\global\edef\nostanzaatbottomvalue{#1}}
\nostanzaatbottom{\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \subsection{~Parallel Texts}
% First, three utility macros from the memoir class:
% \begin{macro}{\cleartorecto}
% A repeat of |\cleardoublepage|; clears to a recto (odd-numbered) page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleartorecto{\clearpage\if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else
\hbox{}\thispagestyle{empty}%
\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\cleartoverso}
% Clears to a verso (even-numbered) page.
% \begin{macrocode}
\def\cleartoverso{\clearpage\if@twoside
\ifodd\c@page\hbox{}\thispagestyle{empty}%
\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \begin{macro}{\ifenv}
% Macro for testing whether one is in a particular environment.
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeatletter
\def\ifenv#1{%
\def\reserved@a{#1}%
\ifx\reserved@a\@currenvir
\expandafter\@firstoftwo
\else
\expandafter\@secondoftwo
\fi
}
\makeatother
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Macros for forcing the marginal line numbers to the left side or
% the right side. These marginal line numbers, unlike those made with
% |\marginpar|, do not float. This code is modeled after code from
% the memoir class, by Peter Wilson.
%
% \begin{macro}{\pmclleftsidepar}
% As in the memoir class, these sidepars do not float.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newdimen\pmclsavsk
\newcount\pmclsavsf
\def\pmclbsphack{%
\relax
\ifhmode
\pmclsavsk\lastskip
\pmclsavsf\spacefactor
\fi}
\def\pmclesphack{%
\relax
\ifhmode
\spacefactor\pmclsavsf
\ifdim\pmclsavsk>0pt
\ignorespaces
\fi
\fi}
% \newcommand{\pmclleftsidepar}[1]{%
% \pmclbsphack\leavevmode\vadjust{%
% \rlap{\kern-\parindent%
% \kern -\marginparsep \kern -\marginparwidth % at left
% \vbox to 0pt{%
% \kern \pmclsideparvshift% % vertical shift to align top text lines
% \begin{minipage}{\marginparwidth}%
% #1%
% \end{minipage}%
% \vss}}}\pmclesphack%
% } % version 2.44
\newcommand{\pmclleftsidepar}[1]{%
\pmclbsphack\strut\vadjust{% changed
\rlap{\kern-\parindent%
\kern -\marginparsep \kern -\marginparwidth% at left
% \vbox to 0pt{%
% \kern \pmclsideparvshift% % vertical shift to align top text lines
% \begin{minipage}{\marginparwidth}%
\setbox0=\vtop to 0pt{% added
\begin{minipage}[t]{\marginparwidth}% added
#1%
\end{minipage}%
% \vss}}}\pmclesphack%
\vss}% changed
\vtop to 0pt{\kern\pmclsideparvshift % default should be 0pt
\kern-\dp\strutbox \kern-\ht0 \box0 \vss}}}\pmclesphack}% changed
\newcommand{\pmclrightsidepar}[1]{%
% \pmclbsphack\leavevmode\vadjust{%
\pmclbsphack\strut\vadjust{%
\rlap{\kern-\parindent%
% \kern \textwidth \kern -\marginparsep % at right
\kern\textwidth\kern\marginparsep% at right
% \vbox to 0pt{%
% \kern \pmclsideparvshift% % vertical shift to align top text lines
% \begin{minipage}{\marginparwidth}%
\setbox0=\vtop to 0pt{% added
\begin{minipage}[t]{\marginparwidth}% added
#1%
\end{minipage}%
% \vss}}}\pmclesphack%
\vss}% changed
\vtop to 0pt{\kern\pmclsideparvshift% default should be 0pt
\kern-\dp\strutbox \kern-\ht0 \box0 \vss}}}\pmclesphack}% changed
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Booleans for parallel texts
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifparalleltexts
\paralleltextsfalse
\newif\ifrecto
\rectofalse
\newif\ifverso
\versofalse
% \end{macrocode}
% Booleans are needed to describe situations in which poems and stanzas
% are left open at the page break. |\finishrectopage| and
% |\finishversopage| will close poems and stanzas (so as not to
% generate errors because of environments left open), although as far
% as the poem is concerned the stanza or poem may still be open. (I
% will say that the stanza or poem in such a case is ``artificially
% closed.'') There are two of them for each case of artificial closure.
% The first boolean (for each stanza or poem artificially closed)
% must reflect whether the stanza or poem has been (artificially)
% closed, to reopen on the next page of the same kind (recto or verso).
% If a poem or stanza has been (artificially) closed, the |\mark| will
% not be changed (so that it will still reflect whether the reader
% should understand there to be a stanza break at the bottom of the
% page or not). The second boolean for each case of artificial closure
% reflects whether the |\mark| has been changed or not.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifrectopoempending
\rectopoempendingfalse
\newif\ifversopoempending
\versopoempendingfalse
\newif\ifrectostanzapending
\rectostanzapendingfalse
\newif\ifversostanzapending
\versostanzapendingfalse
\newif\ifrectostanzastillopen
\rectostanzastillopenfalse
\newif\ifversostanzastillopen
\versostanzastillopenfalse
\newif\ifrectopoemstillopen
\rectopoemstillopenfalse
\newif\ifversopoemstillopen
\versopoemstillopenfalse
% the same for prose sections
\newif\ifrectoprosesectionpending
\rectoprosesectionpendingfalse
\newif\ifversoprosesectionpending
\versoprosesectionpendingfalse
\newif\ifrectoprosesectionstillopen
\rectoprosesectionstillopenfalse
\newif\ifversoprosesectionstillopen
\versoprosesectionstillopenfalse
% the same for quoted verse
\newif\ifrectoquotedversepending
\rectoquotedversependingfalse
\newif\ifversoquotedversepending
\versoquotedversependingfalse
\newif\ifrectoquotedversestillopen
\rectoquotedversestillopenfalse
\newif\ifversoquotedversestillopen
\versoquotedversestillopenfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% A further set of booleans is required for emendations and
% explanatory notes. Again the idea is that if a poem is artificially
% closed, but has already had its first emendation or explanatory note
% written to the external notes files, \textsf{poemscol} will remember that
% the next emendation or explanatory note it sees is not the first one
% for that poem and thus won't set the heading information for that
% poem in the notes section all over again.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifrectoemendationspending
\rectoemendationspendingfalse
\newif\ifversoemendationspending
\versoemendationspendingfalse
\newif\ifrectoexplanationspending
\rectoexplanationspendingfalse
\newif\ifversoexplanationspending
\versoexplanationspendingfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% Counters for parallel texts: New counters are needed, not only for the recto and verso lines, but
% also for the scratch value which determines whether or not it is time to
% output a marginal line number. These are saved at the end of every
% page, and restored at the beginning of every page of the same kind.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{rectolinecounter}
\setcounter{rectolinecounter}{1}
\newcounter{rectoindexscratch}
\setcounter{rectoindexscratch}{1}
\newcounter{versolinecounter}
\setcounter{versolinecounter}{1}
\newcounter{versoindexscratch}
\setcounter{versoindexscratch}{1}
% \end{macrocode}
% \begin{macro}{\startparalleltexts}
% Clears to a verso (even-numbered) page, fixes where to put line
% numbers, modifies poem and stanza environments, changes where
% marginal line numbers are set, sets the booleans. \label{startparalleltexts}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\startparalleltexts}{%
\leavevmode
\cleartoverso
\paralleltextstrue
\renewenvironment{poem}{\raggedright
\language=255%no hyphenation in verse
\noemendyettrue
\noexplainyettrue
\setcounter{verselinenumber}{0}\setcounter{printlineindex}{0}
\nobreak\begin{pmclverse}
\inpoemtrue\nobreak\mark{\relax}}
% must end poem if parallel text. Don't worry,
% begin recto page and begin verso page will
% reopen the poem and reset the line counter to the right value
% if it was finish recto page or finish verso page
% that closed the poem rather than your own declaration.
{\ifversopoemstillopen
\end{pmclverse}
\inpoemfalse\mark{\relax}
\else
\ifrectopoemstillopen
\end{pmclverse}
\inpoemfalse\mark{\relax}
\else
\end{pmclverse}
\inpoemfalse\mark{\relax}
\goodbreak\afterpoemskip%\bigskip
\fi\fi }
\renewenvironment{stanza}{\penalty-100\instanzatrue\mark{\nostanzaatbottomvalue\ }}
% must end stanza if parallel text. Don't worry,
% begin recto page and begin verso page will
% reopen the stanza and reset the line counter to the right value
% if it was finish recto page or finish verso page
% that closed the stanza rather than your own declaration.
{\ifversostanzastillopen
\relax
\else
\ifrectostanzastillopen
\relax
\else
\nobreak\mark{\stanzaatbottomvalue\ }\nobreak
\ifspeciallinelock%
\relax\else%
\nolinebreak\incrementverselinenumber%
\fi%
\speciallinelockfalse%
\nobreak
\instanzafalse
\stanzaskip
\fi\fi
}
\renewcommand{\putverselinenumber}{\nolinebreak\begin{marginenvironment}%
\nolinebreak
% \marn{\hfil\textrm{\theverselinenumber}}
% \marginpar{\hfil\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}}
\pmclleftsidepar{\textrm{\scriptsize\theverselinenumber}}%
\nolinebreak
\end{marginenvironment}%
\nolinebreak
}
}
\newenvironment{parallelverse}{\startparalleltexts}
{\finishparalleltexts}
\newtoks{\versotitleholder}
\newtoks{\rectotitleholder}
\newcommand{\makeversotitleholder}[1]{%
\versotitleholder={#1}%
}
\newcommand{\makerectotitleholder}[1]{%
\rectotitleholder={#1}%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\versopoemtitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeatletter
\newcommand{\versopoemtitle}[1]{%
\versoset@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentone}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentsindenttwoamount}%
}
\newcommand{\versoset@p@emtitle}[6]{\pmclversoresetsettitleinnotes%
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{#6}%
{#2}%
{#3 \begin{titleentryenvironment}%
{\ifcentertitleson\begin{center}#1\end{center}\else #4 #1\fi}%
\end{titleentryenvironment}}%
{#5}%
\m@kep@emlabel
\versom@ken@teholder{#1}%
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{\z@}}
\newcommand{\versom@ken@teholder}[1]{%
\ifsinglelinetitle
\versotitleholder={#1}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else\iftitlefirstline
\versotitleholder={#1}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else\iftitlemiddleline
\titlesofar=\versotitleholder
\titleincrement={~#1}%
\global\edef\titleconcat{\the\titlesofar \the\titleincrement}%
\versotitleholder=\expandafter{\titleconcat}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else
\titlesofar=\versotitleholder
\titleincrement={~#1}%
\global\edef\titleconcat{\the\titlesofar \the\titleincrement}%
\versotitleholder=\expandafter{\titleconcat}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
}
\newcommand{\versotitletoothernotes}{\string\par
\ifputpagenumberinnotes%
\string\argpageref\string{\@compoundlabelscratch\string}%
\string\setcounterfrompageref\string{notepageholdertitle\string}%
\string{\@compoundlabelscratch\string}%
\fi%
\string\textbf\string{\ \the\versotitleholder\string}
}%
\newcommand{\versopoemtitlenocontents}[1]{%
\versoset@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
}
\newcommand{\versotitleinnotescheck}{\ifparalleltexts\let\titletoothernotes=\versotitletoothernotes\fi}
\makeatother
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rectopoemtitle}
% \begin{macrocode}
\makeatletter
\newcommand{\rectopoemtitle}[1]{%
\rectoset@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentone}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
{\contentsindenttwoamount}%
}
\newcommand{\rectoset@p@emtitle}[6]{\pmclrectoresetsettitleinnotes
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{#6}%
{#2}%
{#3 \begin{titleentryenvironment}%
{\ifcentertitleson\begin{center}#1\end{center}\else #4 #1\fi}%
\end{titleentryenvironment}}%
{#5}%
\m@kep@emlabel
\rectom@ken@teholder{#1}%
\setlength{\titleentryoverrun}{\z@}}
\newcommand{\rectom@ken@teholder}[1]{%
\ifsinglelinetitle
\rectotitleholder={#1}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else\iftitlefirstline
\rectotitleholder={#1}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else\iftitlemiddleline
\titlesofar=\rectotitleholder
\titleincrement={~#1}%
\global\edef\titleconcat{\the\titlesofar \the\titleincrement}%
\rectotitleholder=\expandafter{\titleconcat}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\else
\titlesofar=\rectotitleholder
\titleincrement={~#1}%
\global\edef\titleconcat{\the\titlesofar \the\titleincrement}%
\rectotitleholder=\expandafter{\titleconcat}%
\global\edef\@compoundlabelscratch{poem\thepoemnumber}%
\fi
\fi
\fi
}
\newcommand{\rectotitletoothernotes}{\string\par
\ifputpagenumberinnotes%
\string\argpageref\string{\@compoundlabelscratch\string}%
\string\setcounterfrompageref\string{notepageholdertitle\string}%
\string{\@compoundlabelscratch\string}%
\fi%
\string\textbf\string{\ \the\rectotitleholder\string}
}%
\newcommand{\rectopoemtitlenocontents}[1]{%
\rectoset@p@emtitle{#1}{\poemtitlepenalty}{\poemtitlefont}%
{\poemtitleindent}{\nobreak\par\nobreak\afterpoemtitleskip\nobreak}{\z@}%
%\c@ntentsinfo{#1}{\contentsindentone}{\contentspoemtitlefont}%
%{\contentsindenttwoamount}%
%\t@xtnotesinfo{#1}%
}
\newcommand{\rectotitleinnotescheck}{\ifparalleltexts\let\titletoothernotes=\rectotitletoothernotes\fi}
\makeatother
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\saveversoline}
% Macros for saving and restoring line numbers:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\saveversoline}{\setcounter{versolinecounter}%
{\value{verselinenumber}}%
\setcounter{versoindexscratch}{\value{printlineindex}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\restoreversoline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\restoreversoline}{\setcounter{verselinenumber}%
{\value{versolinecounter}}%
\setcounter{printlineindex}{\value{versoindexscratch}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\saverectoline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\saverectoline}{\setcounter{rectolinecounter}%
{\value{verselinenumber}}%
\setcounter{rectoindexscratch}{\value{printlineindex}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\restorerectoline}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\restorerectoline}{\setcounter{verselinenumber}%
{\value{rectolinecounter}}%
\setcounter{printlineindex}{\value{rectoindexscratch}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Macros for line cross references:
%
% You will probably want to use line cross references to show which
% lines on the recto page correspond to which lines on the verso page.
% When you do this, you will set, in the margin of a line on the recto
% page, the line number of the corresponding line on the verso side, in
% square brackets. You may mark that line number with a distinctive
% identifier. |\synchroflag| is a token register to hold that
% identifier, and |\setsynchroflag| is a command to put the identifier
% in the register. For instance, if you are setting the 1805 version of
% Wordsworth's \emph{The Prelude} on the verso, and the 1850 version on
% the recto, you might wish to set the ``synchroflag'' to ``1805'' so
% that the line cross reference will look something like ``[1805:
% 147]''.
% \begin{macro}{\setsynchroflag}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks{\synchroflag}
\newcommand{\setsynchroflag}[1]{\synchroflag={#1}}
\setsynchroflag{\relax}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Here are commands for defining and calling ``synchrolabels'', line
% cross references that tie verso and recto pages:
% \begin{macro}{\synchrolabel}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\synchrolabel}[1]{\poemlinelabel{#1}}
\newcommand{\hfilll}{\hskip 0pt plus 1 filll}
\newcommand{\synchroref}[1]{%
\pmclrightsidepar{{\textrm{\scriptsize[\the\synchroflag\ref{#1}]}}}%
% \hfill\rlap{{\textrm{\scriptsize[\the\synchroflag\ref{#1}]}}}
% \ifnum\theprintlineindex=\thelineindexrepeat
% \hspace{-7pt}
% \fi
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Finally, the |\startversopage|, |\finishversopage|, |\startrectopage|
% |\finishrectopage| and |\finishparalleltexts| macros:
% \begin{macro}{\startversopage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\startversopage}{
\ifrectostanzastillopen
\end{stanza}
\rectostanzastillopenfalse
\end{poem}
\rectopoemstillopenfalse
\fi
\ifrectopoemstillopen % from previous page
\end{poem}
\rectopoemstillopenfalse
\fi
\ifversopoempending % from previous verso
\begin{poem}
\global\versopoempendingfalse
\fi
\ifversostanzapending % from previous verso
\begin{stanza}
\global\versostanzapendingfalse
\fi
\ifversoemendationspending
\noemendyetfalse
\global\versoemendationspendingfalse
\fi
\ifversoexplanationspending
\noexplainyetfalse
\global\versoexplanationspendingfalse
\fi
\rectofalse\versotrue\restoreversoline
\let\titletoothernotes=\versotitletoothernotes}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\finishversopage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\finishversopage}{
\saveversoline\versofalse\
\ifinpoem
\global\versopoempendingtrue
\versopoemstillopentrue
\fi
\ifinstanza
\global\versostanzapendingtrue
\versostanzastillopentrue
\global\versopoempendingtrue
\versopoemstillopentrue
\fi
\ifnoemendyet
\relax
\else
\global\versoemendationspendingtrue
\noemendyetfalse
\fi
\ifnoexplainyet
\relax
\else
\global\versoexplanationspendingtrue
\noexplainyetfalse
\fi
% \clearpage % keep in comment until footnotes problems are worked out
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\startrectopage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\startrectopage}{
\ifversostanzastillopen
\end{stanza}
\versostanzastillopenfalse
\end{poem}
\versopoemstillopenfalse
\fi
\ifversopoemstillopen
\end{poem}
\versopoemstillopenfalse
\fi
\ifrectopoempending
\begin{poem}
\global\rectopoempendingfalse
\fi
\ifrectostanzapending
\begin{stanza}
\global\rectostanzapendingfalse
\fi
\ifrectoemendationspending
\noemendyetfalse
\global\rectoemendationspendingfalse
\fi
\ifrectoexplanationspending
\noexplainyetfalse
\global\rectoexplanationspendingfalse
\fi
\versofalse\rectotrue\restorerectoline
\let\titletoothernotes=\rectotitletoothernotes}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\finishrectopage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\finishrectopage}{\saverectoline\rectofalse
\ifinpoem
\global\rectopoempendingtrue
\rectopoemstillopentrue
\fi
\ifinstanza
\global\rectostanzapendingtrue
\rectostanzastillopentrue
\global\rectopoempendingtrue
\rectopoemstillopentrue
\fi
\ifnoemendyet
\relax
\else
\global\rectoemendationspendingtrue
\noemendyetfalse
\fi
\ifnoexplainyet
\relax
\else
\global\versoexplanationspendingtrue
\noexplainyetfalse
\fi
% \clearpage % until footnote problem is solved
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\finishparalleltexts}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\finishparalleltexts}{
\ifinstanza
\end{stanza}
\fi
\ifinpoem
\end{poem}
\fi
\ifinprosesection
\end{prosesection}
\fi
\ifinquotedverse
\end{quotedverse}
\fi
\rectofalse\versofalse\paralleltextsfalse
\makeatletter\pmclresetsettitleinnotes\makeatother
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\makeversotextnotes}
% Next, the versotextnotes section:
% \begin{macrocode}
% tokens for changing the names of these notes
\newtoks{\versotextnotesname}
\versotextnotesname={TEXTUAL NOTES}
\newcommand{\changeversotextnotesname}[1]{\versotextnotesname={#1}}
\newtoks{\versotextnotesheadername}
\versotextnotesheadername={Textual Notes to}
\newcommand{\changeversotextnotesheader}[1]{\versotextnotesheadername={#1}}
\newtoks{\versotextnotescontentsname}
\versotextnotescontentsname={Textual Notes}
\newcommand{\changeversotextnotescontentsname}[1]{%
\versotextnotescontentsname={#1}}
% two column notes
\newif\ifversotextnotestwocol
\versotextnotestwocolfalse
% versotextnotes section setup
\newcommand{\makeversotextnotes}{\global\textnotesontrue
\newwrite\versotextnotes
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\immediate\openout\versotextnotes=\jobname.vtn
\literalversotextnote{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead{}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\versotextnotesheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\versotextnotesheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyfoot{}
\mark{3}
\setendnotessectiontitle{\the\versotextnotesname}{versotextnotes}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\ifversotextnotestwocol
\begin{multicols}{2}
\fi
\setlength{\parindent}{-10pt}
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\versotextnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifversotextnotessinglepar
\newif\ifnoversotextnoteyet
\newcommand{\literalversotextnote}[1]{\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\versotextnotes{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
}
\newcommand{\firstversotextnote}{\immediate\write\versotextnotes{\versotitletoothernotes}
\ifversotextnotessinglepar%
\literalversotextnote{\par}%
\fi% ifversotextnotessinglepa
}
\newcommand{\versotextnote}[2][0]{\versotitleinnotescheck
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\ifnoversotextnoteyet % firstversotextnote
\firstversotextnote
\fi %noversotextnoteyet
\global\noversotextnoteyetfalse
\immediate\write\versotextnotes{\checknoteheaders}%
\literalversotextnote{#2}%
\ifversotextnotessinglepar%
\literalversotextnote{\par}%
\fi% ifversotextnotessinglepar
\resetlemmacounters
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\makerectotextnotes}
% Next, the rectotextnotes section:
% \begin{macrocode}
% tokens for changing the names of these notes
\newtoks{\rectotextnotesname}
\rectotextnotesname={TEXTUAL NOTES}
\newcommand{\changerectotextnotesname}[1]{\rectotextnotesname={#1}}
\newtoks{\rectotextnotesheadername}
\rectotextnotesheadername={Textual Notes to}
\newcommand{\changerectotextnotesheader}[1]{\rectotextnotesheadername={#1}}
\newtoks{\rectotextnotescontentsname}
\rectotextnotescontentsname={Textual Notes}
\newcommand{\changerectotextnotescontentsname}[1]{%
\rectotextnotescontentsname={#1}}
% two column notes
\newif\ifrectotextnotestwocol
\rectotextnotestwocolfalse
% rectotextnotes section setup
\newcommand{\makerectotextnotes}{\global\textnotesontrue
\newwrite\rectotextnotes
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\immediate\openout\rectotextnotes=\jobname.rtn
\literalrectotextnote{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead{}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\rectotextnotesheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\rectotextnotesheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyfoot{}
\mark{3}
\setendnotessectiontitle{\the\rectotextnotesname}{rectotextnotes}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\ifrectotextnotestwocol
\begin{multicols}{2}
\fi
\setlength{\parindent}{-10pt}
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rectotextnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifrectotextnotessinglepar
\newif\ifnorectotextnoteyet
\newcommand{\literalrectotextnote}[1]{\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\rectotextnotes{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
}
\newcommand{\firstrectotextnote}{\immediate\write\rectotextnotes{\rectotitletoothernotes}
\ifrectotextnotessinglepar%
\literalrectotextnote{\par}%
\fi% ifrectotextnotessinglepar
}
\newcommand{\rectotextnote}[2][0]{\rectotitleinnotescheck
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\ifnorectotextnoteyet % firstrectotextnote
\firstrectotextnote
\fi %norectotextnoteyet
\global\norectotextnoteyetfalse
\immediate\write\rectotextnotes{\checknoteheaders}%
\literalrectotextnote{#2}%
\ifrectotextnotessinglepar%
\literalrectotextnote{\par}%
\fi% ifrectotextnotessinglepar
\resetlemmacounters
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\makeversoemendations}
% Next, the versoemendations section:
% \begin{macrocode}
% tokens for changing the names of these notes
\newtoks{\versoemendationsname}
\versoemendationsname={EMENDATIONS}
\newcommand{\changeversoemendationsname}[1]{\versoemendationsname={#1}}
\newtoks{\versoemendationsheadername}
\versoemendationsheadername={Emendations to}
\newcommand{\changeversoemendationsheader}[1]{\versoemendationsheadername={#1}}
\newtoks{\versoemendationscontentsname}
\versoemendationscontentsname={Emendations}
\newcommand{\changeversoemendationscontentsname}[1]{%
\versoemendationscontentsname={#1}}
% two column notes
\newif\ifversoemendationstwocol
\versoemendationstwocolfalse
% versoemendations section setup
\newcommand{\makeversoemendations}{\global\emendationsontrue
\newwrite\versoemendations
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\immediate\openout\versoemendations=\jobname.vem
\literalversoemendation{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead{}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\versoemendationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\versoemendationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyfoot{}
\mark{3}
\setendnotessectiontitle{\the\versoemendationsname}{versoemendations}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\ifversoemendationstwocol
\begin{multicols}{2}
\fi
\setlength{\parindent}{-10pt}
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\versoemendation}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifversoemendationssinglepar
\newif\ifnoversoemendationyet
\newcommand{\literalversoemendation}[1]{\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\versoemendations{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
}
\newcommand{\firstversoemendation}{\immediate\write\versoemendations{\versotitletoothernotes}
\ifversoemendationssinglepar%
\literalversoemendation{\par}%
\fi% ifversoemendationssinglepar
}
\newcommand{\versoemendation}[2][0]{\versotitleinnotescheck%
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\ifnoversoemendationyet % firstversoemendation
\firstversoemendation
\fi %noversoemendationyet
\global\noversoemendationyetfalse
\immediate\write\versoemendations{\checknoteheaders}%
\literalversoemendation{#2}%
\ifversoemendationssinglepar%
\literalversoemendation{\par}%
\fi% ifversoemendationssinglepar
\resetlemmacounters
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\makerectoemendations}
% Next, the rectoemendations section:
% \begin{macrocode}
% tokens for changing the names of these notes
\newtoks{\rectoemendationsname}
\rectoemendationsname={EMENDATIONS}
\newcommand{\changerectoemendationsname}[1]{\rectoemendationsname={#1}}
\newtoks{\rectoemendationsheadername}
\rectoemendationsheadername={Emendations to}
\newcommand{\changerectoemendationsheader}[1]{\rectoemendationsheadername={#1}}
\newtoks{\rectoemendationscontentsname}
\rectoemendationscontentsname={Emendations}
\newcommand{\changerectoemendationscontentsname}[1]{%
\rectoemendationscontentsname={#1}}
% two column notes
\newif\ifrectoemendationstwocol
\rectoemendationstwocolfalse
% rectoemendations section setup
\newcommand{\makerectoemendations}{\global\emendationsontrue
\newwrite\rectoemendations
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\immediate\openout\rectoemendations=\jobname.rem
\literalrectoemendation{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead{}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\rectoemendationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\rectoemendationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyfoot{}
\mark{3}
\setendnotessectiontitle{\the\rectoemendationsname}{rectoemendations}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\ifrectoemendationstwocol
\begin{multicols}{2}
\fi
\setlength{\parindent}{-10pt}
}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rectoemendation}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifrectoemendationssinglepar
\newif\ifnorectoemendationyet
\newcommand{\literalrectoemendation}[1]{\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\rectoemendations{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
}
\newcommand{\firstrectoemendation}{\immediate\write\rectoemendations{\rectotitletoothernotes}
\ifrectoemendationssinglepar%
\literalrectoemendation{\par}%
\fi% ifrectoemendationssinglepar
}
\newcommand{\rectoemendation}[2][0]{\rectotitleinnotescheck
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\ifnorectoemendationyet % firstrectoemendation
\firstrectoemendation
\fi %norectoemendationyet
\global\norectoemendationyetfalse
\immediate\write\rectoemendations{\checknoteheaders}%
\literalrectoemendation{#2}%
\ifrectoemendationssinglepar%
\literalrectoemendation{\par}%
\fi% ifrectoemendationssinglepar
\resetlemmacounters
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\makeversoexplanatorynotes}
% And the verso explanatory notes:
% \begin{macrocode}
% Tokens to change names of these notes
\newtoks{\versoexplanationsname}
\versoexplanationsname={EXPLANATORY NOTES}
\newcommand{\changeversoexplanationsname}[1]{\versoexplanationsname={#1}}
\newtoks{\versoexplanationsheadername}
\versoexplanationsheadername={Explanatory Notes to}
\newcommand{\changeversoexplanationsheader}[1]{\versoexplanationsheadername={#1}}
\newtoks{\versoexplanationscontentsname}
\versoexplanationscontentsname={Explanatory Notes}
\newcommand{\changeversoexplanationscontentsname}[1]{%
\versoexplanationscontentsname={#1}}
% Two column notes
\newif\ifversoexplanationstwocol
\versoexplanationstwocolfalse
% versoexplanatory notes setup
\newcommand{\makeversoexplanatorynotes}{\global\explanontrue
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\newwrite\versoexplanations
\immediate\openout\versoexplanations=\jobname.vex
\literalversoexplain{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\versoexplanationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\versoexplanationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyfoot{}
\mark{3}
\setendnotessectiontitle{\the\versoexplanationsname}{versoexplanatorynotes}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\ifversoexplanationstwocol
\begin{multicols}{2}
\fi
\setlength{\parindent}{-10pt}
}
}
% \begin{macro}{\versoexplanatory}
% Again, |\firstversoexplanatory| is internal, called by |\versoexplanatory|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\literalversoexplain}[1]{
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\versoexplanations{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
}
\newif\ifversoexplanationssinglepar
\newcommand{\firstversoexplanatory}{\immediate\write\versoexplanations{\versotitletoothernotes}
\ifversoexplanationssinglepar%
\literalversoexplain{\par}%
\fi}
\newif\ifnoversoexplainyet
\newcommand{\versoexplanatory}[2][0]{\versotitleinnotescheck%
\ifexplanon
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\ifnoversoexplainyet % first versoexplanation
\firstversoexplanatory
\fi %noversoexplainyet
\global\noversoexplainyetfalse
\immediate\write\versoexplanations{\checknoteheaders}%
\literalversoexplain{#2}%
\ifversoexplanationssinglepar%
\literalversoexplain{\par}%
\fi%
\fi % ifexplanon
\resetlemmacounters
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\makerectoexplanatorynotes}
% And the recto explanatory notes:
% \begin{macrocode}
% Tokens to change names of these notes
\newtoks{\rectoexplanationsname}
\rectoexplanationsname={EXPLANATORY NOTES}
\newcommand{\changerectoexplanationsname}[1]{\rectoexplanationsname={#1}}
\newtoks{\rectoexplanationsheadername}
\rectoexplanationsheadername={Explanatory Notes to}
\newcommand{\changerectoexplanationsheader}[1]{\rectoexplanationsheadername={#1}}
\newtoks{\rectoexplanationscontentsname}
\rectoexplanationscontentsname={Explanatory Notes}
\newcommand{\changerectoexplanationscontentsname}[1]{%
\rectoexplanationscontentsname={#1}}
% Two column notes
\newif\ifrectoexplanationstwocol
\rectoexplanationstwocolfalse
% rectoexplanatory notes setup
\newcommand{\makerectoexplanatorynotes}{\global\explanontrue
\global\verselinenumberstrue
\newwrite\rectoexplanations
\immediate\openout\rectoexplanations=\jobname.rex
\literalrectoexplain{\flushbottom{\par\clearpage
{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\rectoexplanationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\rectoexplanationsheadername~\mymarks}}}
\fancyfoot{}
\mark{3}
\setendnotessectiontitle{\the\rectoexplanationsname}{rectoexplanatorynotes}
\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\ifrectoexplanationstwocol
\begin{multicols}{2}
\fi
\setlength{\parindent}{-10pt}
}
}
% \begin{macro}{\rectoexplanatory}
% Again, |\firstrectoexplanatory| is internal, called by |\rectoexplanatory|.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\literalrectoexplain}[1]{
\begingroup
\def\next{#1}%
\newlinechar='40
\immediate\write\rectoexplanations{\expandafter\strip\meaning\next}%
\endgroup
}
\newif\ifrectoexplanationssinglepar
\newcommand{\firstrectoexplanatory}{\immediate\write\rectoexplanations{\rectotitletoothernotes}
\ifrectoexplanationssinglepar%
\literalrectoexplain{\par}%
\fi%
}
\newif\ifnorectoexplainyet
\newcommand{\rectoexplanatory}[2][0]{\rectotitleinnotescheck%
\ifexplanon
\setlemmarange{#1}%
\ifnorectoexplainyet % first rectoexplanation
\firstrectoexplanatory
\fi %norectoexplainyet
\global\norectoexplainyetfalse
\immediate\write\rectoexplanations{\checknoteheaders}%
\literalrectoexplain{#2}%
\ifrectoexplanationssinglepar%
\literalrectoexplain{\par}%
\fi%
\fi % ifexplanon
\resetlemmacounters
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\versoprosetextnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\versoprosetextnote}[3][0]{%
\iftextnoteson%
\versotitleinnotescheck
\unskip\proselinelabel{#2}%
\setproselemmarange{#2}{#1}%
\ifnoversotextnoteyet % firstversotextnote
\firstversotextnote
\fi %noversotextnoteyet
\global\noversotextnoteyetfalse
\immediate\write\versotextnotes{\checkprosenoteheaders}%
\literalversotextnote{#3}%
\ifversotextnotessinglepar%
\literalversotextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\resetlemmacounters%
\fi\unskip%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\versoproseemendation}
% Notice that it calls |\firstemendation| as usual.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\versoproseemendation}[3][0]{%
\ifemendationson%
\versotitleinnotescheck
\unskip\proselinelabel{#2}%
\setproselemmarange{#2}{#1}%
\ifredundantemendations
\iftextnoteson
\ifrangelemma
\versoprosetextnote[#1]{#2}{#3}%
\else
\versoprosetextnote{#2}{#3}%
\fi % ifrangelemma}
\fi %iftextnoteson
\ifversotextnotessinglepar%
\literalversotextnote{\par}%
\fi% iftextnotessinglepar
\fi % ifredundantemendations
\ifnoversoemendationyet % firstemendation
\firstversoemendation
\fi%noemendyet
\global\noversoemendationyetfalse
\immediate\write\versoemendations{\checkprosenoteheaders}%
\literalversoemendation{#3}%
\ifversoemendationssinglepar%
\literalversoemendation{\par}%
\fi% ifemendationssinglep
\resetlemmacounters%
\fi\unskip%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\versoproseexplanatory}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\versoproseexplanatory}[3][0]{%
\ifexplanon%
\versotitleinnotescheck
\unskip\proselinelabel{#2}%
\setproselemmarange{#2}{#1}%
\ifnoversoexplainyet% firstexplanation
\firstversoexplanatory%
\fi%noexplainyet
\global\noversoexplainyetfalse%
\immediate\write\versoexplanations{\checkprosenoteheaders}%
\literalversoexplain{#3}%
\ifversoexplanationssinglepar%
\literalversoexplain{\par}%
\fi% ifexplanationssinglepar
\resetlemmacounters%
\fi\unskip%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rectoprosetextnote}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\rectoprosetextnote}[3][0]{%
\iftextnoteson%
\rectotitleinnotescheck
\unskip\proselinelabel{#2}%
\setproselemmarange{#2}{#1}%
\ifnorectotextnoteyet % firstrectotextnote
\firstrectotextnote
\fi %norectotextnoteyet
\global\norectotextnoteyetfalse
\immediate\write\rectotextnotes{\checkprosenoteheaders}%
\literalrectotextnote{#3}%
\ifrectotextnotessinglepar%
\literalrectotextnote{\par}%
\fi%
\resetlemmacounters%
\fi\unskip%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rectoproseemendation}
% Notice that it calls |\firstemendation| as usual.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\rectoproseemendation}[3][0]{%
\ifemendationson%
\rectotitleinnotescheck
\unskip\proselinelabel{#2}%
\setproselemmarange{#2}{#1}%
\ifredundantemendations
\iftextnoteson
\ifrangelemma
\rectoprosetextnote[#1]{#2}{#3}%
\else
\rectoprosetextnote{#2}{#3}%
\fi % ifrangelemma}
\fi %iftextnoteson
\ifrectotextnotessinglepar%
\literalrectotextnote{\par}%
\fi% iftextnotessinglepar
\fi % ifredundantemendations
\ifnorectoemendationyet % firstemendation
\firstrectoemendation
\fi%noemendyet
\global\norectoemendationyetfalse
\immediate\write\rectoemendations{\checkprosenoteheaders}%
\literalrectoemendation{#3}%
\ifrectoemendationssinglepar%
\literalrectoemendation{\par}%
\fi% ifemendationssinglep
\resetlemmacounters%
\fi\unskip%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\rectoproseexplanatory}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\rectoproseexplanatory}[3][0]{%
\ifexplanon%
\rectotitleinnotescheck
\unskip\proselinelabel{#2}%
\setproselemmarange{#2}{#1}%
\ifnorectoexplainyet% firstexplanation
\firstrectoexplanatory%
\fi%noexplainyet
\global\norectoexplainyetfalse%
\immediate\write\rectoexplanations{\checkprosenoteheaders}%
\literalrectoexplain{#3}%
\ifrectoexplanationssinglepar%
\literalrectoexplain{\par}%
\fi% ifexplanationssinglepar
\resetlemmacounters%
\fi\unskip%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmclresetsettitleinnotes}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmclresetsettitleinnotes}{%
\noversoemendationyettrue%
\noversoexplainyettrue%
\noversotextnoteyettrue%
\norectoemendationyettrue%
\norectoexplainyettrue%
\norectotextnoteyettrue%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmclversoresetsettitleinnotes}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmclversoresetsettitleinnotes}{%
\noversoemendationyettrue%
\noversoexplainyettrue%
\noversotextnoteyettrue%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\pmclrectoresetsettitleinnotes}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\pmclrectoresetsettitleinnotes}{%
\norectoemendationyettrue%
\norectoexplainyettrue%
\norectotextnoteyettrue%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\literalexplain}
% \begin{macrocode}
\let\literalexplanatory=\literalexplain
\let\literalversoexplanatory=\literalversoexplain
\let\literalrectoexplanatory=\literalrectoexplain
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putversotextnotes} Does the same for textual notes.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putversotextnotes}{
\iftextnoteson
\ifversotextnotestwocol
\literalversotextnote{\end{multicols}}
\fi %\iftextnotetwocol
\newpage
\hyphenationforsmall
\immediate\closeout\versotextnotes
\input \jobname.vtn
\contentsendnotestitle{\the\versotextnotescontentsname}{versotextnotes}
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putrectotextnotes} Does the same for recto textual notes.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putrectotextnotes}{
\iftextnoteson
\ifrectotextnotestwocol
\literalrectotextnote{\end{multicols}}
\fi %\iftextnotetwocol
\newpage
\hyphenationforsmall
\immediate\closeout\rectotextnotes
\input \jobname.rtn
\contentsendnotestitle{\the\rectotextnotescontentsname}{rectotextnotes}
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putversoemendations} This macro closes external file
% for verso emendations,
% reads it in, and puts an entry for the emendations into the table of contents
% file. The macro tests to see whether there is an .aux file from a previous run
% before doing this, and complains in the .log file if the .aux file does not
% exist.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putversoemendations}{
\ifemendationson
\ifversoemendationstwocol
\literalversoemendation{\end{multicols}}
\fi %\iftextnotetwocol
\newpage
\hyphenationforsmall
\immediate\closeout\versoemendations
\input \jobname.vem
\contentsendnotestitle{\the\versoemendationscontentsname}{versoemendations}
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putrectoemendations} This macro closes external file
% for recto emendations,
% reads it in, and puts an entry for the emendations into the table of contents
% file. The macro tests to see whether there is an .aux file from a previous run
% before doing this, and complains in the .log file if the .aux file does not
% exist.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putrectoemendations}{
\ifemendationson
\ifrectoemendationstwocol
\literalrectoemendation{\end{multicols}}
\fi %\iftextnotetwocol
\newpage
\hyphenationforsmall
\immediate\closeout\rectoemendations
\input \jobname.rem
\contentsendnotestitle{\the\rectoemendationscontentsname}{rectoemendations}
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putversoexplanatorynotes} Does the same for verso explanatory notes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putversoexplanatorynotes}{
\ifexplanon
\ifversoexplanationstwocol
\literalversoexplain{\end{multicols}}
\fi %\iftextnotetwocol
\newpage
\hyphenationforsmall
\immediate\closeout\versoexplanations
\input \jobname.vex
\ifpoemcontentson
\ifexplanon
\contentsendnotestitle{\the\versoexplanationscontentsname}{versoexplanatorynotes}
\fi
\fi
\else
\relax
\fi}% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putrectoexplanatorynotes} Does the same for recto explanatory notes.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putrectoexplanatorynotes}{
\ifexplanon
\ifrectoexplanationstwocol
\literalrectoexplain{\end{multicols}}
\fi %\iftextnotetwocol
\newpage
\hyphenationforsmall
\immediate\closeout\rectoexplanations
\input \jobname.rex
\ifpoemcontentson
\ifexplanon
\contentsendnotestitle{\the\rectoexplanationscontentsname}{rectoexplanatorynotes}
\fi
\fi
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Parallel Texts in Prose}
% First, some booleans.
% \begin{macro}{\ifversopassagestillopen}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifversopassagestillopen
\versopassagestillopenfalse
\newif\ifrectopassagestillopen
\rectopassagestillopenfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% When the last recto page ended, was the last paragraph finished?
% True means the next recto should continue the paragraph from the last recto
% \begin{macro}{\ifinpara}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newif\ifinpara
\inparafalse
\newif\ifrectoparapending
\rectoparapendingfalse
\newif\ifrectoparaopen
\rectoparaopenfalse
\newif\ifversoparapending
\versoparapendingfalse
\newif\ifversoparaopen
\versoparaopenfalse
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Counters: prosepage versoproselinecounter, etc., and commands to set them.
% \begin{macro}{\makeprosepagelabel}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{prosepage}
\setcounter{prosepage}{1}
\newcommand{\makeprosepagelabel}{\proselinelabel{prosepageno\theprosepage}}
\newcounter{versoproselinecounter}
\newcommand{\saveversoproseline}{%
\refstepcounter{prosepage}%
\makeprosepagelabel
\setcounterfromref{versoproselinecounter}{prosepageno\theprosepage}
}
\newcommand{\restoreversoproseline}{\setcounter{linenumber}{\value{versoproselinecounter}}}%
\newcounter{rectoproselinecounter}
\newcommand{\saverectoproseline}{%
\refstepcounter{prosepage}%
\makeprosepagelabel
\setcounterfromref{rectoproselinecounter}{prosepageno\theprosepage}
}
\newcommand{\restorerectoproseline}{\setcounter{linenumber}%
{\value{rectoproselinecounter}}}%
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% The |\parastart| and |\paraend| macros, to mark the beginning and end
% of paragraphs
% \begin{macro}{\parastart}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\parastart}{\inparatrue}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\paraend}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\paraend}{\inparafalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% |\startparalleltextsprose| and |\finishparalleltextsprose|
% \begin{macro}{\startparalleltextsprose}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\startparalleltextsprose}{%
\leavevmode
\cleartoverso
\paralleltextstrue
\inparafalse
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\finishparalleltextsprose}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\finishparalleltextsprose}{%
\paralleltextsfalse}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{parallelprose}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{parallelprose}{\startparalleltextprose} {\finishparalleltextsprose}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% |\startversoprosepage|
% \begin{macro}{\startversoprosepage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\startversoprosepage}{%
\let\titletoothernotes=\versotitletoothernotes
\restoreversoproseline%
\ifversoparapending{\inparatrue}\else{\inparafalse}\fi%
\ifinpara{\noindent}\else{\relax}\fi%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% |\finishversoprosepage|
% \begin{macro}{\finishversoprosepage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\finishversoprosepage}{%
\ifinpara{\versoparapendingtrue}\else{\versoparapendingfalse}\fi%
\saveversoproseline%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% |\startrectoprosepage|
% \begin{macro}{\startrectoprosepage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\startrectoprosepage}{%
\let\titletoothernotes=\rectotitletoothernotes
\restorerectoproseline%
\ifrectoparapending{\inparatrue}\else{\inparafalse}\fi%
\ifinpara{\noindent}\else{\relax}\fi%
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\finishrectoprosepage}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\finishrectoprosepage}{%
\ifinpara{\rectoparapendingtrue}\else{\rectoparapendingfalse}\fi%
\saverectoproseline
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Finishing up}
% \begin{macro}{\finish}
% The |\finish| macro reads in the notes,
% the index (previously created from your .aux file by MakeIndex), and
% the contents sections and sets them. The notes sections send page
% information to the contents file as they are set. Then the page
% information for the index is sent to the contents file. Finally the
% contents file is closed and read in. If you have an editor's
% introduction or a list of abbreviations, copy this macro, uncomment out the commented out lines,
% and issue it all as a |\renewcommand| for |\finish|. Be sure to
% have the command |\label{editorsintroduction}| on the first page of
% your introduction.
% It usually takes three
% passes to get the table of contents and the index files correct.
%
% The consequence of doing using |\finish| is that the table of
% contents comes last. There are ways around this that are described
% earlier. The notes sections are all typeset in the |\small| size.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\finish}{
\small\bf \hyphenchar\font=45
\small\it \hyphenchar\font=45
\small\rm \hyphenchar\font=45
\ifemendationson
\newpage
\immediate\closeout\emendations
\input \jobname.emd
\fi
\iftextnoteson
\newpage
\immediate\closeout\textnotes
\input \jobname.ent
\newpage
\fi
\ifexplanon
\immediate\closeout\explanations
\input \jobname.enx
\newpage
\fi
\ifindexingon
\printindex
\fi
\ifpoemcontentson
% \immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\vspace{10pt}\string\par}
% \immediate\write
% \poemcontents{\string\contentspoemtitlefont\ Introduction to the Notes}
% \immediate\write
% \poemcontents{\string~ / \string~\ \string\pageref{editorsintroduction} \string\par}
% \immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\par \string\smallskip}
% \immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\contentspoemtitlefont\ Abbreviations}
% \immediate\write
% \poemcontents{\string~ / \string~\ \string\pageref{abbreviations} \string\par}
% \immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\par \string\smallskip}
\ifemendationson
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\contentspoemtitlefont\
\the\emendationscontentsname}
\immediate\write
\poemcontents{\string~ / \string~\ \string\pageref{emendationnotes} \string\par}
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\par \string\smallskip}
\fi
\iftextnoteson
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\contentspoemtitlefont\
\the\textnotescontentsname}
\immediate\write
\poemcontents{\string~ / \string~\ \string\pageref{textualnotes} \string\par}
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\par \string\smallskip}
\fi
\ifexplanon
\immediate\write
\poemcontents{\string\contentspoemtitlefont\ \the\explanationscontentsname}
\immediate\write
\poemcontents{\string~ / \string~\ \string\pageref{explanatorynotes}}
\fi
\ifindexingon
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\par \string\smallskip}
\immediate\write
\poemcontents{\string\contentspoemtitlefont\ \the\poemindexcontentsname}
\immediate\write
\poemcontents{\string~ / \string~\ \string\pageref{indexpage}\string\par}
\fi
\immediate\closeout\poemcontents
\input \jobname.ctn
\fi
\clearpage
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}
\vspace{106pt}
\begin{center}
{\poemtitlefont Note}
\end{center}
\noindent The symbol \stanzaatbottomvalue\ is used to indicate
a space between sections of a poem
wherever such spaces are lost in pagination.
\cleardoublepage
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\testforauxonfirstrun} Put this in the preamble. It suppresses
% |\finish|, |\puttextnotes|, |\putemendations|, and |\putexplanatory| unless
% there is an .aux file from a previous run, this avoiding some error messages.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\testforauxonfirstrun}{\IfFileExists{\jobname.aux}{\relax}
{\let\finish=\relax
\let\puttextnotes=\relax
\let\putexplanatory=\relax
\let\putemendations=\relax
\typeout{Run again to read in endnotes files}}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putpoemcontents}
% You may wish to do the tasks done by |\finish| separately. This will give you
% more flexibility. |\putpoemcontents| inserts the table of contents file from a
% prior run. Be sure to issue it \emph{before} you issue |\makepoemcontents.|
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putpoemcontents}{
\IfFileExists{\jobname.ctn}{\input \jobname.ctn
\clearpage \resetpagestyle\normalsize}
{\typeout{Run again to input contents file here}}
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\hyphenationforsmall} This command restores hyphenation for the
% backmatter sections of the book. Hyphenation is turned off in the main body of
% the book, because verse should not be hyphenated. This macro turns hyphenation
% on, but only for small roman, italic, and bold fonts. Backmatter sections are
% all set in |\small|. |\putemendations|, |\puttextnotes|, and
% |\putexplanatory| all call |\hyphenationforsmall|.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\hyphenationforsmall}{\small\bf \hyphenchar\font=45
\small\it \hyphenchar\font=45
\small\rm \hyphenchar\font=45
}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putemendations} This macro closes external file for emendations,
% reads it in, and puts an entry for the emendations into the table of contents
% file. The macro tests to see whether there is an .aux file from a previous run
% before doing this, and complains in the .log file if the .aux file does not
% exist.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putemendations}{
\ifemendationson
\ifemendationstwocol
\literalemend{\end{multicols}}
\fi %\iftextnotetwocol
\newpage
\hyphenationforsmall
\immediate\closeout\emendations
\input \jobname.emd
\contentsendnotestitle{\the\emendationscontentsname}{emendationnotes}
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putexplanatory} Does the same for explanatory notes.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\putexplanatory}{
\ifexplanon
\ifexplanationstwocol
\literalexplain{\end{multicols}}
\fi %\iftextnotetwocol
\newpage
\hyphenationforsmall
\immediate\closeout\explanations
\input \jobname.enx
\ifpoemcontentson
\ifexplanon
\contentsendnotestitle{\the\explanationscontentsname}{explanatorynotes}
\fi
\fi
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\puttextnotes} Does the same for textual notes.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\puttextnotes}{
\iftextnoteson
\iftextnotestwocol
\literaltextnote{\end{multicols}}
\fi %\iftextnotetwocol
\newpage
\hyphenationforsmall
\immediate\closeout\textnotes
\input \jobname.ent
\contentsendnotestitle{\the\textnotescontentsname}{textualnotes}
\else
\relax
\fi}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{\putpoemindex} Reads in the index of titles and first lines
% and adds an entry for the index
% into the table of contents.
%
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks{\poemindexname}
\poemindexname={Index of Titles and First Lines}
\newcommand{\changepoemindexname}[1]{\poemindexname={#1}}
\newtoks{\poemindexheadername}
\poemindexheadername={Index of Titles and First Lines}
\newcommand{\changepoemindexheader}[1]{\poemindexheadername={#1}}
\newtoks{\poemindexcontentsname}
\poemindexcontentsname={Index of Titles and First Lines}
\newcommand{\changepoemindexcontentsname}[1]{\poemindexcontentsname={#1}}
\newcommand{\putpoemindex}{\ifindexingon
\printindex
\fi
\ifpoemcontentson\ifindexingon
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\par \string\smallskip}
\immediate\write
\poemcontents{\string\contentspoemtitlefont\ \the\poemindexcontentsname}
\immediate\write
\poemcontents{\string~\string\contentsleaders \string~\ \string\pageref{indexpage}\string\par}
\fi\fi}
\newcommand{\putmultiplepoemindex}[4]{%
\ifindexingon
\poemindexname={#2}
\poemindexheadername={#3}
\poemindexcontentsname={#4}
\poemindexlabelname={#4}
\printindex[#1][#2]
\fi
\ifpoemcontentson\ifindexingon
\immediate\write\poemcontents{\string\par \string\smallskip}
\immediate\write
\poemcontents{\string\contentspoemtitlefont\ \the\poemindexcontentsname}
\immediate\write
\poemcontents{\string~ \string\contentsleaders \string~\
\string\pageref{\the\poemindexlabelname}\string\par}
\fi\fi
}
\newcommand{\noteaboutstanzamarkpage}{\begin{volumetitlepage}
%\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}
\vspace{106pt}
\begin{center}
{\poemtitlefont Note}
\end{center}
\noindent The symbol \stanzaatbottomvalue\ is used to indicate
a space between sections of a poem
wherever such spaces are lost in pagination.
\end{volumetitlepage}}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \subsection{~Visual formatting} The ideal in \LaTeX\ is to separate
% content markup and formatting as completely as possible. In the text
% itself you simply mark the logical units (a poem, a title, a stanza,
% a textual note), and a header program like this interprets the
% meaning of those terms typographically. However, one still winds up
% having to do some visual formatting. Sometimes you have to enlarge or
% shrink a page by one line in order to avoid an intractable widow or
% club line, and when one does so one must be careful to do the same to
% the other member of the two-page spread of which that page is a part.
% These commands enable one to wiggle pagelength enough to handle these
% problems.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\longpage}{\enlargethispage{\baselineskip}}
\newcommand{\shortpage}{\enlargethispage{-\baselineskip}}
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \subsection{~Special environments: cjquotation and theindex}
% An environment for special prose quotations within verse
% as in ``Chief Joseph of the Nez Perce''
%
% \goodbreak
%
% \begin{macro}{cjquotation}
% \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{cjquotation}
{\tolerance=2000%
\vspace{-\bigskipamount}
\restoreverselinenumber
\language=255
\noindent\relax
\list{}{\listparindent 0em%
\itemindent 0em%
\rightmargin 2em%
\leftmargin 2em%
\topsep 0em%
\parskip 0em%
\itemindent \listparindent
\rightmargin \leftmargin
\parsep \z@ \@plus\p@}%
\item[]
}
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{theindex}
% And the environment for the index:
% \begin{macrocode}
\newtoks{\poemindexlabelname}
\poemindexlabelname={indexpage}
\newcommand{\changepoemindexlabelname}[1]{\poemindexlabelname={#1}}
\renewenvironment{theindex}
{{\par\clearpage{\pagestyle{volumetitlestyle}\cleardoublepage}
\thispagestyle{volumetitlestyle}}
\makeatletter
\def\pmclidxitem{\par\hangindent 1em}
\fancyhead[RO,LE]{{\small\textrm{\thepage}}}
\fancyhead[CO]{{\small{\em \the\poemindexheadername}}}
\fancyhead[CE]{{\small{\em \the\poemindexheadername}}}
\fancyfoot{}
\label{\the\poemindexlabelname}
\lefthyphenmin=2\tolerance=500\language=0
\normalfont \backmattertextfont
\raggedright
\begin{multicols}
{2}[\backmattersink\begin{center}{\normalfont
\backmatterheaderfont \the\poemindexname}\end{center}
\backmatterafterheadersink]%
\let\item\pmclidxitem}
{\end{multicols}\clearpage}
\makeatother
% \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% Finally, some other miscellaneous environments.
% \begin{macrocode}
\newlength{\epigraphquoteleftmargin}
\newlength{\epigraphquoterightmargin}
\setlength{\epigraphquoteleftmargin}{1.5em}
\setlength{\epigraphquoterightmargin}{1.5em}
\newif\ifleftalignepigraphs
\leftalignepigraphsfalse
\makeatletter
\newenvironment{epigraphquote}{\list{}{%
\ifleftalignepigraphs\left@ligntitleblock%
\rightmargin 1sp\leftmargin \lefttitlemargin%
\else
\rightmargin\epigraphquoterightmargin%
\leftmargin\epigraphquoteleftmargin%
\fi
\topsep 0pt%
\partopsep 0pt%
\listparindent 0pt%
}%
\item\relax}
{\endlist}\makeatother
\newenvironment{volumetitlepagequote}{\list{}{\rightmargin \voladditionalamount%
\leftmargin \voladditionalamount%
\topsep 0pt%
\partopsep 0pt%
\listparindent 0pt
}%
\item\relax}
{\endlist}
% \end{macrocode}
% \clearpage
% \Finale
\endinput
--------------060108090809060900030409--